Acs 1000 Abb

ABB
ACS1000
Medium Voltage Drives
Signal and Parameter Table

Software Version: MSAI5150
Release Date: 03/08/2017
© ABB Switzerland Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

ABB
ABB reserves all rights to this document. Misuse, in particular duplication

and forwarding to third parties, is not permitted.
This document has been checked with due care and attention. However,
should the user find any errors, these should be reported to ABB.
ABB aims to maintain the most modern standard, therefore, entries in this
manual may differ from the actual product.
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate
information and data via a network interface. It is Customer's sole
responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection
between the product and Customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). Customer shall establish and maintain any appropriate
measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls,
application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of
anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system
and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized
access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information.
2/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................ 3
Signal and Parameter Table ............................................................................................... 6

Group 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS ..............................................................................................................7
Group 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS ..............................................................................................................9
Group 3 ACTUAL SIGNALS ............................................................................................................11
Group 6 INFORMATION .................................................................................................................21
Group 7 CONTROL WORDS ..........................................................................................................25
Group 8 STATUS WORDS..............................................................................................................30
Group 9 FAULT AND ALARM WORDS ...........................................................................................37
Group 11 START/STOP/DIR ...........................................................................................................61
Group 12 REFERENCE SELECT....................................................................................................67
Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS.......................................................................................................74
Group 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................84
Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS...................................................................................................87
Group 16 SYST CTRL INPUT .........................................................................................................92
Group 17 UTILITIES........................................................................................................................96
Group 18 PROCESS SPEED ..........................................................................................................97
Group 19 DATA STORTRANSF ......................................................................................................99
Group 20 LIMITS ...........................................................................................................................107
Group 21 START/STOP/MCB .......................................................................................................110
Group 22 RAMP FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................118
Group 23 SPEED REFERENCE ...................................................................................................121
Group 24 SPEED CONTROL ........................................................................................................125
Group 25 TORQUE REFERENCE ................................................................................................131
Group 26 TORQREF HANDLING..................................................................................................134
Group 27 FLUX CONTROL ...........................................................................................................136
Group 28 DC LINK CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 137
Group 29 SCALAR CONTROL ......................................................................................................139
Group 30 MOTOR PROTECTION .................................................................................................141
Group 31 FAULT FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................................148
Group 32 SUPERVISION ..............................................................................................................151
Group 33 CONSTANT SPEED......................................................................................................154
Group 34 CRITICAL SPEED .........................................................................................................157
Group 35 EXT MOTOR PROT ......................................................................................................159
Group 36 TRANSFORMER PROT ................................................................................................165
Group 37 EXT INV PROTECT ......................................................................................................168
Group 38 OPTIONAL FUNC ......................................................................................................... 170
Group 39 RIDE THROUGH ...........................................................................................................174
Group 40 PID-CONTROL ..............................................................................................................176
Group 41 COOLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................182
Group 42 LOAD PROTECTION ....................................................................................................217
Group 43 ESP PROTECTION .......................................................................................................222
Group 48 CUSTOMER SUP SIG...................................................................................................224
Group 50 SPEED MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................230
Group 51 MASTER ADAPTER......................................................................................................232
MSAI5150 ACS1000 3/389

ABB
Group 52 EC FAN ........................................................................................................................ 234
Group 55 MOTOR DATA 1 ........................................................................................................... 241
Group 56 MOTOR DATA 2 ........................................................................................................... 245
Group 57 MOTOR DATA 3 ........................................................................................................... 246
Group 58 MOTOR DATA 4 ........................................................................................................... 247
Group 60 CH4 ACTUAL SIGNALS ............................................................................................... 257
Group 61 CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE.......................................................................... 259
Group 62 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION ............................................................................ 260
Group 63 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION ............................................................................ 265
Group 64 ACTUAL SIGNALS ....................................................................................................... 270
Group 65 SYNCHRON BYPASS .................................................................................................. 273
Group 66 UTILITY ........................................................................................................................ 277
Group 70 DDCS CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 281
Group 72 DI FUNCTION SEL ....................................................................................................... 293
Group 75 OPTION MODULES ..................................................................................................... 295
Group 80 ACT SIGNALS IO3 ....................................................................................................... 297
Group 81 AN INPUT IOEC3 ......................................................................................................... 301
Group 82 DIG INPUT IOEC3 ........................................................................................................ 305
Group 83 AN OUTPUT IOEC3 ..................................................................................................... 306
Group 84 DIG OUTPUT IOEC3 .................................................................................................... 308
Group 85 ACT SIGNALS IO4 ....................................................................................................... 313
Group 86 AN INPUT IOEC4 ......................................................................................................... 316
Group 87 DIG INPUT IOEC4 ........................................................................................................ 319
Group 88 AN OUTPUT IOEC4 ..................................................................................................... 320
Group 89 DIG OUTPUT IOEC4 .................................................................................................... 322
Group 90 D SET REC ADDR ....................................................................................................... 327
Group 91 D SET TR ADDR .......................................................................................................... 329
Group 97 PSTD BUFFER............................................................................................................. 341
Group 98 REAL TIME CLOCK ..................................................................................................... 342
Group 99 START-UP DATA ......................................................................................................... 344
Chapter 1 − Fieldbus Control ......................................................................................... 347

1.1 Fieldbus Communication ..................................................................................................... 347
1.1.1 Fieldbus / DDCS Communication ............................................................................... 347
1.1.2 Fieldbus Adapter Configuration .................................................................................. 348
1.1.3 ABB AC400 – Advant Controller Configuration ........................................................... 348
1.1.4 Integer Scaling on the DDCS Link .............................................................................. 349
1.2 Fieldbus Interface Data Set 1 … 17 Transmit and Receive ................................................. 350
1.2.1 Data Set – Definition .................................................................................................. 350
1.2.2 Data Set - Data Flow .................................................................................................. 350
1.2.3 Data Set - Control Structure ....................................................................................... 351
1.3 Fieldbus Interface Data Set 18 … 51 Transmit and Receive................................................ 353
1.3.1 Data Set – Definition .................................................................................................. 353
1.3.2 Data Set – Data Flow ................................................................................................. 353
1.3.3 Data Set – Control Structure ...................................................................................... 354
1.3.4 Special Data Sets 50 & 51 Communication ................................................................ 355
1.4 Statemachine for Fieldbus Control ...................................................................................... 356

ABB
1.5 Example of a Fieldbus Controlled Drive ...............................................................................357
1.5.1 Default Parameter Settings .........................................................................................357
1.5.2 Pre-Conditions ............................................................................................................358
1.5.3 Fault Reset..................................................................................................................358
1.5.4 Charging the DC Link (Switch on the MCB).................................................................359
1.5.5 Start the Motor (Switch Dive to Running) ....................................................................360
1.5.6 Change the Direction of Rotation (Motor is Running with Given Speed) ......................361
1.5.7 Stop by “RAMP STOP” (Motor is Running with Given Speed) .....................................362
1.5.8 Stop by “COAST STOP” (Motor is Running with Given Speed) ...................................363
1.5.9 Emergency Off (Motor is Running with Given Speed) .................................................364
1.5.10 Emergency Stop (Motor is Running with Given Speed). ..............................................365
1.6 Fieldbus Parameter Settings, Modbus & Profibus Addresses...............................................366
1.6.1 MODBUS – Module.....................................................................................................366
1.6.2 PROFIBUS – Module ..................................................................................................367
Chapter 2 − Fault Tracing ............................................................................................... 374

2.1 Description of Fault Trip Reactions.......................................................................................374
2.1.1 Soft Stop (Trip Reaction) .............................................................................................374
2.1.2 Trip with demagnetization ...........................................................................................374
2.1.3 Trip without demagnetization (fast) .............................................................................375
2.1.4 Trip with zero vector ....................................................................................................375
Chapter 3 − Stop Modes ................................................................................................. 376

3.1 Ramp Stop Mode .................................................................................................................376
3.2 Torque Stop Mode ...............................................................................................................376
3.3 Coast Stop Mode .................................................................................................................376
Chapter 4 − Input and Output Signals IOEC 1 … 6 ....................................................... 377

4.1 Basic I/O-Board IOEC 1 .......................................................................................................377
4.2 Basic I/O-Board IOEC 2 .......................................................................................................379
4.3 Optional I/O Board IOEC 3 ...................................................................................................380
4.4 Optional I/O Board IOEC 4 ...................................................................................................382
4.5 Optional I/O Board IOEC 5 – Synchronised Bypass .............................................................383
4.6 Optional I/O Board IOEC 6 – Synchronised Bypass (only for 2…4 Motors) ..........................384
Chapter 5 − Service and Comissioning Parameters..................................................... 385

5.1 Service Data ........................................................................................................................385
5.2 Group 150 MOTOR PARAMETERS (Partly) ........................................................................387
5.3 Group 152 SINE FILTER PARA (Partly) ...............................................................................388
5.4 Group 191 Diagnostics .........................................................................................................389
MSAI5150 ACS1000 5/389

ABB
If information is required beyond the instructions in this manual, contact
ABB as follows:
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Medium Voltage Drives
CH-5300 Turgi, Switzerland
Phone:+41 844 845 845

Fax:+41 58 589 2984
E-mailmvdrives@ch.abb.com

ABB
Group 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured and calculated values
01.01 ProcessSpeed [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Speed based on scaling and Units in group18. Default is 100% at motor maximum speed. (see Figure
18-1)
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
01.02 MOTOR SPEED [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.04) Actual motor speed.
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: see parameter
50.01
01.03 FILT MOT SPEED [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.58) Filtered actual speed.
50.01
01.04 MOTOR SPEED TACHO [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.37) Measured actual speed from pulse encoder. This measurement is active if SPEED FB SEL =
ENCODER is selected. (see Figure 50-1) About the Direction of Rotating: When the motor is rotating in
the correct direction and the speed reference is positive, then actual speed SPEED MEASURED must
be positive as well. If this is not the case, the incorrect connection can be located as follows: If the
direction of rotation is correct but actual speed is negative, the phases of the pulse encoder channel
wires is reversed If the direction of rotation is incorrect and actual speed is negative; two phases of the
motor cables are connected incorrectly. If the direction of rotation is incorrect and actual speed is
positive, both the motor and pulse encoder are connected incorrectly.
50.01
01.06 FREQUENCY [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.04) Calculated frequency of the motor.
Unit: Hz Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 Hz
01.07 FILT MOT RMS CUR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.40) Measured motor current absolute value (rms).
Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 A
01.08 FILT MOT TORQUE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.15) Filtered motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque.
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 %
01.09 MOTOR TORQUE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.03) Motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque.
01.10 FILTERED POWER % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.17) Motor shaft power in percent of the rated motor power.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 7/389

ABB
01.11 STATOR VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(161.09) Calculated motor output voltage.
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1%
01.12 MOTOR COSFII ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.10) Actual cosfii of asynchronous machine.
Unit: Type: R Int. scaling: 1000 == 1
01.13 RS [ohm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(150.01) Estimated stator resistance
Unit: Ohm Type: R Int. scaling: 200 == 1 Ohm
01.14 LS [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Stator main inductance
Unit: mH Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1
01.15 SIGMALS [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Stator stray inductance.
01.16 ROTOR TIMECONST [ms] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Rotor time constant
Unit: ms Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
01.18 MotCurrPhaseU_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.19) Measured motor current of phase U, absolute value (rms).
01.19 MotCurrPhaseV_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.20) Calculated motor current of phase V, absolute value (rms).
01.20 MotCurrPhaseW_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.21) Measured motor current of phase W, absolute value (rms).
01.21 MotCurrUnbalance [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Calculated maximal motor current phase unbalance between all three phases (U, V, W).

ABB
2 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured or calculated water cooling values
02.01 CONTROL MODE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Control mode in use:
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 Speed control
2 Torque control TORQ_REF_1 effects the output of TORQ REF 3
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1
02.02 DC VOLTAGE UPPER [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

M01.Sts_Above_Limit
(160.11) Measured dc bus voltage 1 (positive).
Unit: V Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 V
02.03 DC VOLTAGE UPP % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.12) Measured dc bus voltage 1 (positive), scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total DC-link.
02.04 DC VOLTAGE LOWER [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.13) Measured dc bus voltage 2 (negative).
02.05 DC VOLTAGE LOW % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.14) Measured dc bus voltage 2 (negative), scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total DC-link
02.06 DC VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.09) Measured dc bus voltage (Sum of Udc1 and Udc2)
02.07 DC VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.10) Measured dc bus voltage (Sum of Udc1 and Udc2), scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total
DC-link.
02.08 NP VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.15) Measured dc bus voltage. (Difference between Udc2 and Udc1)
02.09 NP VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.16) Measured dc bus voltage. (Difference between Udc2 and Udc1), scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage
of the total DC-link.
02.10 PHASE A INV CURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.71) Measured inverter current IU (Lf Filter inductance, instantaneous).
Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1A
MSAI5150 ACS1000 9/389

ABB
02.11 PHASE C INV CURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(160.75) Measured inverter current IW (Lf Filter inductance, instantaneous).
02.12 GROUND CURRENT [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.77) Measured inverter earth current in the filter star.
02.13 PHASE A FILTCURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.51) Measured filter current IU (Cf Filter capacitance, instantaneous).
02.14 PHASE C FILTCURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.55) Measured filter current IW (Cf Filter capacitance, instantaneous).
02.15 SWITCHING FREQ [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.33) Measured actual inverter switching frequency.
02.16 INV AIR TEMP 1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(160.48) Measured inverter air temperature 1 (ADCVI).
Unit: C Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 °C

ABB
3 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured or calculated values in the speed and torque reference chain.
03.01 SPEED REF 2 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.01) Limited speed reference (see Figure 23-1).
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: see par 50-01
03.02 SPEED REF 3 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.02) Speed reference after the speed ramp (see Figure 23-1).
03.03 SPEED ERROR NEG [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.05) Difference between reference and the actual value. If parameter WINDOW_SEL_ON is enabled,
SPEED_ERROR_NEG is filtered through the window function (see Figure 23-1).
03.04 TORQUE PROP REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.06) P-part effect at the output of PID - controller. Output of PID-controller is formed from the output
parameters TORQUE PROP REF, TORQUE INTEG REF and TORQ ACC COMP REF (see Figure 24-
1).
03.05 TORQUE INTEG REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.07) Integration part effect at the output of the PID-controller. Output of PID-controller is formed from the
output parameters TORQUE PROP REF, TORQUE INTEG REF, TORQ DER REF and TORQ ACC
COMP REF (see Figure 24-1).
03.06 TORQUE DER REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.08) Derivation part effect at the output of the PID-controller. Output of PID-controller is formed from the
output parameters TORQUE PROP REF, TORQUE INTEG REF, TORQ DER REF and TORQ ACC
COMP REF (see Figure 24-1).
03.07 TORQ ACC COMP REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.09) Output of the acceleration compensation (see Figure 23-1).
03.08 TORQUE REF 1 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.10) Limited torque reference value in the torque reference chain (see Figure 25-1).

(122.11) Final torque reference from the speed control chain (see Figure 24-1).

(122.12) Torque reference after the torque selector block (see Figure 26-1).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 11/389

ABB
(122.13) Sum of TORQUE REF 3 and LOAD COMPENSATION (see Figure 26-1).

(122.14) Sum of TORQUE REF 4 and TORQUE STEP (see Figure 26-1).
03.13 USED TORQUE REF % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.08) Limited torque reference. This is the final torque input for the internal torque controller (see Figure 26 1).
Note! In Group 8.06 (LIMIT WORD 1) can be checked if the TORQ USED REF is limited by a limiter. If
27.03 (FLUX REF) are zero, the TORQUE USED REF will be zero as well.
03.14 FLUX REF OUT [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(130.09) Used flux reference value of the motor (see Figure 29-1).
03.15 FLUX ACT [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.01) Calculated flux actual value of the motor (see Figure 29-1).
03.16 FWP [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(130.08) Actual field weakening point in percentage of nominal field weakening point.
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling:
03.17 RAMPOUT DV/DT [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(122.15) Speed reference change rpm/s at the output of the speed ramp generator.
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: See parameter
50.01
03.18 PID-Ctrl Act1 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Scaled feedback signal 1 for the PID controller.
03.19 PID-Ctrl Act2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Scaled feedback signal 2 for the PID controller.
03.20 PID-CtrlDeviation [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Deviation of the PID controller (difference between the reference value and the actual value of the PID
process controller).
03.21 MF1 RDVALUE I1 [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(127.07) Follower Control Word from the master - follower link to be monitored in the follower drive (Data Set 40
Index 1)

(127.08) Speed reference from the master - follower link to be monitored in the follower drive (Data Set 40 Index
2)
Unit: Type: R Int. scaling:

ABB
(127.09) Torque reference from the master - follower link to be monitored in the follower drive (Data Set 40 Index
3)
Unit: Type: R Int. scaling:
03.24 Ref1 OverrSystem ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Reference value 1 from overriding system (called COMMREF 1 in signal selection context). REF1 –
speed or frequency: in any application macros used
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 20000 == value
defined with Par. 12.05
03.25 Ref2 OverrSystem ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Reference value 2 from overriding system (called COMMREF 2 in signal selection context).
VALUE NAME MEANING
REF2 speed or frequency used in FACTORY , HAND/AUTO or SEQ CTRL
REF2 torque used in T CTRL or M/F CTRL
REF2 PID reference used in PID CTRL
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 20000 = value
defined with Par. 12.08 by
speed / f
MSAI5150 ACS1000 13/389

ABB
4 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured or calculated values from basic IOEC 1 2.
04.01 External Ref2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

External reference 2. Value of analogue input 1 - IOEC1 in % (or analogue input 4 - IOEC3 in case of
EC fans). For further information see group 12 (see Figure 12-2).
04.02 InvWtrCoolTemp [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled temperature of the cooling water. Value of analogue input 2 - IOEC1 in °C (see
Figure 190-1). Only available for water cooled converters.
Unit: °C Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 °C
04.03 InvWtrCoolPress1 [bar] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled pressure of the cooling water. Value of analogue input 3 - IOEC1 in bar (see
Figure 190 -1). Only available for water cooled converters.
Unit: bar Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 bar
04.04 InvWtrConductivity [uS] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled value of water conductivity. Value of analogue input 4 - IOEC1 in uS (see Figure
190-1). Only available for water cooled converters.
Unit: uS Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 uS
04.05 External Ref1 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

External reference 1. Value of analogue input 1 - IOEC2. The Unit is Hz with scalar motor control mode
only. For further information see group 12. (see Figure 12 1)
Unit: Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 rpm /
1Hz (depending on ctrl.
mode)
04.06 InvAirTemp2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled temperature inside the inverter. Value of analogue input 2 - IOEC1 in °C (see
Figure 190-1). Only available for air cooled converters.
04.07 TrafoTemp1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled winding temperature of the internal transformer. Value of analogue input 3 -
IOEC1 in °C (see Figure 190-1). Only available for ACS 1000i.
04.08 TrafoTemp2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled winding temperature of the internal transformer. Value of analogue input 4 -
IOEC1 in °C (see Figure 190-1). Only available for ACS 1000i.
04.09 MotorWdgTmpPhU1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled temperature of the motor winding phase U. Value of analogue input 2 - IOEC2 in
°C (see Figure 13-4).

ABB
04.10 MotorWdgTmpPhV1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Measured and scaled temperature of the motor winding phase V. Value of analogue input 3 - IOEC2 in
°C (see Figure 13-4).
04.11 MotorWdgTmpPhW1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled temperature of the motor winding phase W. Value of analogue input 4 - IOEC2 in
°C. (see Figure 13-4)
04.12 AI1 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Scaled value of analogue input 1. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value. See parameter
13.02...13.06. (see Figure 13-2)
Unit: mA Type: R Int. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA

Scaled value of analogue input 2. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value selected. See
parameter 190.15...190.19 (see Figure 190-2).

Scaled value of analogue input 3. Displayed in milliampere when default-scaling value selected. See
Unit: mA Type: R Int. scaling: 20000== 20 mA

Scaled value of analogue input 4. Displayed in milliampere when default-scaling value selected. See

13.07...13.11 (see Figure 13-2).

13.12...13.17 (see Figure 13-3).

13.18...13.23 (see Figure 13-3).

Scaled value of analogue input 4. Displayed in miliampere when default scaling value. See parameter
13.24...13.29 (see Figure 13-3).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 15/389

ABB
04.20 DI1-7StatusIOEC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Status of the standard IOEC 1 board digital inputs DI1 ... DI7.Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated.
Status of digital Input DI1...7 - IOEC1
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

Status ErthIsoClos
REM MotSpeed 0.00 rpm
DI1-7 IO1 0100001
DI6 DI1
Figure

Status of the standard IOEC 1 board digital inputs DI8 ... DI14.Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

Status ErthIsoClos
DI8-14 IO1 0100001
DI13 DI8
Figure

Status of the standard IOEC 2-board digital inputs DI1 ... DI7.Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

Status ErthIsoClos
DI1-7 IO2 0100001
DI6 DI1
Figure

ABB
Status of the standard IOEC 2-board digital inputs DI8 ... DI14.Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

Status ErthIsoClos
DI8-14 IO2 0100001
DI13 DI8
Figure
04.24 AO1 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Value of analogue output 1(IOEC1 board) signal in milliampere. For signal selection and scaling see
parameter group 15 (see Figure 15-1).



Value of analogue output 2 (IOEC2 board) signal in milliampere. For signal selection and scaling see
Unit: mA Type: R Int. scaling: 20000 == 20mA
MSAI5150 ACS1000 17/389

ABB
5 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Data values
05.01 DO1-6 StatusIOEC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Status of the standard IOEC 1 board relay outputs. Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated.
Status of digital Output DO1...6 - IOEC1
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

Status ErthIsoClos
DO1-6 IO1 0100010
DO6 DO2
Figure
Unit: - Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1

Status of the standard IOEC 2 board relay outputs. Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

Status ErthIsoClos
DO1-6 IO2 0100010
DO6 DO2
Figure

ABB
05.03 DATALOG1 STATUS ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(106.01) Data logger 1 STATUS WORD
BIT NAME VALUE MEANING
B0 FAULT 1 Fault trigger occurred
B1 LEVEL 1 Level trigger occurred
B2 ALARM 1 Alarm trigger occurred
B3 LIMIT 1 Limit trigger occurred
B4 USER_TRIG 1 External trigger occurred
B5 TRIG_LEVEL 1 Observed that level + hysteresis has been exceeded in
B6 TREND_INITIATING 1 Data logger is initialising
B7 OVER_WRITE 1 Data logger internal flag
B8 FILLED 1 Data logger buffer is filled
B9 TRIGGED 1 Trigger condition detected
B10 RUNNING 1 Data logger is armed and collecting data
B11 INITIATED 1 Data logger was successfully initialised
B12 NOT_INITIATED 1 Data logger was not successfully initialised
B13 EMPTY 1 Data logger buffer is empty
B14 1
B15 EXTERNAL_TRIG 1 External trigger input
05.04 ApplicationMacro ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(99.13) Display of application macro in use.
Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling: 1 == 1
05.05 ControlLocation ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Display of active control location.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 Local
2 Local
3 Ext1
4 Ext2
05.06 ApplBlockOutput [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Selected reference value after the application software.
05.07 BackspLockTimeRem [s] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

The remaining waiting time during active “Backspin lockout function” will be shown here (see Figure 21-
5).
Unit: s Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 s
05.08 IdealMotCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Calculated ideal motor current according to parameter group 42 (see Figure 42-1).
05.09 MotULoadAlmCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Calculated motor underload alarm current according to parameter 42.03 (see Figure 42-1).
05.10 MotULoadTripCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Calculated motor underload trip current according to parameter 42.04 (see Figure 42-1).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 19/389

ABB
05.11 MotOLoadAlmCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Calculated motor overload alarm current according to parameter 42.05 (see Figure 42-1).
05.12 MotOLoadTripCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Calculated motor overload trip current according to parameter 42.06 (see Figure 42-1).
05.13 ActRunFan/Pump ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Display of active running fan (group) / pump.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 FAN 1
2 FAN 2
3 PUMP 1
4 PUMP 2
5 NONE
05.14 ActRunIntTrafoFan ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Display of active running integrated transformer fan; not available with ACS 1000i
NAME VALUE MEANING
FAN 1 1
FAN 2 2
NONE 3
05.15 AutoChgFan1Pmp1On [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Elapsed time since fan (group) 1 / pump 1 has been started.
Unit: h Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 h
05.16 AutoChgFan2Pmp2On [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Elapsed time since fan (group) 2 / pump 2 has been started
05.17 AutoCoolOnDelay [min] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Waiting time befor the “Auto Cooling” – function will be startet (Par.: 41.11 Auto Cooling On Delay time
is counting to zero if water conductivity is above alarm limit).
05.18 MaxInvMagnCur ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Calculated (5.18 = 133.01 x 133.30 x 186.10) maximum allowed inverter RMS current during
magnetization.
Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1

ABB
Group 6 INFORMATION
6 INFORMATION
Information on the actual software version on the AMC board.
06.01 SW PACKAGE VER ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(100.11)
1. Character (Product Mark)

A Inverter Software based on ACS600-platform; C Software component (common component);
D DC drives software based on ACS600-platform; I Input bridge software based on ACS600-platform
L ACS6000 software; M ACS1000 software; P Control panel software; O Option module software
S small AC products family software; T PC Tools software; Y Trade specific software
2. Character (Product Family Mark)
ACS1000
C Customized Option; F SubFC Drive; S ACS1000 Standard Drive; T Board test;
X Software is common for several products
ACS6000
A Asynchronous Motor Drive (ACS6000 AD); C Cylo (ACS6000c); H HISPIN; N ARU;
S Synchronous Motor Drive (ACS6000 SD); T Board test; X Software is common for several products
3. Character (Mark 1 for Software Type)
ACS1000 / ACS6000
A Application; C Control; E EPLD; O Loading packages
FIDRI
A AMCOSI; B Function block library; P Panel application
4. Character (Mark 2 for Target Type)
B Pub and Power feed forward (EPLD); C Control-Board AMC3; D Control-Board CCB
E Interfacebord (EPLD); F Grey Encoder (EPLD); H Control-Board AMC33
I Control-Board AMC34; P PAI (EPLD); T PINT (EPLD)
ACS1000
F …Z Special customized software
5. … 8. Character (Mark 5…8 for Version Number)
Mark 5 Interface changes or big function changes (incompatibility with system components)
Mark 6 Function changes (functionality has changed)
Mark 7 Fault correction (only software faults are corrected)
Mark 8 Pre-release/Test SW (0 = official versions have always a “0” on this position; corrections which
has been made on field have a number between 1 …9; test versions have at this position the character
A…Z)
06.02 DTC VERSION ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(100.04) Software version of the flux software. This fixed part of the software consists of the motor control, the
operational system, the communication control of the DDCS channels and the Modbus software for the
control panel.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 21/389

ABB
06.03 APPLIC VERSION ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(100.08) Application software version can be identified here. The application software is essentially functioning
block programming.
Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling:
06.04 AMC SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(100.01) AMC board serial number.
06.05 APPL DUTY [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(104.02) Microprocessor load measurement. Value 100% means overloading of the microprocessor and causes
delay in execution of the tasks.
06.06 TIME OF USAGE [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(104.03) Time lapsed since auxiliary power supply has been switched on.
06.07 APPLIC BUILD ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Application software build version.
06.08 MOTOR RUN-TIME [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(104.09) Time lapsed during which the motor has been running.
06.09 CONSUMED ENERGY [MWh] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.22) Integrated shaft power in motor mode.
Unit: MWh Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1GWh
06.10 INU NOM VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(112.01)
Nominal RMS main voltage in inverter output terminals.
Unit: V Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
06.11 INU MAX CONT CUR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(112.02)
Maximum RMS current of inverter.
Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
06.12 INU MAX POWER [kVA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Maximum instantaneous power of inverter.

Unit: kVA Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 10

ABB
06.13 DRIVE TYPE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(111.06) Drive motor control mode. Reboot required after change of parameter.
VALUE NAME MEANING

0 6000 SD ACS 6000 direct or brushless synchronous motor control.
1 6000 PMSM ACS 6000 permanent magnet motor control.
2 5000 SD ACS 5000 direct or brushless synchronous motor control.
3 6000 RSD ACS 6000 full redundant direct or brushless synchronous motor
control.
4 5000 PMSM ACS 5000 permanent magnet motor control.
5 6000 AD ACS 6000 asynchronous motor control.
6 5000 AD ACS 5000 asynchronous motor control.
7 AD Not to be used.
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
10 6000 TWIN ACS 6000 TWIN (high speed <300Hz)
11 TWIN RES Not to be used.
15 1000A AD ACS 1000 asynchronous motor control, air cooled.
16 1000W AD ACS 1000 asynchronous motor control, water cooled.
17 1000i AD ACS 1000 asynchronous motor control, internal transformer.
18 1000 RES Not to be used.
Unit: Type: Enum Int. scaling: 1 == 1
06.14 Filter Inductance [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Filter inductance in Milli Henry

06.15 Filter Capacity [uF] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Filter capacity in Micro Farad
Unit: uF Type: R Int. scaling:
06.16 Rlfi [ohm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(152.03) Estimated filter resistance
Unit: Ω Type: R Int. scaling: 200 == 1 Ω
06.17 NumOfMotorStarts ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(210.15) Number of motor starts.
Note! Maximal number of this parameter is 32767.
06.18 RealTime YYMMDD ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Actual ACS1000 date.
Actual date will be displayed in this parameter where YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day are.
Note! Leading zeros are not shown.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 23/389

ABB
06.19 RealTime HHMMSS ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Actual ACS1000 time.
Actual time will be displayed in this parameter where HH = Hour, MM = Minutes and SS = Seconds are.
Note! Leading zeros are not shown.
06.20 INU MAX MOT CUR [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(133.08) Maximum motoring current (as % of motor nominal current) given by inverter limitations.
06.21 EventMessages ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
NAME VALUE MEANING

EventLogger 1
SW InitDone 2
GndSwClosed 3
DoorsOpened 4
EmergencyOff 5
EmergStop 6
INU Tripped 7
8
MCB OpenCmd 9
MCB CloseCmd 10
MCB TripCmd 11
12
13
14
15
INU OffCmd 16
INU OnCmd 17
18
INU StopCmd 19
INU RunCmd 20
21
22
23
ProcessStop 24
25
26
MCB FdbOpen 27
MCBFdbClosed 28
Unit: Type: Enum Int. scaling:
06.22 INT0 VERSION ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Version number of INT0.
06.23 INT0 PLD BUILD ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Version number of INT0 EPLD version

ABB
Group 7 CONTROL WORDS
7 CONTROL WORDS
ABB drive profile control word.
07.01 MainControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

B0 ON 1 Command to “RDYRUN”-state (MCB is closed)
0 Command to “OFF”-state
B1 OFF 2 1 No OFF2 (Emergency Off)
0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state; same as front door button
(Emergency Off Þ Trip 2b Þ stop the drive and switch off
the MCB immediately, Protection GTO on)
B2 OFF 3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency Stop)
0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state(Emergency Stop Þ Stop
by ramp, switch off theMCB, drive has stopped Þ Trip 2b)
B3 RUN 1 Command to “RDYREF”- states (Run command)
0 (Normal Stop Þ Stop by coasting or Stop by ramp orStop by
torque limit)
B4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Operating condition (Inching 1 or 2)
0 Ramp-function generator output is set to zero.
B5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp-function generator (Inching 1 or 2)
0 Speed ramping stopped. Actual set point from the ramp-
function generator frozen.
B6 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Enable set point (Coast stop)
0 Disable set point. Speed ramp input is forced to zero.
B7 RESET 1 Fault resetting with a positive edge
0 No significance.
B8 INCHING_1 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 1, if
following conditions are fulfilled:- Bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0-
Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0- Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0
0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was
previously ON
previously ON
B10 REMOTE-CMD 1 Overriding system is requesting to control the drive.
0 No control from overriding system.
B11 RESERVED
B12 RESERVED
B13 RESERVED
B14 RESERVED
B15 (Not Used)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 25/389

ABB
07.02 AuxControlWord 1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Drive specific auxiliary control word
B0 TRIGG_DLOG_1 1 Trigger data logger no 1
B1 TRIGG_DLOG_2 1 Trigger data logger no 2
B2 RAMP BYPASS 1 Speed ramp bypassing.
B3 BAL RAMP OUT 1 Forcing of ramp output.
B4 DO1 CTRL OVER 1 Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system:See
SYST parameter group 14 for signal selection. For IOEC3 see
parameter group 84 and for IOEC4 see parameter group 89
for signal selection
B5 REAL TIME Par. 98.01 Set of new real time clock
CLOCK SET
B6 HOLD NCONT Holding of the speed controller’s output.
B7 WINDOW CTRL Par.26.01 Torque Selector forcing to window control (ADD)
B8 BAL NCONT Forcing of speed controller’s output (NOT IN PILOT)
B9 (Not Used)
B10 (Not Used)
B11 (Not Used)
B12 DO2 CTRL OVER Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system: See
B13 USER MACRO 1 Macro change request, positive edge: User macro 2
CTRL
0 Macro change request, negative edge: User macro 1
B14 DO3 CTRL OVER Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system:See
B15 (Not Used)

Drive specific auxiliary control word (Interface control word between application software and fixed
application (FA), for internal use only. It is not allowed to write to this control word from an overriding
system)
B0 Reserved 1
B1 MCB_ON 1 MCB has been switched ON (condition for state
transition)
B2 Reserved 0
B3 Reserved 0
B4 (Not used) 0
B5 STOP_FREQ_HOLD_NOT 1 Do not feeze frequency reference value during
stopping, use ramp value
B6 PARAMETER SAVE 1 Save actual parameter settings to flash. Note! It is
not allowed to use the function during an active
macro change.
B7 (Not used) 0
B8 ON_INHIBIT 1 On inhibit command (condition for state transition)
B9 MSM_NOTRDYON 1 Not Ready On command to FA (condition for state
transition)
B10 MSM_NOTRDYRUN 1 Not Ready Run command to FA (condition for state
transition)
B11 (Not used) 0
B12 (Not used) 0
B13 Reserved 0
B14 Reserved 0
B15 Reserved 0

ABB
drive specific auxiliary control word (interface control word between application software and motor
control software, for internal use only. It is not allowed to write to this control word from an overriding
system)
B0 (Not used)
B1 (Not used)
B2 (Not used)
B3 (Not used)
B4 (Not used)
B5 (Not used)
B6 (Not used)
B7 (Not used)
B8 (Not used)
B9 (Not used)
B10 (Not used)
B11 (Not used)
B12 (Not used)
B13 (Not used)
B14 (Not used)
B15 (Not used)
07.05 EnableControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Drive specific enable control word (Enable Bits are to be defined and are used for testing only.)
B0 Reserved
B1 IB CONTROL for testing the IOEC 1...4 boards , 0 = off , 1 = on
B2 400V TEST inverter 400V test
B3 PROT IGCT1 OFF enable function of IGCT1 protection; 1 = off, 0 = normal
B4 PROT IGCT2 OFF enable function of IGCT2 protection; 1 = off, 0 = normal
B5 Reserved
B6 SHORT CIRCUIT inverter short circuit test
TEST
B7 (Not used)
B8 (Not used)
B9 (Not used)
B10 (Not used)
B11 (Not used)
B12 (Not used)
B13 SECURITY FOR ECW Security bit for ECW, ECW is only accepted if bit is set to
1
B14 SECURITY FOR ECW Security bit for ECW, ECW is only accepted if bit is set to
1
B15 (Not used)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 27/389

ABB
07.06 OverrControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Main control word from overriding system (PLC) to control the drive via fieldbus
B0 MCB ORD ON Command to close and open the MCB from overriding
OVERR system.
1 Command to close the MCB (“RDYRUN” - state)
0 Command to open the MCB (“OFF” - state)
0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state
B2 OFF 3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency Stop)
0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state(Emergency Stop Þ Stop
by ramp, switch off the MCB, drive has stopped Þ Trip 2b)
B3 RUN 1 Command to “RDYREF”- state (Run command)
0 Command to Stop (Normal Stop Þ Stop by coasting or Stop
by ramp or
0 Speed ramping stopped. Freeze the actual set point from
the ramp-function generator
0 No significance.
B8 INCHING_1 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 1,
if following conditions are fulfilled:(Normal Stop Þ Stop by
coasting or Stop by ramp or- Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0- Bit
RAMP-IN ZERO = 0
previously ON
if following conditions are fulfilled:(Normal Stop Þ Stop by
coasting or Stop by ramp orStop by torque limit)- Bit
RAMP-HOLD = 0- Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0
previously ON
B10 REMOTE-CMD 1 Overriding computer is requesting to control the drive.
B11 EXT CRTL LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2). Effective if Par.
12.02 is set to COMM.MODULE
0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1). Effective if Par.
B12 PROCESS STOP 1 No Process StopCommand to Run Enable
0 Process StopCommand to Run Disabled Effective if Par.
B13 RESERVED
B14 RESERVED
B15 (Not Used)

ABB
07.07 FollowControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Interface control word between master drive and follower drive in Master/Slave control mode, for
internal use only. It is not allowed to write to this control word from an overriding system.
B0 MCB ORD ON Command to close and open the MCB
1 Command to close the MCB (“RDYRUN” - state)
0 Command to open the MCB (“OFF” - state)
0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state(Emergency Off Þ Trip 2b
Þ stop the drive and switch off the MCB immediately,
Protection GTO on)
B2 OFF3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency Stop)
B3 RUN 1 Command to “RDYREF”- state (Run command)
0 Command to Stop
0 No significance.
previously ON
previously ON
B10 REMOTE-CMD 1 Master is controlling the drive.
B11 EXT CRTL LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2). Effective if Par.
0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1). Effective if Par.
B12
B13
B14
B15 (Not Used)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 29/389

Signal and Parameter Table ABB
Group 8 STATUS WORDS
8 STATUS WORDS
Status signals of the drive according to the ABB Drive Profile.

ABB
08.01 MainStatusWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

B0 RDYON 1 Ready to switch on (ready for MCB on, ready to charge)
0 Not ready to switch on
B1 RDYRUN 1 Ready to operate (ready to start the drive)
0 Not ready
B2 RDYREF 1 Operation enabled (running)
0 Operation inhibited
B3 TRIPPED 1 Fault
0 No Fault
B4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF 2 inactive
0 OFF 2 active
B5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF 3 inactive
0 OFF 3 active
B6 ON INHIBITED 1 Switch on inhibit
MCB
0 (MCB: 0=close enabled, 1=close inhibited)
B7 ALARM 1 Alarm / Warning
0 No Alarm / Warning
B8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within
tolerance band
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside
tolerance band)
B9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
B10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency for speed value equals or is greater than
supervision limit (Par. 32.03). Valid in both directions
regardless of setting of Par. 32.02.
0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.
B11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External Control Location 2 (EXT2) selected
O External Control Location 1 (EXT1) selected
B12 PROCESS 1 Process stop active
STOP
0 Process stop not active
B13 RESERVED
B14 RESERVED
B15 (Not Used)
n
n ref
AT SETPOINT
MARGIN
n act
0
t
8.01 MSW Bit 8 - AT SETPOINT
Figure
MSAI5150 ACS1000 31/389

08.02 AuxStatusWord 1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Drive specific auxiliary status word
B0 Reserved
B1 OUT OF WINDOW Speed actual is outside of the defined window.
B2 PROCESS STOP COAST Process stop function by ramp has failed.
B3 Reserved
B4 RUN DISABLED External interlocking prevents the run.
B5 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B8 BACKSPIN LOCKOUT ACT Backspin lockout is active
B9 LIMITING Limitation active, see parameter 8.06 LimitWord1
B10 TORQ CONTROL Drive is torque controlled
B11 ZERO SPEED Motor speed actual is zero.
B12 Reserved
B13 DLYED_HIP_TRIP Drive will trip after HIP-delay (144.02).
B14 DLYED_LOP_TRIP Drive will trip after LOP-delay (144.01).
B15 (Not Used)

Drive specific auxiliary status word 2
B0 FLT_CLASS_1 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 1 reaction, the
MCB opens
B1 FLT_CLASS_2 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 2 reaction, the
MCB stays closed
B2 FLT_CLASS_1T 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 1T reaction,
reset only possible after time-out (depending on rotor time
constant)
B3 FLT_CLASS_1D 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 1D reaction, no
reset possible
B4 Reserved
B5 FAULT_PENDING 1 Fault state active
B6 RESET_OUT Reset pulse output (length 2s) after reset request
B7 WATCH_DOG_BIT Transmitted toggle bit for CH0 link monitoring (see Group
70).
B8 DIRECTION Direction of rotation; in state RDY_REF depending on the
actual speed, in all other states depending on the reference
speed
0 Forward
1 Reverse
B9 NOT_RDY_ON Main State Machine (MSM) is in not-ready-ON state
B10 NOT_RDY_RUN Main State Machine (MSM) is in not-ready-RUN state
B11 CHARGING Drive is in charging mode
B12 DISCHARGING Drive is in discharging mode
B13 TEST_RUNNING 1 Selected test is running
B14 TEST_ACTIVATED 1 Test is activated
B15 (Not Used)

ABB
B0 NOT INITIALIZED 1 Drive not initialised after power on
B1 WATCH DOG BIT Toggle bit for link supervision (0,5s)
B2 MCB CLOSED 1 MCB is closed
FEEDBACK
B3 MCB OPEN FEEDBACK 1 MCB is open
B4 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B6 PARAMETER SAVE 1 Parameter saving is active
ACTIVE
B7 Reserved
B8 USER MACRO 1 ACT 1 User Macro 1 is active
B9 USER MACRO 2 ACT 1 User Macro 2 is active
B10 Reserved
B11 M/F CTRL MASTER 1 In M/F-Control, drive is a MASTER
B12 M/F CTRL FOLLOWER 1 In M/F-Control, drive is a FOLLOWER
B13 M/F COMM ERR 1 Master/Follower drive communication error (only for
Follower drive)
B14 Reserved
B15 (Not Used)

B0 STOPPING MODE 1 stop command is given (RDY REF STOP active)
B1 READY REF ACTIVE 1 drive is started and motor is magnetized (RDY REF)
B2 CUSTOMER SUP SIG1 1 free programmable customer supervision signal 1 is
ACTIVE active (see group 48)
B3 CUSTOMER SUP SIG2 1 free programmable customer supervision signal 2 is
ACTIVE active (see group 48)
B4 STO ACTIVE 1 Drive is in safe torque off state
B5 MOTOR ZERO CUR 1 Motor current is zero and drive status not ReadyRef
B6 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B12 TRAFO PROT RESET 1 reset signal for transformer protection relay
B13 CONSTANT SIGNAL B0 0 signal is fix set to logical “0”
B14 CONSTANT SIGNAL B1 1 signal is fix set to logical “1”
B15 (Not Used)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 33/389

08.06 LIMIT WORD1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

B0 TorRefPulloutLim Limit is activated.
B1 SpdCtrlTorqMinLim Limit is activated (seeP20.08).
B2 SpdCtrlTorqMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20.07).
B3
B4
B5 TorqRefTorqMinLim Limit is activated (see P20.10).
B6 TorqRefTorqMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20.09).
B7 TorqRefBrChopdutyLim Limit is activated.
B8 TorqRefSpeedMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20.02).
B9 TorqMinLim Limit is activated (see P20.06).
B10 TorqMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20.05).
B11 TorqMotorCurrLim Limit is activated (see P20.04).
B12 TorqInvBreakCurLim Limit is activated.
B13 TorqInvDriveCurLim Limit is activated.
B14 DCOvervoltageLim Limit is activated.
B15 (Not Used)
08.07 LimitWord 2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Supervision
Note!
The actual status of each limit supervision function of Group 32 will be displayed in this parameter. If in
supervision function
• LOW LIMIT is selected, the corresponding limit bit will be active, if the actual value is below the limit
value and not active if the actual value is above the limit value.
• HIGH LIMIT is selected, the corresponding limit bit will be active if the value actual is above the limit
value and not active if the value actual is below the limit value
B0 SPEED REF LIMIT speed refernce limit supervision is active
B1 SPEED ACT LIMIT actual speed limit supervision is active
B2 MOT CURR LIMIT actual motor current limit supervision is active
B3 MOT TORQ LIMIT actual motor torque limit supervision is active
B4 SUP SIG1 LIMIT supervision signal 1 value limit (free programmable)
B5 SUP SIG2 LIMIT supervision signal 2 value limit (free programmable)
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15 (Not Used)

ABB
08.08 DI StatusWord IO1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

B0 DI1 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 1 – IOEC1
B1 DI2 - IOEC1 Status of the digital input 2 – IOEC1
B14
B15 (Not Used)

B3 DI4– IOEC2 Status of the digital input 4 – IOEC2
B5 DI6– IOEC2 Status of the digital input 6 – IOEC2
B14
B15 (Not Used)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 35/389

08.10 DriveStatusWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Only for panel display
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 InitSeq…. drive is in initialising sequence
2 NoMotorData motor data are missing
3 ACSisDefect inverter has a defect
4 Tripped drive has tripped
5 SoftStop drive is in soft stop mode
6 Alarm drive is in alarm state
7 ErthIsoClos earth isolator is closed, not ready for MCB on
8 RdyForMCBOn drive is ready, ready for switch on the MCB
9 Charging MCB is on, inverter is charging the DC - bus
10 Rdy to Strt MCB is on, inverter is charging the DC - bus
11 ID Run motor identification run started
12 Magnetize motor will be magnetised
13 Running motor is running with SPEEDREF (23.01) or with FREQREF (29.01)
14 Stopping motor is stopping
15 Discharging inverter is in discharging mode
16 AutoCoolOn automatic cooling function is active
17 LockoutAct backspin lockout is active (run prevented)
18 StartSeqOn automatic start sequence function is active
19 CoolOffDely cooling system off delay time is active
20
21

ABB
Group 9 FAULT AND ALARM WORDS
09.09 FaultWord1 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

All bits indicate faults according fault class 1, trip 2b
B00 TrippLoop MCB: tripping loop not connected or one or more contacts
open
B01 ProcessStop Control: system is shutdown after a process stop
B02 MCB Control MCB: discrepancy of command and feedback
B03 AnInpCalib Control: automatic calibration of IOEC boards in progress
B04
B05
B06
B07 CtrlSuppFail Aux. Power: control supply voltage (27V) failure
B08 CtrlBackSupp Aux. Power: control backup supply voltage failure
B09
B10 ChargingTimeout Inverter: charging time out
B11
B12 Unbalance NP Inverter: NP-Voltage deviation fault
B13 DischargeTimeout Inverter: discharging time out
B14
B15

B00 SM1Control Sync. Bypass: motor circuit braker 1 discrepancy of command and
feedback
B01 SM1Disturb Sync. Bypass: motor circuit braker 1 fault
feedback
feedback
feedback
B08
B09 NoFiltData Inverter: filter data missing
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
MSAI5150 ACS1000 37/389

B00 MCB Disturb MCB: opens during operation
B01 MCB MCB: Order-off feedback not set
OrderOff
B02 EarthIsoCtr
B03 EmergOff MCB: emergency off activated
B04 InputIsolat External: input isolator not closed
B05
B06
B07 InpVoltUnba Line: optional: external protection relay for input voltage
unbalance supervision
B08 ExtTrafProt Transformer: external protection
B09 Buchholz Transformer: external Buchholz supervision
B10 TrTmpExt/3 Transformer: trafo temperature external / 3 too high
B11
B12
B13 CustSupSig1 Customer: supervision signal 1 is active (group 48)
B15

B00 IOEC1LinkEr Control: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 1 failure
B04 IOEC5LinkEr Sync. Bypass: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 5 failure
B05 IOEC6LinkEr Sync. Bypass: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 6 failure
B06 Panel Lost Control: panel communication loss
B07
B08
B09 ExtMotProt Motor: external protection relay
B10 ExtOversped Motor: external supervision of rotation speed
B11
B12
B13 MacroChange MCB: during “MACRO CHANGE” the MCB has been switched on
B14
B15

ABB
B00 Pump 1/2 Water Cooling: pump 1/2 failure
B01 WtrLevelLow Water Cooling: expansion vessel water level too low
B02 WtrConduct Water Cooling: conductivity too high
B03 WtrPresDifLo Water Cooling: difference pressure too low (= output press.
with open cooling system)
B04 WtrPress1Hi Water Cooling: output pressure too high
B05 WtrPress2Lo Water Cooling: input pressure too low (only with closed
cooling system)
B06 WtrPress2Hi Water Cooling: input pressure too high (only with closed
cooling system)
B07
B08
B09 AuxFan 1/2 Water Cooling: aux. fan 1/2 failure
B10 InvFan(s)Disturbed Inverter fan(s) disturbed. EC fans only!
B11 TraFan(s)Disturbed Transformer fan(s) disturbed. EC fans only!
B12 Fan (Grp) 1/2 Air Cooling: fan (group) 1/2 failure
B13 FanDiffPres Air Cooling: differential air pressure too high
B14 PressMonCalibFlt EC fan pressure calibration sequence failed.
B15

B00 TimeoutAuxOnSeq State machine: time out aux. power on sequence
B01 TimeoutOff1Seq State machine: time out off1 sequence
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Unit: Type: PB Int. scaling:
MSAI5150 ACS1000 39/389

All bits indicate faults according fault class 2, trip 2a
B00
B01 MotVibrat Motor: external vibration supervision
B02
B03
B04 OutputIsolat External: output isolator not closed
B05
B06
B07 Sbp1Control Sync. Bypass: line circuit braker 1 is closed but should be opened
B11 InvOverLoad Inverter is overloaded. Too high current for this low frequency
range.
B12
B13
B14
B15

All bits indicate faults according fault class 2, trip 1a
B00 MCB not On
B01 ProcessStop Control: system is shutdown after a process stop
B02
B04 MagnOvercurrent Overcurrent protection has got active during magnetization
(reduced overcurrent trip level, further details refer to P5.18)
B05
B06 CH2 LinkErr
B07
B08 WtrTmpHigh
B09 WtrTmpLow
B10 ExtWtrCool
B11 InvAirTemp
B12
B15

ABB
All bits indicate faults according fault class 2, soft stop
B00 MotWdgTmp1 Motor: winding temperature 1 too high (phase U, V or W)
B01 MotWdgTmpU2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase U too high
B02 MotWdgTmpV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V too high
B03 MotWdgTmpW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W too high
B04 ExtMotCool Motor: external cooling
B05 MotCooler Motor: motor cooler internal contactor
B06
B07 BrgTemp DE Motor: temperature at the driven end bearing too high
B08 BrgTemp NDE Motor: temperature at the non driven end bearing too high
B09
B10 MotVibratAI1 Motor: vibration AI 1 too high
B12
B13 LoadBrgTmp1 Motor: bearing temperature 1 of load (e.g. pump) too high
B15

B00 MotUndLoad Motor: underload according to programmable load curve
B01 MotOverLoad Motor: overload according to programmable load curve
B02 MotPhUnbal Motor: phase currents unbalanced
B03
B04 OutsAirTemp Water Cooling: outside air temperature too high
B05
B06 TrafoTmp1 Transformer: trafo temperature 1 too high
B08 OutpTrafoTmp Transformer: output trafo temp. too high
B09
B10 CH0 LinkErr Control: DDCS channel 0 (fieldbus) link error
B11
B12 LimitSuperv Inverter: limit supervision
B15
MSAI5150 ACS1000 41/389

B00 ExtRef1Lost Control: external reference signal 1 lost
B02 IOEC1AI2MLos Air / Water Cooling: IOEC1 AI2 (air tmp. 2 / wtr. tmp.) - loss of
analogue input
B03 IOEC1AI3MLos Water Cooling / Trafo: IOEC1 AI3 (wtr. outp. press. / trafo tmp.
1) - loss of analogue input
B04 IOEC1AI4MLos Water Cooling / Trafo: IOEC1 AI3 (wtr. cond. / trafo tmp. 2) -
loss of analogue input
B05 IOEC3AI1MLos General: IOEC3 AI1 - loss of analogue input
B07 ExtAct1Lost Control: analogue input, actual signal 1 is missing (PID-control)
B08 IOEC4AI2MLos General: IOEC4 AI2 (AI2 for PID / Mot. Tmp. 2 Ph. U) - loss of
analogue input
B09 MotTmpMLosV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V - loss of analogue
input
B10 MotTmpMLosW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W - loss of analogue
input
B11 Brg DE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the driven end bearing -
B12 BrgNDE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the non driven end
bearing - loss of analogue input
B13 MotWdgMLos Motor: winding temperature measurement - loss of analogue
input
B14
B15

SBU specific FC2 fault word. This faults will only appear during synchronizing process.
B00 OverCurrent SBU Overcurrent protection active during SBU sync process
B01 SinFilOverCur SBU Sine filter overcurrent protection active during SBU sync
process
B02 DC OvervoltMCB DC overvoltage MCB protection active during SBU sync
SBU process
B03 DC Overvolt SBU DC overvoltage protection active during SBU sync process
B04 Overfrequency SBU Overfrequency protection active during SBU sync process
B05 SineFiltCap SBU Sine filter cap shorted protection active during SBU sync
process
B06 Motor Prot SW SBU Motor UL protection active during SBU sync process
B07 Motor Stall SBU Motor stall protection active during SBU syn process
B08 Motor Underl SBU Motor underload protection active during sync process
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

ABB
09.23 FaultWord1 FC2HIP ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
All bits indicate faults according fault class 2 HIP, trip 1a delayed
B00 TimeoutInitSeq State machine: time out init. sequence
B01 TimeoutTestSeq State machine: time out test sequence
B02
B03 TimeoutRdyRunSeq State machine: time out ready-run sequence
B04 TimeoutRdyRefSeq State machine: time out ready-ref. sequence
B05 TimeoutStop1Seq State machine: time out stop1 sequence
B06 TimeoutStop2Seq State machine: time out stop2 sequence
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
09.28 FaultWord1 FC1D ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

All bits indicate faults according fault class 1D, trip 2b with defect
00 AMC: Fault Class 1D Trip with defect (e.g. IGCT short circuit), reset not possible
01 ChargeTimeMinimum Inverter: charging too fast, protection IGCT defect
02 ChargingCircuit Inverter: IGCT or varistor defect
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
MSAI5150 ACS1000 43/389

09.29 FW Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Communication fault word.
B00 PPCS Communication 1 PPCS Communication Fault
B01 PFF Communication 1 PFF Communication Fault
B02 INT0 PPCS Link 1 INT0 PPCS Link Fault
B03 NT0 FT Link 1 INT0 FT Link Fault
B04 INT1 PPCS Link 1 INT1 PPCS Link Fault 2nd INV
B05 INT1 FT Link 1 INT1 FT Link Fault 2nd INV
B06 INT2 PPCS Link 1 INT2 PPCS Link Fault 3rd INV
B07 INT2 FT Link 1 INT2 FT Link Fault 3rd INV
B08 PUB: Communication 1 PUB Communication Fault
B09 GRAY Missing 1 GRAY Communication Fault
B10 NTAC Missing 1 NTAC Communication Fault
B11 CCB Communication 1 CCB Communication Fault
B12 EXU: Communication 1 EXU Communication Fault
B13 EXU: PAI Communica 1 EXU PAI Communication Fault
B14 PPCC LnkConfigFault 1 PPCC Link Configuration Fault
09.30 FW1 Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Communication fault word 1.
B00 INT0 INTtoINT Link 1 INT0 INTtoINT Link Fault
B01 INT1 INTtoINT Link 1 INT1 INTtoINT Link Fault 2nd INV
B02 INT2 INTtoINT Link 1 INT2 INTtoINT Link Fault 3rd INV
B03 INT3 INTtoINT Link 1 INT3 INTtoINT Link Fault 4th INV
B05 INT3 FT Link 1 INT3 FT Link Fault
B06 DCS CH0 DDCS 1 DDCS communication on DCS’s CH0 (check ACS CH5 to
COM DCS CH0).
B07 INT0 Link C Lost 1 INT0 Link C Fault
B08 INT0 Link D Lost 1 INT0 Link D Fault
B09 INT0 Link E Lost 1 INT0 Link E Fault
B10 INT0 MF I2I Link 1 INT0 MF Int2Int Link Fault
B11 INT1 MF I2I Link 1 INT1 MF Int2Int Link Fault (2nd inv)
B12 INT2 MF I2I Link 1 INT2 MF Int2Int Link Fault (3rd inv)
B13 INT3 MF I2I Link 1 INT3 MF Int2Int Link Fault (4th inv)
B14 INT0 SYN Link 1 Sync board Link Fault
09.31 FW2 Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Communication fault word 2.
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1==1

ABB
09.32 FW CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Control Hardware fault word.
B00 Delayed GUSP AuxPow 1 Delayed GUSP Auxiliary Power Fault
B01 INT0 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT0 Auxiliary Power Fault
B02 INT0 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT0 GUSP Aux Power Fault
B03 INT0 VLU GUSP 1 INT0 VLU GUSP Fault
B04 INT0 VLU Control 1 INT0 VLU Control Fault
B05 INT0 LSU DiodeFault 1 INT0 LSU Diode Fault
B06 INT0 ASE Fault 1 INT0 ASE Fault
B07 INT0 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT0 Wrong EPLD Version
B08 INT0 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT0 Wrong PUPA Version
B09 INT0 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT0 PUPA FLASH corrupted
B10 INT1 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT1 Auxiliary Power Fault
B11 INT1 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT1 GUSP Aux Power Fault 2nd INV
B12 INT1 VLU GUSP 1 INT1 VLU GUSP Fault 2nd INV
B13 NT1 VLU Control 1 INT1 VLU Control Fault 2nd INV
B14 INT0 CVMI 1 INT0 Control Power Loss for the CVMI board
09.33 FW1 CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Control Hardware fault word 1.
B04 INT2 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT2 Aux Power Fault 3rd INV
B05 INT2 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT2 GUSP Aux Power Fault 3rd INV
B06 INT2 VLU GUSP 1 INT2 VLU GUSP Fault 3rd INV
B07 INT2 VLU Control 1 INT2 VLU Control Fault 3rd INV
B08 INT2 LSU DiodeFault 1 INT2 LSU Diode Fault 3rd INV
B13 PUB: AuxiliaryPower 1 PUB Auxiliary Power Fault
B14 PUB: Wrong EPLD Ver 1 PUB Wrong EPLD Version

B00 INT: EPLD Versions 1 Wrong EPLD version
B01 INT: PUPA Versions 1 Wrong PUPA version
B02 EXU: Control HW 1 EXU Control Hardware Fault
B03 EXU: Fuse/TmpSwich EXU Fuse Failure /Temperature switch
B04 INT3 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT3 Aux Power Fault
B05 INT3 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT3 GUSP Aux Power
B06 INT3 VLU GUSP 1 INT3 VLU GUSP Fault
B07 INT3 VLU Control 1 INT3 VLU Control Fault
B08 INT3 LSU DiodeFault 1 INT3 LSU Diode Fault
B10 INT3 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT3 Wrong EPLD version
B11 INT3 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT3 Wrong PUPA version
B12 INT3 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT3 PUPA Flash corrupted
B13 IGCT Supervision 1 IGCT checked failed
B14 INT0 ASE PI Limit 1
B15
MSAI5150 ACS1000 45/389

B00 INT0 Internal 1 INT0 Internal Fault
B04 DCS AuxUnderv 1 DCS’s auxiliary voltage too low
B05 DCS Overtemp 1 DCS temperature too high
B06 DCS NoFanAckn 1 DCS gets no feedback from Fan
B07 DCS NoMainCondAck 1 DCS does not get feedback from MCB
B08 INT0 GUSP 1 1 GUSP1 Fault
B09 INT0 GUSP 2 1 GUSP2 Fault
B10 INT1 HW GD Failed 1
B13 INT4 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT4 Aux Power Fault 5rd INV
B14 CVMI INVALID CONFIG 1 INT0 Wrong parameters setting regarding CVMI
09.36 FW DC LinkVolt ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

DC link voltage fault word.
B00 DC Overvoltage 1 DC Overvoltage
B01 DC OvervoltageMCB 1 DC Overvoltage opening MCB
B02 DC Undervoltage 1 DC Undervoltage
B03 NP Voltage 1 NP Voltage Deviation
B04 Ridethrough NetUnVo 1
B05 INT0 Overvoltage 1 INT0 Overvoltage
B06 DC Overvoltage1 1 DC Overvoltage 2nd INV
B07 DC OvervoltageMCB1 1 DC Overvoltage open MCB 2nd INV
B08 DC Undervoltage1 1 DC Undervoltage 2nd INV
B09 NP Voltage1 1 NP Voltage Deviation 2nd INV
B10 INT1 Overvoltage 1 INT1 Overvoltage 2nd INV
B11 DC Overvoltage2 1 DC Overvoltage 3rd INV
B12 DC OvervoltageMCB2 1 DC Overvoltage open MCB 3rd INV
B13 DC Undervoltage2 1 DC Undervoltage 3rd INV
B14 NP Voltage2 1 NP Voltage Deviation 3rd INV
B15 Max RT Time Elapsed 1 DC Maximum ride through length elapsed

ABB
09.37 FW1 DC LinkVolt ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
DC link voltage 1 fault word.
B00 INT2 Overvoltage 1 INT2 Overvoltage 3rd INV
B01 EXU: BOD Activation 1 EXU: BOD Activation Fault
B02 DC Overvoltage FT 1 DC Overvoltage with Firing through
B03 DC Overvoltage3 1 DC Overvoltage 4th INV
B04 DC OvervoltageMCB3 1 DC Overvoltage open MCB 4th INV
B05 DC Undervoltage3 1 DC Undervoltage 4th INV
B06 NP Voltage3 1 NP Voltage Deviation 4th INV
B07 INT3 Overvoltage 1 INT3 Overvoltage 4th INV
B08 INT0 Overvoltage FT 1 INT0 Overvoltage with Firing through
B12 DC Overvoltage FT 1 1 DC-link Overvoltage with Firing through 2nd DC
B13 RBU Temp rise 1 Max RBU/BCU temp rise Fault
B14 RBU Disabled 1 VLU/RBU/BCU operation disabled
B15 Low Speed During RT 1 Speed below minimum during ride through
09.38 FW2 DC LinkVolt ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

DC link voltage 2 fault word.
B00 INT0 Self Excit 1 INT0 Self excitation detected
B01 Self Excitation 1 Self excitation detected
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
09.39 FW Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Current fault word.
B00 Overcurrent 1 Overcurrent
B01 Phase A Lost 1 Phase A lost
B02 Phase B Lost 1 Phase B lost
B03 Phase C Lost 1 Phase C lost
B04 INT0 2nd EarthFault 1 INT0 2nd Earth Fault
B05 INT0 Overcurrent 1 INT0 Overcurrent
B06 Overcurrent 1 1 Overcurrent 2nd INV
B07 Phase A Lost 1 1 Phase A lost 2nd INV
B08 Phase B Lost 1 1 Phase B lost 2nd INV
B09 Phase C Lost 1 1 Phase C lost 2nd INV
B10 INT1 2nd EarthFault 1 INT1 2nd Earth Fault 2nd INV
B11 INT1 Overcurrent 1 INT1 Overcurrent 2nd INV
B12 Overcurrent 2 1 Overcurrent 3rd INV
B13 Phase A Lost 2 1 Phase A lost 3rd INV
B14 Phase B Lost 2 1 Phase B lost 3rd INV
MSAI5150 ACS1000 47/389

09.40 FW1 Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Current fault word 1.
B00 Phase C Lost 2 1 Phase C lost 3rd INV
B01 INT2 2nd EarthFault 1 INT2 2nd Earth Fault 3rd INV
B02 INT2 Overcurrent 1 INT2 Overcurrent 3rd INV
B03 EXU: Overcurrent 1 Excitation Overcurrent
B04 EXU: Alpha Min Flt 1 Excitation Alpha Min Fault
B05 High Current 1 High Current (SW Overcurrent retry failed)
B06 Overcurrent 3 1 Overcurrent 4th INV
B07 Phase A Lost 3 1 Phase A lost 4th INV
B08 Phase B Lost 3 1 Phase B lost 4th INV
B09 Phase C Lost 3 1 Phase C lost 4th INV
B10 INT3 2nd EarthFault 1 INT3 2nd Earth Fault 4th INV
B11 INT3 Overcurrent 1 INT3 Overcurrent 4th INV
B12 INT0 SinFilOverCurr 1 INT0 Filter over current
B13 SinFilOvercurr 1 Sine filter over current
B14 Ground Overcurrent 1 Sine filter ground over current
09.41 FW2 Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Current fault word 2.
B00 INT0 Overcurrent FT 1 INT0 Overcurrent with Firing through
B01 INT1 Overcurrent FT 1 INT1 Overcurrent with Firing through – 2nd inverter
B02 INT2 Overcurrent FT 1 INT2 Overcurrent with Firing through – 3rd inverter
B03 INT3 Overcurrent FT 1 INT3 Overcurrent with Firing through – 4th inverter
B04 DCF Overcurrent 1 DCF over current
B05 DCF Earth Fault 1 DCF earth fault
B06 DCF Cur Ripple 1 DCF current ripple
B07 RMS GroundCurrent 1 Filter ground current flt (RMS)
B11 DCS ArmCurrDev 1
B12
B13
B14
09.42 FW Short Circuit ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Short circuit fault word.
B00 CBU Short Circuit 1 CBU Short Circuit
B01 INT0 ShortCircuit 1 INT0 Short Circuit
B02 INT0 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT0 VLU Short Circuit
B03 INT0 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT0 DI/DT Supervision
B04 INT1 ShortCircuit 1 INT1 Short Circuit 2nd INV
B05 INT1 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT1 VLU Short Circuit 2nd INV
B06 INT1 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT1 DI/DT Supervision 2nd INV
B07 INT2 ShortCircuit 1 INT2 Short Circuit 3rd INV
B08 INT2 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT2 VLU Short Circuit 3rd INV
B09 INT2 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT2 DI/DT Supervision 3rd INV
B10 INT3 ShortCircuit 1 INT3 Short Circuit 4th INV
B11 INT3 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT3 VLU Short Circuit 4th INV
B12 INT3 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT3 DI/DT Supervision 4th INV
B13 CBU Short Circuit 1 1 CBU Short Circuit 2nd unit
B14 INT0 ShortRecDiod 1

ABB
09.43 FW1 Short Circuit ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Short circuit fault word 1.
B00 INT0 ShortCircPlus 1 INT0 Short Circuit in DC Plus
B01 INT0 ShortCircMinus 1 INT0 Short Circuit in DC Minus
B02 INT0 LS Print Plus 1 LS1 Supervision not ok
B03 INT0 LS Print Minus 1 LS2 Supervision not ok
B04 INT1 Desaturation 1
B07 DU/DT ShortCirc 1
B08 Charging Circuit 1
B12
B13
B14
09.44 FW Switching ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Switching fault word.
B00 SwitchingFreq 1ms 1 Switching Frequency 1ms
B01 SwitchingFreq 50ms 1 Switching Frequency 50ms
B02 SwitchingFreq250ms 1 Switching Frequency 250ms
B03 SwitchingFreq 1s 1 Switching Frequency 1s
B04 SwitchingFreq 1ms1 1 Switching Frequency 1ms 2nd INV
B05 SwitchingFreq 50ms1 1 Switching Frequency 50ms 2nd INV
B06 SwitchingFreq250ms1 1 Switching Frequency 250ms 2nd INV
B07 SwitchingFreq 1s 1 1 Switching Frequency 1s 2nd INV
B08 PUB: WrongSwitch 1 1 PUB: Wrong switching INT1
B09 SwitchingFreq 1ms2 1 Switching Frequency 1 ms 3rd INV
B10 SwitchingFreq 50ms2 1 Switching Frequency 50 ms 3rd INV
B11 SwitchingFreq250ms2 1 Switching Frequency 250 ms 3rd INV
B12 SwitchingFreq 1s 2 1 Switching Frequency 1 s 3rd INV
B14 INT0 SwitchingFreq 1 SwitchingFreq HW level exceeded
09.45 FW1 Switching ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Switching fault word 1.
B00 SwitchingFreq 1ms3 1 Switching Frequency 1 ms 4th INV
B01 SwitchingFreq 50ms3 1 Switching Frequency 50 ms 4th INV
B02 SwitchingFreq250ms3 1 Switching Frequency 250 ms 4th INV
B03 SwitchingFreq 1s 3 1 Switching Frequency 1 s 4th INV
B05 PP5 illegal for IFU 1
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
MSAI5150 ACS1000 49/389

09.46 FW Network ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Network fault word.
B00 Network Disturbed 1 Network Disturbance
B01 Network Disturbed 1 1 Network Disturbance 1
B02 Network UnderVolt 1 Network Undervoltage
B03 Network OverVolt 1 Network Overvoltage
B04 Network Frequency 1 Network Frequency
B05 HighNetworkVoltage 1
B06 FrequencyNotNominal 1
B07 No Synchronization 1
B08 EXU: Undervoltage 1 EXU: Undervoltage
B09 EXU: No Sync 1 EXU: No Synchronization
B10 EXU: SupplyFreq 1 EXU: Supply Frequency
B11 DCS: Mains Underv 1 DCS Mains undervoltage
B12 DCS: Mains Overv 1 DCS Mains overvoltage
B13 DCS: Not Sync 1 DCS Not Synchronized
B14 AutoRestart aftr RT 1 Autorestart after Ride Through
09.48 FW SpeedPosition ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Speed & Positioning fault word.
B00 Overfrequency 1 Overfrequency
B01 PositionMeasurement 1 Position Measurement Fault
B02 Speed Measurement 1 Speed Measurement Fault
B03 Encoder Mismatch 1 Encoder Failure
B04 RSD: F Pos Encoder 1 In follower drive position encoder mismatch
B05 SSI Parity Error 1 Parity check error in SSI encoder signal
B06 Absolute Pos Check 1 Absolute encoder position check failed
B07 Auto Offset Fail 1 Automatic encoder offset calibration failed
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
09.50 FW Generic Faults ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Generic fault word.
B00 AMC: Fault Class 1 1 AMC: Fault Class 1
B01 AMC: Fault Class 2 1 AMC: Fault Class 2
B02 INT: Fault Class 1 1 INT: Fault Class 1
B03 INT: Fault Class 2 1 INT: Fault Class 2
B04 PUB: INT0 Faulted 1 PUB Int0 Fault
B07 EXU: Fault Class 1 1 CCB: Fault Class 1
B11 INT: MCB Trip Req 1 INT: MCB open command via INT – board.
B12 EXU: Not Rdy On 1 EXU is not in ready on state
B13 EXU: Not Rdy Run 1 EXU is not in ready run state
B14 EXU: Not Rdy Ref 1 EXU is not in ready ref state
B15 EXU: Alarm 1 EXU common alarm

ABB
09.51 FW1 Generic Faults ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Generic fault word 1.
B00 Autorestart Timeout 1 Autorestart Time elapsed – Common
B01 Autorestart Loop 1 Reached max number of successive Auto restarts -Common
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
09.52 FW Other ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Other fault word.
B00 Operating System 1 AMC Operating System Fault
B01 SineFiltCap 1
B02 Motor Protection SW 1
B03 Motor Underload 1
B04 EXU: OperatingSys 1 EXU: Operating System Fault
B05 EXU: Illegal Fault 1 EXU: Illegal Fault
B06 EXU: CSM1 Timeout 1 EXU: CSM1 Timeout
B07 EXU: BCO Fault 1 EXU: BCO Fault
B08 INT0 Block Modulatio 1 INT0 Modulation stopped, firing through in other drive
B12 INT0 1st Earth EAF 1 INT0 NP-GND voltage too big
MSAI5150 ACS1000 51/389

09.53 FW1 Other ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Other fault word 1.
B00 INT0 INT2INT Trip 1 INT0 has tripped due to trip in another INT
B04 INT0 INT2INT MCB 1 INT0 tripped opened MCB, due to trip in another INT
B08 INT0 INT2INT FT 1 INT0 tripped firing through, due to trip in another INT
B12 PLL Unlocked 1
B14 DCS Ext Fault 1 DCS: External fault from DI
B15 MasterEXU not 1 Master EXU in AR
RdyRun
B16 BCU TEMP SW FT 1 BCU temperature (thermal model) too high
B17 BCU RES TEMP SW 1 BCU braking resistor temperature (thermal model) too
FT high
B18 BCU OFF SW FT 1 BCU turned off because of fault
B19 BCU SW FREQ FT 1 BCU switching frequency too high
09.54 AlarmWord1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

B00 MCB NotAvl MCB: faulty, drawn out, in "local" mode, etc.
B01 MCB Discrep MCB: discrepancy of two feedback signals
B02 InpIsolDis External: input isolator discrepancy
B03 OutpIsolDis External: output isolator discrepancy
B04
B05 EmergStop MCB: emergency stop activated
B06 ProcessStop External: customer system protection
B07 InputIsolat External: input isolator not closed
B08 OutputIsolat External: output isolator not closed
B09 ParamBackup Parameter backup active
B10
B11
B12 LimitSuperv Inverter: limit supervision
B15

ABB

B02 TrTmpExt/3 Transformer: trafo temperature external / 3 too high
B03 TrOilLevel Transformer: oil level too low
B04 Buchholz Transformer: external Buchholz supervision
B05 IntTrafFan1 Transformer: integrated fan 1; not available with ACS 1000i
B06 IntTrafFan2 Transformer: integrated fan 2; not available with ACS 1000i
B07 OutpTrafoTmp Transformer: output trafo temp. too high
B08
B09
B10
B11 MacroChange Control: user macro has been changed
B12 AuxRideThrgh Aux. Power: aux. power ride through active
B14 AnInpCalib Control: automatic calibration of IOEC boards in progress
B15

B00 MotWdgTmp1 Motor: winding temperature 1 too high (phase U, V or W)
B01 MotWdgTmpU2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase U too high
B02 MotWdgTmpV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V too high
B03 MotWdgTmpW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W too high
B04 Heater Motor: motor heater and/or cabinet heater internal contactor(s)
B05 MotCooler Motor: motor cooler internal contactor
B06 ExtMotCool Motor: external cooling
B07
B08 BrgTemp DE Motor: temperature at the driven end bearing too high
B09 BrgTemp NDE Motor: temperature at the non-driven end bearing too high
B10
B11
B14
B15
MSAI5150 ACS1000 53/389


B00 ExtMotProt Motor: external protection relay
B01 MotVibrat Motor: external vibration supervision
B02
B03
B06
B07 InvOverLoad Inverter overloaded. Current is too high for this low frequency
range.
B08 MotPhUnbal Motor: phase currents unbalanced
B09
B10
B11
B12 MotOverLoad Motor: overload according to programmable load curve
B13 MotUndLoad Motor: underload according to programmable load curve
B14
B15

B00 CH0 Timeout Control: DDCS channel 0 (fieldbus) time-out
B01 CH0 LinkErr Control: DDCS channel 0 (fieldbus) link error
B02 CH2 LinkErr Control: DDCS channel 2 (master/follower) link error
B03 Panel Lost Control: panel communication loss
B07 MotWdgMLos Motor: winding temperature measurement - loss of analogue
input
B09 ExtAct1Lost Control: analogue input, actual signal 1 is missing (PID-control)
B10 IOEC4AI2MLos General: IOEC4 AI2 (AI2 for PID / Mot. Tmp. 2 Ph. U) - loss of
analogue input
B11 MotTmpMLosV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V - loss of analogue
input
B12 MotTmpMLosW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W - loss of analogue
input
B13 Brg DE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the driven end bearing -
B14 BrgNDE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the non-driven end
bearing - loss of analogue input
B15

ABB

B00 WtrTmpHigh Water Cooling: temperature too high
B01 ExtWtrCool Water Cooling: external water cooling supervision
B02 Pump 1 Water Cooling: pump 1 failure with redundant pumps
B03 Pump 2 Water Cooling: pump 2 failure with redundant pumps
B04 WtrTmpRef Water Cooling: deviation from water temperature reference value
too big
B05
B06 WtrPresDifLo Water Cooling: difference pressure too low (= output press. with
open cooling system)
B07 WtrPresDifHi Water Cooling: difference pressure too high (= output press. with
open cooling system)
B08 WtrPress1Hi Water Cooling: output pressure too high
B09 WtrPress2Hi Water Cooling: input pressure too high (only with closed cooling
system)
B10 WtrPress2Lo Water Cooling: input pressure too low (only with closed cooling
system)
B11
B12 WtrConduct Water Cooling: conductivity too high
B13 WtrLeakage Water Cooling: leakage of cooling water
B14 AuxFan 1/2 Water Cooling: aux. fan 1/2 failure
B15

B00 InvAirTemp Air cooling: incoming cooling air too high
B01 Fan (Grp) 1 Air cooling with redundant fans: fan (group) 1 failed
B02 Fan (Grp) 2 Air cooling with redundant fans: fan (group) 2 failed
B03
B04 FanDiffPres Air cooling: differential pressure too high
B05
B06 AirFiltSupv Air cooling: optional: differential pressure too high
B07
B08 OutsAirTemp Water cooling: outside air temperature too high
B09
B10 BChopFan Braking chopper: fan failed
B11
B12 InvFan1Disturbed Inverter fan 1 is disturbed (not ready to operate)
B13 InvFan2Disturbed Inverter fan 2 is disturbed (not ready to operate)
B14 TraFan1Disturbed Integrated transformer fan 1 is disturbed (not ready to
operate)
B15 TraFan2Disturbed Integrated transformer fan 2 is disturbed (not ready to
operate)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 55/389


B00 SM1NotAvl Sync. bypass: motor circuit breaker 1 is drawn out or faulty
B04 Sbp1Control Sync. bypass: line circuit breaker 1 is closed but should be
opened
opened
opened
opened
B08 DirNotFwd Sync. bypass: direction of motor is not forward
B09 WrongSyncPar Sync. bypass: wrong motor or sync. mode selection by digital
inputs
B10 Synchrotact Sync. bypass: Synchrotact 4/5 is in fault state
B11
B12
B13 FanDiffPresLow EC fan control air pressure monitoring shows too low pressure
B14 FanDiffPresHigh EC fan control air pressure monitoring shows too high pressure
B15 NOT USED
09.70 AW Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Communication alarm word.
B00 CCB Communication 1 CCB Communication Fault –
B01 EXU Communication 1 EXU Communication Fault – SD
B02 EXU PAI Communication 1 EXU PAI Communication Fault – SD
B03 DCF CH 0 Communication 1 DCF CH 0 Communication Faulted
B04 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm
B05 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 2nd inv 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 2nd inv
B06 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 3rd inv 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 3rd inv
B07 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 4th inv 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 4th inv
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling:

ABB
09.71 AW CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Control Hardware alarm word.
B00 INT0 ASE Fault 1 INT0 ASE Fault -- ARU
B01 INT0 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT0 Wrong EPLD Version -- Common
B02 INT0 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT0 Wrong PUPA Version -- ARU
B03 INT0 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT0 PUPA FLASH Corrupted -- ARU
B04 INT3 ASE Fault 1 INT3 ASE Fault - ARU
B05 INT3 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT3 Wrong EPLD Version -- Common
B06 INT3 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT3 Wrong PUPA Version -- ARU
B07 INT3 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT3 PUPA FLASH Corrupted -- ARU
B08 INT0 INTERNAL 1 INT0 Internal Fault -- Common
B12 INT4 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT4 Wrong EPLD Version -- ACS2000
09.72 AW1 CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Control Hardware 1 alarm word.
B00 INT1 ASE Fault 1 INT1 ASE Fault 2nd inv - ARU
B01 INT1 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT1 Wrong EPLD Version 2nd inv - Common
B02 INT1 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT1 Wrong PUPA Version 2nd inv - Common
B03 INT1 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT1 PUPA FLASH Corrupted 2nd inv - ARU
B04 INT2 ASE Fault 1 INT2 ASE Fault 3rd inv - ARU
B05 INT2 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT2 Wrong EPLD Version 3rd inv - Common
B06 INT2 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT2 Wrong PUPA Version 3rd inv - Common
B07 INT2 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT2 PUPA FLASH Corrupted 3rd inv - ARU
B08 PUB: Wrong EPLD Ver 1 PUB Wrong EPLD Version - Common
B09 INT EPLD Versions 1 INT PLD Versions Mismatch - Common
B10 INT PUPA Versions 1 INT PUPA Versions Mismatch – Common
B11 EXU FUSE 1 EXU Fuse Failure – SD
B12 DCF AUX UNDERV 1 DCS Auxiliary Undervoltage detected – SD
B13 DCF NO FAN ACK 1 DCS Fan is not running – SD
B14 DCF NO MAIN COND ACK 1 DCS Main Conductor did not close – SD
09.73 AW DC LinkVoltage ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

DC link voltage alarm word.
B00 Ridethrough 1 DC link Undervoltage Ridethrough Alarm – Common
B01 RBU Temperature rise 1 RBU Temperature rise – AD,SD
B02 RBU disabled 1 RBU disabled – AD,SD
B03 Ridethrough Net Asym 1 Ridethrough net asymmetric
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
MSAI5150 ACS1000 57/389

09.74 AW Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Current alarm word.
B00 High Current 1 High Current (SW Overcurrent retry active)– ARU
B01 Ground Overcurrent 1 Floating ground current alarm
B02 EXU: Overcurrent 1 Excitation overcurrent Alarm – SD
B03 EXU: Alpha Min Flt 1 Excitation Alpha Min Alarm – SD
B04 DCS Overcurrent 1 DCS overcurrent Alarm – SD
B05 DCS Cur Ripple 1 DCS current ripple too big Alarm – SD
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
09.75 AW Short Circuit ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Short Circuit alarm word.
B00 INT0 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT0 DI/DT Supervision (Alarm) - Common
B01 INT1 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT1 DI/DT Supervision 2nd inv (Alarm) - Common
B02 INT2 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT2 DI/DT Supervision 3rd inv (Alarm) – Common
B03 INT3 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT3 DI/DT Supervision 3rd inv (Alarm) - Common
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
09.77 AW Network ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Network alarm word.
B00 HighNetworkVoltage 1 High Network Voltage – ARU
B01 FrequencyNotNominal 1 Frequency Not Nominal – ARU
B02 No Synchronization 1 No Synchronization – ARU
B03 EXU: Undervoltage 1 EXU: Undervoltage Alarm – SD
B04 EXU: No Sync 1 EXU: No Synchronization Alarm – SD
B05 EXU: SupplyFreq 1 EXU: Supply Frequency Alarm – SD
B06 DCS: Mains Underv 1 DCS Mains Undervoltage Alarm – SD
B07 DCS: Not Sync 1 DCS not synchronized Alarm – SD
B08 Neg Sequ Network Hi 1 Sequence Network High – ARU
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14

ABB
09.78 AW SpeedPosition ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Speed and Position Alarm Word.
B00 Speed Measurement 1 NTAC 3 consecutive communication Faults – AD,SD
B01 Position Measurement 1 GRB 3 consecutive communication Faults – SD
B02 Remote Position Difference 1 Remote position difference large
B03 SSI Parity Counter 1 SSI parity counter alarm
B04 Position Check 1 Encoder position check alarm
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
09.79 AW Generic Faults ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Generic alarm word.
B00 PUB: INT0 Faulted 1 PUB: INT0 Faulted - Common
B01 PUB: INT1 Faulted 1 PUB: INT1 Faulted - Common
B02 PUB: INT2 Faulted 1 PUB: INT2 Faulted – Common
B03 PUB: INT3 Faulted 1 PUB: INT3 Faulted – Common
B04 EXU: Fault Class 1 1 EXU: Fault Class 1 (Alarm) – SD
B07 EXU: Not Rdy On 1 EXU is not in ready on state (Alarm) – SD
B08 EXU: Not Rdy Run 1 EXU is not in ready run state (Alarm) – SD
B09 EXU: Not Rdy Ref 1 EXU is not in ready ref state (Alarm) – SD
B10 EXU: Alarm 1 EXU Alarm pending – SD
B11
B12
B13
B14
09.80 AW Other ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Other alarm word.
B00 PLL unlocked 1 PLL Unlocked Alarm – ARU
B01 AUTORESTART 1 AUTORESTART Alarm – Common
B02 Motor Underload 1 Motor underload alarm – SD, AD
B03 EXU CSM1 TimeOUT 1 EXU: CSM1 Timeout – SD
B04 EXU BCO 1 EXU: BCO Fault – SD
B05 REDUNDANCY LOST 1 RSD: Redundancy lost, parameter – SD
B06 IGCT TestMode 1 IGCT test mode running – SD, AD
B07 EXU RideThrough 1 EXU ridethrough alarm – SD
B08 INT1 Transition 1 INT1 Illegal transition request (Phase A1) – ACS2000
B09 INT2 Transition 1 INT2 Illegal transition request (Phase B1) – ACS2000
B10 INT3 Transition 1 INT3 Illegal transition request (Phase C1) – ACS2000
B11 INT1 MIN Pulse Length 1 INT1 Minimum pulse length (Phase A1) – ACS2000
B12 INT2 MIN Pulse Length 1 INT2 Minimum pulse length (Phase B1) – ACS2000
B13 INT3 MIN Pulse Length 1 INT3 Minimum pulse length (Phase C1) – ACS2000
B14 Motor Stall Protection 1 Motor stall protection alarm – ACS1000
MSAI5150 ACS1000 59/389

09.81 SSW FaultDiag ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
09.82 SSW AlarmDiag ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

ABB
Group 11 START/STOP/DIR
11 START/STOP/DIR
These parameter values can only be altered when the ACS1000 is stopped.
11.01 Ext1Strt/Stop/Dir
This parameter defines the connections and the source of Start, Stop, and Direction commands for
external control location 1 (EXT1).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT SEL external control location is not selected
2 DI1 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to DI1 – IOEC2. Direction is fixed to
connection for forward.(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = Stop; 24V DC on DI1 –
Start/Stop) IOEC2 = Start)
3 DI1,2 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2 as above.
connection for Direction is connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2.(0V DC on
Start/Stop and Direction) DI2 – IOEC2 = Forward; 24V DC on DI2 – IOEC2 = Reverse)
4 DI1P,2P (three-wire Start/Stop commands are given by means of momentary
connection for push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). The start push-button is
Start/Stop) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2.
The Stop button is normally closed and connected to digital
input DI2 – IOEC2. Multiple start push-buttons are connected
in parallel; stop-push buttons are connected in series.
5 DI1P,2P,3 (three-wire Start / Stop connected as with DI1P,2P. Direction is
connection for connected to digital input DI3 – IOEC2.(0V DC on DI3 =
Start/Stop and Direction) Forward; 24V DC on DI3 = Reverse)
6 DI1P,2P,3P (three-wire Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with
connection for Start two separate momentary push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“).
Forward, Start Reverse, The stop push-button is normally closed and connected to
and Stop) digital input DI3 – IOEC2. Start-Forward and Start-Reverse
push-buttons are normally open and connected to digital
inputs DI1 – IOEC2 and DI2 – IOEC2 respectively. Multiple
start push-buttons are connected in parallel and multiple Stop
push-buttons are connected in series.
7 DI 6 (two wire Start/Stop connected to DI6 – IOEC2. Direction is fixed
connection for according to parameter 11.3 DIRECTION.(0V DC on DI6 =
Start/Stop) Stop; 24V DC on DI6 = Start)
Start/Stop, and DI5 – IOEC2 = Forward; 24V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = Reverse)
Direction)
9 KEYPAD The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the
Control Panel keypad when external control location 1 is
active.
10 COMM.MODULE The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from
COMMON MODULE when 75.04 is set to 2 or 3.
11 COMM.CH4 The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from
COMMON MODULE CH4 when 75.05 is set to 2 or 3.
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 11 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 61/389

11.02 Ext2Strt/Stop/Dir
This parameter defines the connections and the source of Start, Stop, and Direction commands for
external control location 2 (EXT2).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT SEL external control location is not selected
2 DI 1 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to DI1 – IOEC2. Direction is fixed to
connection for forward.(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = Stop; 24V DC on DI1 –
Start/Stop) IOEC2 = Start)
Start/Stop and Direction) DI2 – IOEC2 = Forward; 24V DC on DI2 – IOEC2 = Reverse)
4 DI1P,2P (three-wire Start/Stop commands are given by means of momentary
connection for push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). The start push-button is
Start/Stop) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2.
The Stop button is normally closed and connected to digital
input DI2 – IOEC2. Multiple start push-buttons are connected
in parallel; stop-push buttons are connected in series.
5 DI1P,2P,3 (three-wire Start / Stop connected as with DI1P,2P. Direction is
connection for connected to digital input DI3 – IOEC2.(0V DC on DI3 =
Start/Stop and Direction) Forward; 24V DC on DI3 = Reverse)
6 DI1P,2P,3P (three-wire Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with
connection for Start two separate momentary push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“).
Forward, Start Reverse, The stop push-button is normally closed and connected to
and Stop) digital input DI3 – IOEC2. Start-Forward and Start-Reverse
push-buttons are normally open and connected to digital
inputs DI1 – IOEC2 and DI2 – IOEC2 respectively. Multiple
start push-buttons are connected in parallel and multiple Stop
push-buttons are connected in series.
7 DI 6 (two wire Start/Stop connected to DI6 – IOEC2. Direction is fixed
connection for according to parameter 11.3 DIRECTION.(0V DC on DI6 =
Start/Stop) Stop; 24V DC on DI6 = Start)
Start/Stop, and DI5 – IOEC2 = Forward; 24V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = Reverse)
Direction)
9 KEYPAD The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the
Control Panel keypad when external control location 1 is
active.
10 COMM.MODULE The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from
COMMON MODULE when 75.04 is set to 2 or 3.
11 COMM.CH4 The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from
COMMON MODULE CH4 when 75.05 is set to 2 or 3.
11.03 Direction
This parameter allows you to fix the rotation of the motor to FORWARD or REVERSE. If you select
REQUEST the direction is selected by digital inputs as defined by parameters 11.1 EXT1
STRT/STOP/DIR and 11.2 EXT2 STRT/STOP/DIR or by keypad push-buttons.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 FORWARD
2 REVERSE
3 REQUEST

ABB
CDP 312
CONTROL PANEL
LO
C
R EM
12.02
EXT1 / EXT2
SELECT
remote con tr ol location

Ext1 / E xt2
IOEC 2: N OT SE LEC TED

1
DI 1...6
Defaul t: DI 1, 2
LO CAL START / STOP
2.. .8
EX T1 REQUEST
K EYP AD 9
10
REMOT E FO RW ARD
DIRECTION
C OM M.M OD ULE
EX T2
RE VERSE
NOT SELE CTE D

1
DI 1.. .6 2.. .8
K EYPAD 9
AMC3-bo ar d CH 0
C OM M.M OD ULE 10
Comm. Modul e
11.02 11.01 11.03 16.01

EXT2 EXT1 DIRECTION PROCESS
START/ST OP/DIR START/ST OP/DIR STOP
selection of digitital i nput for
control location
Figure 11-1 Selection of Start / Stop / Direction- Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 63/389

11.04 Ext1 MCB Control
This parameter defines the connections and the source of MCB ORDER CLOSE & MCB ORDER OPEN
commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 FRONT DOOR External MCB control location is not selected; for MCB
control the MCB ONLINE and OFFLINE push-buttons on the
FRONT DOOR are used
2 DI1 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI1 –
to Close and Open the IOEC2.(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB;
MCB) 24V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB)
3 DI1P,2P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary
connection to Close and push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). The close push-button is
Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2.
The open push-button is normally open and connected to
digital input DI2 – IOEC2.
to Close and Open the IOEC2.DI3P,4P (three-wire connection to Close and Open
MCB) the MCB)
7 D5P,6P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary
connection to Close and push buttons (P stands for „pulse“). The close push-button is
10 COMM.MODULE The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from
communication module when parameter 75.04 COMM
MODULE is set to 2 or 3.
11 COMM.CH4 The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from
MODULE CH4 is set to 2.

ABB
11.05 Ext2 MCB Control
This parameter defines the connections and the source of MCB ORDER CLOSE & MCB ORDER OPEN
commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 FRONT DOOR External MCB control location is not selected; for MCB
control the MCB ONLINE and OFFLINE push-buttons on the
FRONT DOOR are used
7 D5P,6P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary
10 COMM.MODULE The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from
MODULE is set to 2 or 3.
11 COMM.CH4 The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from
MODULE CH4 is set to 2
MSAI5150 ACS1000 65/389

CONTROL PANEL 12.02

EXT1 / EXT2
CDP 312 SELECT
LO
C
REM
pu sh bu tto ns o n
contro l secti on door
IOEC2 - DI9
DI 6 Feedback MCB Status open
IO EC 1: OffLin
DI 7
e
OnL ine
IOEC2 - DI10
Feedback MCB Status closed
IOEC2 - DI11
MCB MCB COMMAND
rem ote con tr ol location
E xt1 / E xt2
Feedback MCB Status Available LOGIC
IO EC 2: DI 1...6 N OT SE LEC TE D 1 Open / Close
LO C AL
DI 7, 13
Def au l t: DI7,13 2...9 EXT1
N OT SE LE CTE D 1 REMO TE
C OM M.M OD ULE 10
AMC 3-bo ar d CH 0 Def aul t: DI7,13 2.. .9 EXT2

Com m. Mo dule
C OM M.M OD ULE 10
11.04 11.05 21.05 21.06 21.07 21.08 21.09

EXT1 EXT2 MCB ON CONTROL MCB OBEN MCB AVAILABLE MCB CLOSING MCB OPENING
MCB CONTROL MCB CONTROL MODE SIGNAL SIGNAL TIME LIMIT TIME LIMIT
selection of digitital input for

control l ocation
Figure 11-2 Selection of MCB Control - Overview

ABB
Group 12 REFERENCE SELECT
12 REFERENCE SELECT
The following parameters (except those marked with “O”) can be altered while the ACS1000 is
running.
12.01 Keypad Ref Select
VALUE NAME MEANING

1 REF1 Keypad reference 1 is selected as the active keypad reference. The type of the
(rpm) reference is speed, given in rpm. If scalar control is selected, the reference is
given in Hz.
2 REF2 Keypad reference 2 is selected as the active keypad reference. Keypad
(%) reference 2 is given in (%). The type of keypad reference 2 depends on the
selected Application Macro. For example, if the Torque Control Macro is
selected, REF2 (%) is the torque reference.
12.02 Ext1/Ext2 Select

This parameter sets the digital input used for selecting the external control location, or fixes it to EXT1
or EXT2. The external control location of START/STOP/DIRECTION/MCB CONTROL commands and
reference value (REF1 or REF2) is determined by this parameter.
NAME VALUE MEANING
DI1 – IO2 1
DI2 – IO2 2
DI3 – IO2 3
DI4 – IO2 4
DI5 – IO2 5
DI6 – IO2 6
EXT1 7
EXT2 8
COMM MODULE 9
COMM.CH4 10
MSAI5150 ACS1000 67/389

12.03 Ext Ref1 Select
This parameter provides the settings for external reference 1with respect to the control location. The
digital inputs are located on IOEC2.
NAME VALUE MEANING
KEYPAD 1
REF1/IO2 - AI1 2
REF2/IOx - AIx 3
REF1+REF2 4
REF1 - REF2 5
REF1 * REF2 6
MIN(REF1/REF2) 7
MAX(REF1/REF2) 8
DI3U,4DR 9
DI3U,4D 10
DI5U,6D 11
COMM.REF 12
COMM.REF+REF1 13
COMM.REF*REF1 14
Speed Reference
LOC 1 1123.0 rpm

Status Running
MotCurr 259.6 A
Figure
12.04 Ext Ref1 Minimum [Hz]

This parameter sets the minimum speed reference in rpm. The value corresponds to the minimum of the
analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF1. In the SCALAR control mode this
parameter is given in Hz. Note: If the reference is given through the communication module, the scaling
differs from that of an analogue signal. (see fieldbus control manual for more information).
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: 18000 Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm
rpm
12.05 Ext Ref1 Maximum [Hz]

This parameter sets the maximum speed reference in rpm. The value corresponds to the maximum of
the analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF1. In the SCALAR control mode
this parameter is given in Hz. Note: If the reference is given through the communication module, the
scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. (see fieldbus control manual for more information).
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: 18000 Def: 1500 rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm
rpm

ABB
E XT RE F1 S ELE CT (12.03)
12.01
S PE E D M AX
(2 0.02) Ma x
KE YPAD S cal ing: 1
mi n .. . ma x speed
Min 2 .. .11 RE F
RE F1 IN T ERN AL 2 S PE E D M IN = S PE E D M IN .. . S PE E D M AX
see 1 2 .. .13
3 (2 0.01)
Fi gure 13 -2 RE F2 IN T ERN AL
4
+
5
-
6
x E XT RE F1 M AX
7 (1 2.05) Ma x
M IN S cal ing:
8 Min
M AX E XT RE F1 M IN = E XT RE F1 M IN .. . E XT RE F1 M AX
(1 2.04)
DI3,4 - IO E C2 M otorp otentiom eter

(referenc e ge nera tor)
DI5,6 - IO E C2
9, 10, 1 1
ACC TIM E 2
(2 2.04)
OCOM
verr.M. RE F -
S ystem 12 E XT RE F1 M AX
Da taS e t 1 Va l. 2
(1 2.05) Ma x
(03.24) 13 S cal ing:
+ 0 .. . 20000
14 0 = 0 .. . E XT RE F1 M AX
x
Figure
MSAI5150 ACS1000 69/389

12.06 Ext Ref2 Select
This parameter provides the settings for external reference 2 with respect to the control location. The
digital inputs are located on IOEC2.
The possibilities are the same as for External Reference 1. See parameter 12.03.
NAME VALUE MEANING
KEYPAD 1
REF1/IO2 - AI1 2
REF2/IO1 - AI1 3
REF1+REF2 4
REF1 - REF2 5
REF1 * REF2 6
MIN(REF1/REF2) 7
MAX(REF1/REF2) 8
DI3U,4DR 9
DI3U,4D 10
DI5U,6D 11
COMM.REF 12
COMM.REF+REF1 13
COMM.REF*REF1 14
COMM.CH4 15
Speed Reference Torque Reference
( if not Torque Control - Macro or PID ( if Torque Control - Macro or PID
Control - Macro is selected ) Control -Macro is selected )
LOC 1 98.0 % LOC 1 50.0 %

Status Running Status Running
REM MotSpeed 1123.0 rpm REM MotTorq 50.0 %
MotCurr 259.6 A MotCurr 259.6 A
Figure
12.07 Ext Ref2 Minimum [%]

This parameter sets the minimum reference in percent. The value corresponds to the minimum of the
analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF2.If the Factory, Hand/Auto or
Sequential Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the minimum speed reference. The value is
given as a percentage of the maximum speed defined by parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20.01
MINIMUM speed if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.If the
Torque Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the minimum torque reference. The value is given
as a percentage of the nominal torque.If PID Control Macro is selected, this parameter sets the
minimum of the process reference. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum process
quantity. In the SCALAR control mode, this value is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency
defined by parameter 20.xx MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 20.xx MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute
value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Note: If the reference is given through the
communication module, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. See fieldbus control manual
for more information.
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:10 == 1 %

ABB
12.08 Ext Ref2 Maximum [%]
This parameter sets the maximum reference in percent. The value corresponds to the maximum of the
analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF2.If the Factory, Hand/Auto or
Sequential Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the maximum speed reference. The value is
given as a percentage of the maximum speed defined with parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or
20.01 MINIMUM speed if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.If
the Torque Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the maximum torque reference. The value is
given as a percentage of the nominal torque.If PID Control Macro is selected, this parameter sets the
maximum of process reference. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum process quantity.In
the SCALAR control mode, this value is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency defined by
parameter 20.xx MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 20.xx MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the
minimum limits is greater than the maximum limit. Note: If the reference is given through the
communication module, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. (see fieldbus control manual
for more information).
E XT RE F2 S ELE CT (12.06)
12.01
S PE E D M AX
(2 0.02) Ma x
KE YPAD S cal ing: 1
Min 2 .. .11 RE F
RE F1 IN T ERN AL 2 S PE E D M IN = S PE E D M IN .. . S PE E D M AX
see 1 2 .. .13
3 (2 0.01)
Fi gure 13 -2 RE F2 IN T ERN AL
4
+
5
-
6
x E XT RE F2 M AX
7 (1 2.08) Ma x
M IN S cal ing:
8 Min
M AX E XT RE F2 M IN = E XT RE F2 M IN .. . E XT RE F2 M AX
(1 2.07)
DI3,4 - IO E C2 M otorpoten tiom eter

(re ferenc e genera tor)
DI5,6 - IO E C2
9, 10, 1 1
ACC TIM E 2
(22.04)
OCOM
verr.M. RE F -
S ystem 12 E XT RE F2 M AX
Da taS e t 1 Va l. 3
(1 2.08) Ma x
(03.25) 13 S cal ing:
+ 0 .. . 20000 resp. 0 .. . 10000
14 0 = 0 .. . E XT RE F2 M AX
x
Figure 12_5 Selection of REF2 - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 71/389

Figure 12_6 Selection of SPEED REF - Overview
The range of the analogue input signal is set by parameter 13.03 and 13.08. EXT REF2 is a speed or torque reference
of the motor, or a process reference depending on the selected Application Macro. In the SCALAR control mode EXT
REF2 is a frequency reference given in %.
The ACS1000 can be controlled (i.e. reference, Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given) from two External
control locations or from the Local control location, Control Panel Keypad. The selection between Local control and
External control can be done with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel Keypad.
Figure 12-7 Setting of EXT REF MINIMUM and MAXIMUM

ABB
Local Control
The control commands are given from the Control Panel keypad when the ACS1000 is in Local control. L (Local)
indicates this on the control Panel.
External Control
When the ACS1000 is in External control, the commands are given primarily through the control terminal blocks on the
IOEC 1 and 2 board (digital and analogue inputs). Commands can also be given through the control panel or a fieldbus
adapter module.
Figure 12-8 Setting of Local/External Control - Overview
12.09 MotPotTracking
With this parameter it is possible to activate a so-called “tracking function”.
The motor potentiometer will be initialised with the actual speed reference value after changing from “Externa
Control Location” 2 to 1 and vice versa.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO Tracking function is not active
1 YES Tracking function is active
S oftwa re
MOT O R-POT E NT IO MET ER
RE F 1 (REF2)
DI3,4 - IOEC2
DI5,6 - IOEC2 9, 10, 11
2 2.0 4
Accel Time 2
External 2 (1) Active

Init
& 1
Mot Pot Tracking
1 2.0 9
REF 2 (REF1) Init Value
Figure 12-9 Motor Potentiometer Tracking Function - Overview
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: NO Int. scaling:1 == 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 73/389

Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
The analogue input value can be selected in milliamps or volts by means of a HW-switch.
13.01 AutoOffsetCalib
Automatic offset calibration for the analogue inputs of IOEC 1 & 2. Offset value will be stored into the
appropriate AIx OFFSET Iox parameter.
Automatic offset calibration:

All analogue input signals have to be disconnected from the IOEC 1 & 2 board (remove the terminal
plugs) and all AIx OFFSET IOx parameters must have value “0”. Set Par.13.01 to ON. The OFFSET
calibration is started and the analogue input offset values are stored into AIx OFFSET IOx parameters.
During offset calibration, the alarm message “AnInpCalib” is shown on the panel. After the calibration is
finished, Par. 13.01 will be is automatically set to “OFF”. If one of the analogue input values is higher
than 0,5mA the offset calibration will not be carried out and the fault message “AnInpCalib” will be
shown on the panel. Par. 13.01 is automatically set to “OFF”.
Manual offset calibration:

Disconnect the appropriate analogue input signal from the IOEC x board (remove the terminal plug).
Check the actual value in Group 04. Change the offset value until the actual value is 0 mA.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF no offset calibration
1 ON automatic offset calibration started
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1
13.02 AI1 Scale IO1 [%]

Scaling of analogue input AI1. This value corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere
(20mA) or volt (10V). See parameter 4.12 AI1 IOEC1 and 4.01 ExternalRef2.
13.03 AI1 Minimum IO1

Minimum value of AI1. Value to correspond to minimum reference.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

ABB
13.04 AI1 Filter IO1 [s]
Filter time constant for analogue input 1. While the analogue input value changes, 63% of the change
takes place within the time specified by this parameter. Note: Even if 0s as the minimum value is
selected, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 20ms due the signal interface hardware. This
cannot be changed by any parameter.
Note: Even if 0s as the minimum value is selected, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of
20ms due the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameter.
Figure 13 1 Filter Time Constant For Analogue Inputs - Diagram
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 30 s Def: 1 s Int. scaling:100 = 1 s
13.05 AI1 Invert IO1

Analogue input signal inversion.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input
1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input
13.06 AI1 Offset IO1 [mA]

Analogue input offset value. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par.13.01 = ON) or
manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA
13.07 AI1 Scale IO2 [%]


VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

Filter time constant for analogue input 1.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 75/389

VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
mA
Figure 13 2 Analogue Input AI1-IOEC1 and AI1-IOEC2 - Overview

ABB
External reference 1 is selected by parameter 12.03 as REF1 + REF2 and the maximum value (1500rpm) by parameter
12.05. The analogue input IO1- AI1 is scaled to 100% by parameter 13.02. The analogue input IO2 - AI1 is scaled to
10% by parameter 13.07.
Figure 13 3 Scaling of Analogue Inputs AI1-IOEC1 and AI1-IOEC2 - Example
13.12 AI2 HighValue IO2

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).
See parameter 4.17 AI2 IOEC2 and 4.09 MotorWdgTmpPhU1.
Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 2000 Int. scaling:1 == 1
13.13 AI2 LowValue IO2

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or
2V). See parameter 4.17 AI2 IOEC2 and 4.09 MotorWdgTmpPhU1.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 77/389

manually.
mA

See parameter 4.18 AI3 IOEC2 and 4.10 MotorWdgTmpPhV1.

2V). See parameter 4.18 AI3 IOEC2 and 4.10 MotorWdgTmpPhV1.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING

Analogue input offset value. Will be set automatic offset calibration (Par.13.01 = ON) or manually.
mA

See parameter 4.19 AI4 IOEC2 and 4.11 MotorWdgTmpPhW1.

2V). See parameter 4.19 AI4 IOEC2 and 4.11 MotorWdgTmpPhW1.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

ABB

VALUE NAME MEANING

Analogue input offset value. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par.13.01 = ON) or manually.
Figure
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int. scaling:1000 == 1 mA

See parameter 4.13 AI2 IOEC1 and 4.02 InvWtrCoolTemp (for water cooled converters) resp. 4.06
InvAirTemp2 (for air cooled converters).
Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1000 / Int. scaling:
10550

2V). See parameter 4.13 AI2 IOEC1 and 4.02 InvWtrCoolTemp (for water cooled converters) resp. 4.06
InvAirTemp2 (for air cooled converters).
Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 / -13 Int. scaling:

NAME VALUE MEANING
0mA/0V 0
4mA/2V 1
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1==1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 79/389

Filter time constant for analogue input.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0s Max: 60s Def: 0.5s / 1s Int. scaling:

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 0.5 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1000

See parameter 4.14 AI3 IOEC1 and 4.03 InvWtrCoolPressur (for water cooled converters) resp. 4.07
TrafoTemp1 (for ACS 1000i).
10550

2V). See parameter 4.14 AI3 IOEC1 and 4.03 InvWtrCoolPressur (for water cooled converters) resp.
4.07 TrafoTemp1 (for ACS 1000i).

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0s Max: 60s Def: 0.1s / 1s Int. scaling:

manually.

This value divided by 100 (water) resp. 10 (air) corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere
(20mA) or volt (10V). See parameter 4.15 AI4 IOEC1 and 4.04 InvWtrConductivit (for water cooled
converters) resp. 4.08 TrafoTemp2 (for ACS 1000i).
10550

This value divided by 100 (water) resp. 10 (air) corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere
(0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V). See parameter 4.15 AI4 IOEC1 and 4.04 InvWtrConductivit (for water
cooled converters) resp. 4.08 TrafoTemp2 (for ACS 1000i).

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

ABB
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0s Max: 60s Def: 10s / 1s Int. scaling:

manually.

All analogue input signals have to be disconnected from the IOEC 1 2 board (remove the terminal plugs). Set 13.01 to
ON. The OFFSET value will be stored into the offset parameters.
Manual offset calibration:

Disconnect the appropriate analogue input signal from the IOEC x board (remove the terminal plug). Check the actual
value in Group 04. Change the offset value until the actual value is 0 mA.
Figure 13 4 Analogue Input AI2 ... 4 – IOEC1/2 - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 81/389

Example: Scaling of an analogue input signal:
I.e. MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE PHASE U
Transmitter range:analogue signal =4 ... 20 mA (or 2 ... 10V , selected by HW-switch)

Range=0 ... 200°C
Explanation of parameter settings:
13.12HIGH VALUE: 20 mA (10V)= 200°CÞ Setting = 2000 (max value multiplied by 10)
13.13LOW VALUE:4 mA ( 2V)= 0°CÞSetting = 0 (min value multiplied by 10)
13.14MIN VALUE:4 mA ( 2V)= ÞSetting = 4mA (2V)
Þ MOTOR WDG TMP PHASE U:4 ... 20mA (2 ... 10V) = 0 ... 180°C
The actual motor winding temperature in phase U is shown in parameter 04.06 MotorWdgTmpPhaseU (in °C).
Figure
13.45 AI2 OffsetCal IO1

Automatic offset calibration for the analog input 2 of the IOEC1 board. Offset value will be stored into
the appropriate AI2 OFFSET IO1 parameter (13.34).
To ensure an accurate temperature measurement a 100 Ohm resistor has to be connected to –X302:1..2
(instead of PT100). With this resistor the measured temperature should be 0°C. If the temperature
differs from 0°C the automatical offset calibration can be started to correct this.
Note!
- Offset calibration from parameter 13.01 will overwrite the offset value for AI2.
- After the calibration is finished, parameter 13.45 will be automatically set to "OFF"
VALUE NAME MEANING

ABB
Note!
VALUE NAME MEANING

Note!
VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 83/389

Group 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
14.01 DO2Group+IndexIO1
A binary signal (i.e. from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO2 by setting this parameter to the
parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. Additionally the bit number that
identifies the signal within the status word has to be selected with the next parameter. The format is
(x)xyy, where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
If Par. 14.01 is set to “801” and 14.02 is set to “1” , digital output DO2 is active when 8.01 MAIN
STATUS WORD / BIT 1 is “1”. If Par. 14.01 is set to “702” and 14.02 is set to “12,13 or14” , digital
output DO1 is controlled from the overriding system by 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2.
By default, DO2 is the TrafoProtReset signal (Par. 8.04 / Bit 12)
NOTE!
With an ACS 1000i (par. 112.05 ‘’ = ‘Air&Trafo’) DO2 is fixed to the ‘TrafoProtReset’ command.
14.02 DO2 BitNumber IO1

This parameter specifies the bit number (0...15) of the previous selected signal in 14.01.
14.03 DO2 Invert IO1

Inversion selection for output-signal DO2
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT (high value = relay ON , low value = relay OFF)
1 INVERRED (high value = relay OFF , low value = relay ON )
Example:
If Par. 14.04 is set to “801” and 14.05 is set to “1” , digital output DO1 is active when 8.01 MAIN
STATUS WORD / BIT 1 is “1”. If Par. 14.04 is set to “702” and 14.05 is set to “12,13 or14” , digital
output DO1 is controlled from the overriding system by 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2.
By default, DO1 indicates DRIVE READY signal (Par. 8.01 / Bit 1)



VALUE NAME MEANING
1 INVERTED (high value = relay OFF , low value = relay ON )

ABB
Example:
If Par. 14.07 is set to “801” and 14.08 is set to “2”, digital output DO2 is active when 8.01 MAIN
STATUS WORD / BIT 2 is “1”. If Par. 14.07 is set to “702” and 14.08 is set to “12,13 or14”, digital output
DO1 is controlled from the overriding system by 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2.
By default, DO2 indicates RUNNING signal (Par. 8.01 / Bit 2)



VALUE NAME MEANING
Example:
By default, DO3 indicates ALARM signal (Par. 8.01 / Bit 7)



Inversion selection for output-signal DO3 0 = DIRECT (high value = relay ON , low value = relay OFF) 1
= INVERTED (high value = relay OFF , low value = relay ON )
VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 85/389

Example:
By default, DO4 indicates TRIPPED signal (Par. 8.01 / Bit 3)



VALUE NAME MEANING
Example
Programming of the digital output signal IOEC2 – D01: The digital output should be closed if the drive is running.
GROUP : 8 ÞSTATUS WORDSù Þ 14.04:801

INDEX :01ÞMAIN STATUS WORDû
BIT NUMBER:2ÞRDYREF (RUNNING)Þ14.05:2
INVERTED: NOÞDIRECTÞ 14.06:DIRECT
Figure 14-1 Digital Output DO1 … DO4 – IOEC2 - Overview

ABB
Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
15.01 AO1Group+IndexIO1
A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to analogue output by setting parameter 15.01 to the
parameter group and index the value is to taken from. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x the group and yy
is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR FREQUENCY is to be read out at AO1 - IOEC1, parameter 15.01
is set to 106 with 1 representing the group and 06 representing the index.
A numerical value from a higher-level control system can also transferred to the analogue output. The
data set where the value is transmitted into the AMC-table is directed to one of the DATA parameters
(19.01…19.08) by means of either parameters 90.01...90.12 or 92.01…93.12 (see Figure 19-1). The
value is then assigned to the analogue output by setting 15.01 to the group and index of the desired
DATA parameter (for example: 1901 Þ 19 = group , 01 = index)
The default setting of 15.01 is 106, MOTOR FREQUENCY.
Note!
In case of EC fans this analog output cannot be used as free programmable, since it's used for fan
speed reference.
15.02 AO1 Invert IO1

Analogue output signal inversion.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output
1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output
15.03 AO1 Minimum IO1

Analogue output signal offset in milliampere.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset
2 4mA 20% offset (area 4…20mA)
3 10mA 50% offset on area 0…20 mA (for indication of direction i.e. motor torque, motor
speed. See Figure 15-2.)
15.04 AO1 Filter IO1 [s]

Filter time constant for analogue output.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 0.1 s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s
15.05 AO1 Scale IO1

Nominal values of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 15.01
AO1Group+IndexIO1. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).
Unit: Type: R Min: -65536 Max: 65536 Def: 500 Int. scaling:1 == 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 87/389

Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR TORQUE is to be read out at AO2 – IOEC1, parameter 15.06 is
set to 109 with 1 representing the group and 09 representing the index.
The default setting of 15.06 is 109, MOTOR TORQUE.
NOTE!
With ACS 1000i the output IOEC1 - AO2 is fix set to 4mA to provide a current source for temperature
measurements and the settings of 15.06…10 are irrelevant.

VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset
3 10mA 50% offset on area 0…20 mA(for indication of direction i.e. motor torque, motor

15.10 AO2 Scale IO1


ABB
parameter group and index the value is to taken from. The format is (x) xyy, where (x)x the group and yy
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR SPEED is to be read out at AO1 – IOEC2, parameter 15.11 is set
to 102 with 1 representing the group and 02 representing the index.
The default setting of 15.11 is 102, MOTOR SPEED.


VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset

15.15 AO1 Scale IO2

parameter group and index the value is to taken from.The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x the group and yy
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR TORQUE FILT is to be read out at AO2 – IOEC2, parameter
15.16 is set to 108 with 1 representing the group and 08 representing the index.
The default setting of 15.16 is 108, MOTOR TORQUE FILT.

MSAI5150 ACS1000 89/389

VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset
speed. See Figure 15-2.)(for indication of direction i.e. motor torque, motor

Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10s Def: 0,1 s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s
15.20 AO2 Scale IO2

Figure 15-1 Analogue Output AO1 AO2 – IOEC1 / IOEC2 - Overview

ABB
Example: Scaling of an analogue output signal
i.e. AO1 – IOEC2: MOTOR SPEED
Signal :1.02 MOTOR SPEED

Signal range of actual speed :Range (see parameter 50.01), min speed ... max speed
analogue output Signal = 0 ... 20mA
Calculation of parameter settings:
15.11AO1 GROUP+INDEX IO2:1.02ÞMOTOR SPEED

15.12AO1 INVERT IO2:NOÞ min ... max speed= 0 ... 20mA
15.13AO1 MINIMUM IO2:10mAÞmin ... 0 ... max speed= 0 ... 10 ... 20mA
15.14AO1 FILTER IO2:0.5sÞfilter time
15.15AO1 SCALE IO2:1000Þe.g. 50.01 = 1000rpm
Þ MOTOR SPEED : 0 ... 10 ... 20mA = -1000 ... 0 ... 1000rpm
Figure 15-2 Range of Analogue Output Signal AO1 - IOEC1 - Diagram
Figure 15 3 Scaling of Analogue Output Signal AO1 – IOEC2 (MotorSpeed) - Example
MSAI5150 ACS1000 91/389

Group 16 SYST CTRL INPUT
16 SYST CTRL INPUT

Figure 16 1 Process Stop - Overview
After a process stop command is given, the drive is stopping according to the following steps:
RAMP STOP MODE:

Motor is ramped down below Parameter 20.3 STOP DRIVE TUBE according selected
PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par. 22.06) => torque is set to zero => flux is ramped down to 20%
=> machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector. During ramp down “RAMP STOP
SUPERVISION” is activated (see Par. 21.05 Process Stop Speed Difference).
TORQ STOP MODE:

PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par. 22.06) and SHAPE TIME (Par. 22.07) are set to zero (internal
by SW) => motor is ramped down with maximal allowed braking current or the maximum
allowed DC voltage
COAST STOP MODE:

Torque is set to zero => drive is running with zero torque until the actual motor speed is below
self excitation speed (deceleration time has no influence) => flux is ramped down to 20% =>
machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector

ABB
Motor Ctrl Mode
99.13
D=1 SCALAR
Process Stop
Mode
21.03 Process Stop MCB Ctrl
DTC if "SCALAR" - mode is selected,
21.04
stop mode is fix ed to
Process Stop "RAMP STOP"
0 Trip 1b
16.01 n =0 MCB Opening
Process Stop
NOT USED RAMP STOP
& "Fault"
1 1
1 Trip 1a
DI8 - IOEC2 2 2 TORQ STOP MCB Stay Closed
-1 >
Process Stop
COMM.MOD ULE 3 3 COAST STOP & "Alarm"
(7.06 - Bit12)
"0" = Process Stop active

"1" = Process Stop inactive
Process Stop Ramp RAMP STOP MODE TORQ STOP MODE COAST STOP MODE
n n n
22.06 (rpm) (rpm) (rpm)
nself nself nself
Par.: 22.06 t (s) t (s) t (s)
nself = self excitation speed set deceleration and

shape time to "zero"
RAMP FUNCTION
Process Stop Speed RAMP STOP SUPERVISION

Difference n speed difference limit
21.05 (rpm) Par.: 21.05
ramp stop faile d => go to "COAST STOP MODE"

nself
t (s)
Figure 16 1 Process Stop - Overview
16.01 Process Stop

This parameter selects the source of the PROCESS STOP (run enable) signal.
Note!
The selection comm. module may not be used at a follower drive, because the process stop bit is never
set in the follower control word par. 7.07.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT USED 1
DI8-IO2 2
COMM.MODULE 3
COMM.CH4 4
MSAI5150 ACS1000 93/389

16.02 Parameter Lock
Using the “PARAMETER LOCK” parameter can inhibit unauthorised parameter changes via control
panel CDP 312 or DrivesWindow.
NAME VALUE MEANING
LOCKED 0
OPEN 1
16.03 Passcode
This parameter selects the pass code for the Parameter Lock. The default value of this parameter is 0.
In order to open the Parameter Lock changes the value to 358. After the Parameter Lock is opened the
value is automatically changed back to 0.
16.04 FaultResetSel
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of
the fault is no longer exists.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 KEYPAD Fault reset is executed from the control panel keypad only (RESET -
Key).
2 DI12 – IO2 Control Panel in REMOTE – Mode:Reset is activated by a rising
(positive) edge of the digital input signal DI12 - IOEC2.Control Panel
in LOCAL – Mode:Reset is activated by control panel keypad (RESET
- Key)
3 ON STOP Control Panel in REMOTE – Mode:Fault reset is executed along with
the stop signal. Control Panel in LOCAL – Mode:Fault reset is
executed along with the stop signal or from control panel keypad
(RESET - Key)
4 COMM.MODULE Control Panel in REMOTE – Mode:
5 COMM.CH4 Control Panel in REMOTE - MODE: Fault reset is executed by ACDA
(CH4)

ABB
16.05 UserMacro IO Chg
This parameter enables the selection of the desired user macro via a digital input or fieldbus control
word in the following way:
When the state of the specified digital input changes from high to low User Macro 1 is loaded. When the
state of the specified digital input changes from low to high User Macro 2 is loaded.
NOTE!
The user macro can be changed via a digital input only when the MCB is switched Off. During the
change of the macro the drive will not start.
The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting once made remains despite the
User Macro change.
Always save the user macro by parameter 99.13 after changing any parameter settings. The last
settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again (see
also Par. 99.13 APPLICATION MACRO)
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT SEL User macro change is not possible via digital input or field bus.
2 DI1 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded.Rising edge of
digital input: User macro 2 is loaded.
8 COMM.MODULE Falling edge of ACW1 – Bit 04: User macro 1 is loaded into use.
Rising edge of ACW1 – Bit 04: User macro 2 is loaded into use.
16.06 OldUserPasscode
This parameter authorises the setting of a new pass code for the Parameter Lock. After the
OldUserPasscode is opened the value is automatically changed back to 0.
16.07 NewUserPasscode
This parameter selects the new pass code for the Parameter Lock and stores it into the flash. After the
NewUserPasscode is set, the value is automatically changed back to 0.
16.08 FBA EmergeBitCtrl
This parameter is used to activate (or de-activate) bit number B01 & B02 of FBA Control Word (CH0)
if selected. If the parameter is set to DISABLED, the signals are set internally to constant 1.
NOTE! This parameter is only active if FBA communication module is used (parameter 75.04 FBA
CommModule is set to DSET1 R/W or DSET10 R/W).
NAME VALUE MEANING

DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:
MSAI5150 ACS1000 95/389

Group 17 UTILITIES
17 UTILITIES
Group 17 allows the monitoring of several internal values.
17.01 ProbeVariable
(161.26) Parameter 17.01 is used to choose one of the available entities.
Parameter 17.02, 17.03, 17.04 change their meaning depending on what is chosen in parameter 17.01.
For DriveWindow users, this means that after changing parameter 17.01 the complete parameter list
should be uploaded again. Otherwise, the name of parameters 17.02 - 17.04 and possibly the Unit
name will not be correct, even though the displayed numbers are correct.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 InvCurrent U
1 InvCurrent V
2 InvCurrent W
3 FilCurrent U
4 FilCurrent V
5 FilCurrent W
6 MotCurrent U
7 MotCurrent V
8 MotCurrent W
9 GndCurrent
10 StaCurrent X
11 StaCurrent Y
12 InvVoltage X
13 InvVoltage Y
14 FilVoltage X
15 FilVoltage Y
16 DCVoltage 1
17 DCVoltage 2
18 DCVoltageTot
19 DCVoltageDif
Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 19 Def: 0 Int. scaling:
17.02 InverterCurrent U ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.27) Displays the average (DC) value of the entity chosen. The time constant to separate it from the AC part
is about 3 seconds.
Unit: x DC Type: NoType Int. scaling: 1 = 1 xx DC
17.03 Inverter Current U ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(161.28) Displays the true-RMS value of the AC part of the entity. To separate AC from DC the same time
constant as for 17.02 is used. To build the average value, a time constant of about 100 ms is used.
Unit: x AC Type: NoType Int. scaling: 1 = 1 xx AC

ABB
Group 18 PROCESS SPEED
18 PROCESS SPEED
This parameter can be altered while the ACS1000 running.
Figure 18-1 Process Speed - Overview
18.01 Scale
This parameter matches the process speed to the motor speed. The value of this parameter
corresponds to the greater one of the absolute value defined by parameter 20.01 and 20.02, maximum
speed and minimum speed. The process speed is displayed with one decimal. When the value of this
parameter is set to 1, the possible values of the process speed display are 0.1, 0.2, 0.3…0.9, 1.0. The
value 1.0 corresponds to, for example, 1500rpm, if it is set at the maximum speed, and the absolute
value of the minimum speed is smaller.
Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 100000 Def: 100 Int. scaling:1 == 1
18.02 Unit
Selection of the Unit of the process speed.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 1
rpm 2
% 3
m/s 4
Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1 xx
MSAI5150 ACS1000 97/389

Figure 18 2 Process Speed Selection - Example

ABB
Group 19 DATA STORTRANSF
19.01 Data 1
Parameter setting or reading from the overriding system. Example:Signal from the Dataset 18 Index 3 is
required for the trending measurement in the DriveWindow tool. Set parameter 90.15 DATASET 18 VAL
3 to the value 1901 (group19 + index 01). Assign parameter 19.01 DATA 1 to the selected trending
channel in DriveWindow.
Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int. scaling:1 == 1
19.02 Data 2
See 19.01 DATA 1
19.03 Data 3
See 19.01 DATA 1
19.04 Data 4
See 19.01 DATA 1
19.05 Data 5
See 19.01 DATA 1
19.06 Data 6
See 19.01 DATA 1
19.07 Data 7
See 19.01 DATA 1
19.08 Data 8
See 19.01 DATA 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 99/389

19.20 Par2Par AssignNo1
This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 1
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par. 19.24 has no function.
USED
DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter.
MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter
19.22 PAR ASSIGN1 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.
DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19.22
PAR ASSIGN1 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.
Par2ParAssignNo1
19.20
ParAssign1
Read Parameter
ParAssign1ReadPar NOT USED
19.21 Group & Index
ParAssign1 Read Value (PA1RV) DIRECT ParAssign1Wr iteValue
Output ParAssign1 Sc aled Value (PA1SV)
MULT 19.23
R1 DIV
MUL
(R1*R2)
ParAssign1 Scale ParAssign1
19.22 R2 Wr ite Parameter
Input
ParAssign1WritePar
R1 19.24 Group & Index
DIV
(R1:R2)
R2
Figure 19-2 Data transfer function - overview
Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. scaling:
19.21 ParAssign1 ReadPar

A signal is assigned to ParAssign1 Read Value (PA1RV) by setting parameter 19.21 to the
parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. The format is (x)xyy,
where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:If Par. 19.21 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal
PA1RV.
19.22 ParAssign1 Scale [Scal]

This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA1RV . If parameter is set to 10, the PA1RV signal
will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19.20) by 10 and sent to ParAssign1
Scaled Value (PA1SV).
Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int. scaling:
19.23 ParAssign1WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign1 Write Value (PA1WV).
Unit: Scal Type: R Int. scaling:
19.24 ParAssign1WritePar
Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA1WV is sent. The format
is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:If Par. 19.24 is set to “2202” the value of PA1WV is sent to parameter 22.02
ACCEL TIME 1.

ABB
This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 2 (see Figure 19-2).
NAME VALUE MEANING
USED

Example:
If Par. 19.26 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA2RV.


ACCEL TIME 1.

NAME VALUE MEANING
USED
MSAI5150 ACS1000 101/389

PA3RV.


ACCEL TIME 1.

NAME VALUE MEANING
USED

PA4RV.


ABB
ACCEL TIME 1.

NAME VALUE MEANING
USED

PA5RV.


ACCEL TIME 1.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 103/389

NAME VALUE MEANING
USED

PA6RV.


ACCEL TIME 1.

NAME VALUE MEANING
USED

ABB
PA7RV.


ACCEL TIME 1.

NAME VALUE MEANING
USED

PA8RV.

MSAI5150 ACS1000 105/389

ACCEL TIME 1.

ABB
Group 20 LIMITS
20 LIMITS
This parameter group defines the maximum and minimum limits for speed, frequency, current and
torque algorithms.
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED [rpm]

Negative speed reference limit in rpm.(see Figure 23-1) For step-up transformer option: if parameter
132.23 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the minimum speed is limited according to that minimum starting
frequency for step-up.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: -20000 rpm Max: Par. Def: -1100 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 01
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED [rpm]

Positive speed reference limit in rpm. (see Figure 23-1)
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Par. 20.01 Max: Def: 1100 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
18000rpm 01
20.03 ZEROSPEED LIMIT [rpm]

The absolute speed value at which the drive coasts after a stop command. For step-up transformer
option: if parameter 132.22 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the ‘stop drive tube’ speed is limited
according to that minimum starting frequency for step-up.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: Par. Def: 10 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 01
20.04 USER MAX MOT CUR [%]

Maximum output current in A of the motor nominal current.
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: 100 Int. scaling:10 == 1 %
i_pullout
20.05 MAXIMUM TORQUE [%]

Maximum positive output torque as a % of the motor nominal torque. (see Figure 26-1)
Figure
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1,2 Int. scaling:100 == 1 %
MSAI5150 ACS1000 107/389

20.06 MINIMUM TORQUE [%]
Minimum negative output torque as a % of the motor nominal torque. (see Figure 26-1)
Unit: % Type: R Min: -3 Max: 0 Def: -1,2 Int. scaling:100 == 1 %
20.07 SPC TORQ MAX [%]

Maximum limit at the output of the speed controller as a % of the motor nominal torque. (see Figure 24-
1)
20.08 SPC TORQ MIN [%]

Minimum limit at the output of the speed controller as a % of the motor nominal torque. (see Figure 24-
1)
20.09 TREF TORQ MAX [%]

Maximum torque reference as a % of the motor nominal torque for external torque ref. (see Figure 25-1)
20.10 TREF TORQ MIN [%]

Minimum torque reference as a % of the motor nominal torque for external torque ref. (see Figure 25-1)
20.11 OVERSPEED LIMIT [rpm]

The purpose of this parameter is to protect the process against an overspeed condition by supervising
the stator frequency. It is recommended to set the trip margin to a value higher than 3 % of the nominal
frequency, because the slip frequency and the jitter of the actual frequency have to be taken into
account. Otherwise overspeed trips could occur. For a speed supervision with a smaller margin use
‘Group 32 Limit Supervision’ (slip already taken into account in actual value and actual value stronger
filtered).This parameter defines together with parameters SPEEDMAX and SPEEDMIN (FREQ MAX
and FREQ MIN in the scalar control mode) the maximum allowed frequency of the drive. If this
frequency is reached, the trip OVER SPEED FAULT is activated. The overspeed is calculated as
follows: overfreq. limit [Hz] = max. speed [Hz] + Trip Margin [Hz] overfreq. limit [Hz] = 20.02 [Hz] + 20.11
[Hz], where 20.02 [Hz] = (20.02 [rpm] * rated_frequency [Hz]) / (synchronous_speed [rpm]) Example: A
rated speed of 1780 rpm corresponds to a synchronous speed of 1800 rpm: 20.02 [Hz] = 20.02 [rpm] *
60 [Hz] / 1800 [rpm] = 59.33 [Hz] overfreq. limit = 59.33 Hz + 2 Hz = 61.33 Hz
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Hz Max: 200 Hz Def: 200 Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
20.13 USER MAX GEN CUR [%]

Maximum output current in generator mode in % of the motor nominal current.
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0% Max: 100% Def: 120% Int. scaling:10==1%
20.14 MaxFreqMargin [%]

This margin is used to automatically preset par. 20.01 and 20.02 after entering the motor nominal speed
or after setting 20.16 FreqLimInit to NO.

ABB
20.15 FreqTripMargin [%]
The purpose of this parameter is to protect the process against an overspeed condition by supervising the stator
frequency.
It is recommended to set the trip margin to a value higher than 3 % of the nominal frequency, because the slip
frequency have to be taken into account. Otherwise overspeed trips could occur.
For a speed supervision with a smaller margin use Group 32 Limit Supervision (slip already taken into
account in actual value and actual value stronger filtered).
This parameter defines together with parameters SPEEDMAX and SPEEDMIN (FREQ MAX and FREQ MIN in
the scalar control mode) the maximum allowed frequency of the drive. If this frequency is reached, the trip
OVER SPEED FAULT is activated.
The overspeed is calculated as follows:

overfreq. limit [Hz] = max. speed [Hz] * Trip Margin (%)
overfreq. limit [Hz] = 20.02 [Hz] + 20.11 [Hz],
where 20.02 [Hz] = (20.02 [rpm]*rated_frequency [Hz] /(synchronous_speed [rpm])
Figure 20-1 Freq. Trip Margin - Diagram
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 20 Def: 10 Int. scaling:10 == 1%
20.16 FreqLimInit
After setting the motor nominal values the frequency and speed limits are calculated and preset.This
parameter indicate whether the initialization of these limits has been done.To automatically recalulate
the limits after changing the nomimal motor parameters, this parameter can be set to NO
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 0
YES 1
Unit: % Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1
20.17 ZeroSpeedDetect
Selection of zero speed detection function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 ENCODER Zero speed detection is activated if actual speed is below parameter
20.03 ZEROSPEED LIMIT.
-1 MODULATING Zero speed detection is activated by COAST STOP or EMERGENCY
OFF as soon as inverter stops modulating (independently of actual
speed).
Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
MSAI5150 ACS1000 109/389

Group 21 START/STOP/MCB
21 START/STOP/MCB
Selection of Start / Stop and MCB functions. The parameters marked with (O) can only be altered
while the ACS1000 is stopped.
21.01 START FUNCTION

(131.01) Selection of the start function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 RES FREQ MEA Special start mode. Contact ABB Service for advise.
2 SCALAR FLY Flying start function for rotating machines will be used.
3 SCALARDIRECT Start mode for step-up trafo application. No flying start processed.
STOP FUNCTION
After a stop command is given, the drive is stopping according to the following steps:
RAMP STOP MODE:

Motor is ramped down below Parameter 20.3 STOP DRIVE TUBE according selected DECELERATION RAMP (Par.
22.01, 22.03 22.05) Þ torque is set to zero Þ flux is ramped down to 20% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage
vector. During ramp down “ramp stop supervision” is activated (see Par. 21.05 Process Stop Speed Difference).
TORQ STOP MODE:

DECELERATION RAMP (Par.: 22.03 22.05) and SHAPE TIME (Par. 22.07) are set to zero (intern by SW) Þ motor is
ramped down with maximal allowed braking current or the maximum allowed DC voltage
COAST STOP MODE:

torque is set to zero Þ drive is running with zero torque until the actual motor speed is below self excitation speed
(deceleration time has no influence) Þ flux is ramped down to 20% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector
Motor Ctrl Mode
99.13 if "SCALAR" - mode is selected,
stop mode is fixed to
D=1 SCALAR "RAMP STOP"
KEYPAD
STOP
CONTROL
Stop Function DTC
21.02 1 RAMP STOP
IOEC 2: DI 1...6 Command to "STOP" 2 TORQ STOP
3 COAST STOP
Comm. Module
RAMP STOP MODE TORQ STOP MODE RAMP FUNCTION COAST STOP MODE
n n n
(rpm) (rpm) (rpm)
nself nself nself
Dec. Time t (s) t (s) t(
set deceleration and nself = self excit ation speed

Figure 21 1 Stop Function - Overview

ABB
21.02 Stop Function
Selection of stop function. If SCALAR mode is selected, only STOP RAMPING is possible. The
parameter itself will be write protected.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP RAMPNG stop by the deceleration ramp DECEL TIME (22.02)
2 STOP TORQ stop by the torque limit
3 COAST STOP stop with zero torque
MSAI5150 ACS1000 111/389

PROCESS STOP FUNCTION
After a process stop command is given, the drive is stopping according to the following steps:
RAMP STOP MODE:

motor is ramped down below Parameter 20.3 STOP DRIVE TUBE according selected PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par.
22.06) Þ torque is set to zero Þ flux is ramped down to 10% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector. During
ramp down “ramp stop supervision” is activated (see Par. 21.05 Process Stop Speed Difference).
TORQ STOP MODE:

PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par. 22.06) and SHAPE TIME (Par. 22.07) are set to zero (intern by SW) Þ motor is ramped
down with maximal allowed braking current or the maximum allowed DC voltage
COAST STOP MODE:

torque is set to zero Þ drive is running with zero torque until the actual motor speed is below self excitation speed
(deceleration time has no influence) Þ flux is ramped down to 10% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector
Motor Ctrl Mode
99.13
D=1 SCALAR
Process Stop
Mode
21.03 Process Stop MCB Ctrl
DTC if "SCALAR" - mode is selected,
21.04
stop mode is fix ed to
Process Stop "RAMP STOP"
0 Trip 1 b
16.01 n =0 MCB Opening
Process Stop
NOT USED RAMP STOP
& "Fault"
1 1
1 Trip 1 a
DI8 - IOEC2 2 2 TORQ STOP MCB Stay Closed
-1 >
Process Stop
COMM.MOD ULE 3 3 COAST STOP & "Alarm"
(7.06 - Bit12)
"0" = Process Stop active

"1" = Process Stop inactive
Process Stop Ramp RAMP STOP MODE TORQ STOP MODE COAST STOP MODE
n n n
22.06 (rpm) (rpm) (rpm)
nself nself nself
Par.: 22.06 t (s) t (s) t (s)
nself = self excitation speed set deceleration and

RAMP FUNCTION
Process Stop Speed RAMP STOP SUPERVISION

Difference n speed difference limit
21.05 (rpm) Par.: 21.05
ramp stop faile d => go to "COAST STOP MODE"

nself
t (s)
Figure 21-2 Process Stop Function - Overview

ABB
21.03 ProcessStopMode
Selection of process stop function when process stop mode is active (16.01). If SCALAR mode is
selected, only “STOP RAMPING” is possible, parameter itself will be write protected and fixed set to
“STOP PAMPING” (see figure 21-2).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP RAMPNG stop by the deceleration ramp PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par. 22.06)
2 STOP TORQ stop by the torque limit
3 COAST STOP stop with zero torque
21.04 ProcessStopMCBCtrl
Selection of MCB reaction if the “Process Stop” is activated (see figure 16-1).
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OPENING after drive has stopped, the MCB will be opened
1 STAY CLOSED after drive has stopped, the MCB will not be opened
21.05 ProcessStopSpdDiff [rpm/s]

Supervises the deceleration of drive speed after a process stop command has been given. This supervision starts 5
seconds after the drive has received the process stop signal. If the drive is not able to decelerate wihin specified rate, dr ive
will be stopped by coasting and Bit 02 at AUX_STATUS_WORD 2 (PROCESS_STOP_COAST) is set to state “1”. This
function is only active if Par. 21.04 PROCESS STOP COMMAND is set to “STOP RAMP” and Par. 21.05 PROCESS STO
SPEED DIFF is > 0 rpm.
Process Ramp Stop Comman d

SPEED IXI "Process Ramp Stop" failed
rpm = > command to "Co ast Stop"
(spe ed difference outside allowed limit)
1000
750 21.05 PROCESS STOP SPEED DIFF
500
Motor Speed (Act)
250
Calcu late d
Motor Speed (Act)
t s
22.06 PROCC ES STOP RAMP
Figure 21 3 Supervision of Process Stop - Diagram
Unit: rpm/s Type: R Min: 0 rpm/s Max: 18000 Def: 10 rpm/s Int. scaling:1 = 1 rpm/s
rpm/s
MSAI5150 ACS1000 113/389

21.06 MCB OnControlMode
With this parameter the MCB ON command has to be selected (opening/closing of main circuit breaker).
If ONE signal for opening and closing is needed than this parameter has to be set to ONE SIGNAL
(dig. Output IOEC2 - DO6 is “ON” = closing command or “OFF” = opening command; dig. Output
IOEC2-DO5 is always de-energized).
If TWO separate signals, one for opening and one for closing, are needed than this parameter has to
be set to TWO SIGNALS (dig. Output IOEC2 - D05 “OFF” = opening command, dig. Output IOEC2 -
D06 “ON” = closing command; in normal operation digital Output of IOEC2 - DO5 is “ON” and dig.
Output IOEC2 - DO6 is “OFF”).
NAME VALUE MEANING
ONE SIGNAL 0
TWO SIGNALS 1
21.07 MCB FeedbackSignal

With this parameter the feedback signals of the MCB has to be selected (open/closed of main circuit
breaker).
If ONE SIGNAL is selected, only feedback signal for MCB status “CLOSED” (dig. Input IOEC2 –
DI10) is supervised.
If TWO SIGNALS is selected, feedback signal for MCB status “CLOSED” (dig. Input IOEC2 – DI10)
and feedback signal for MCB status “OPEN” (dig. Input IOEC2 – DI9) is supervised
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 ONE SIGNAL only feedback signal CLOSED is supervised
1 TWO SIGNALS both feedback signals, OPEN and CLOSED, are supervised
21.08 MCB AvailableSig

Selection of the feedback signal “MCB available” (IOEC2 - DI11). If the MCB has an available signal,
the supervision of the signal can be activated here. Normaly the available signal is used to supervise if
MCB is in test position or drawn out.
When using the feedback signal the earth isolator can only be operated when the MCB is not available
to make sure that with closed earth isolator also the input terminals are without voltage.
Note!
If this parameter is selected to LOW ACTIV, the earth isolatar can only be operated if dig. Input IOEC2 –
DI11 is ON (MCB is not available).
If this parameter is selected to HIGH ACTIV, the earth isolatar can only be operated if dig. Input IOEC2
– DI11 is OFF (MCB is not available).
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 1
LOW ACTIV 2
HIGH ACTIV 3
21.09 MCB ClosingTimeLim [s]

Maximum operating time for closing the MCB. If the MCB has not reached the closed position within this
time, a trip will be initiated. Master-Follower: the closing time limit in the master drive has to be at least 2
sec longer than in the follower drive.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 30s Def: 3 s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s
21.10 MCB OpenTimeLimit [s]

Time delay after which MCB ORD TRIP (IOEC1 - DO6) is activated, if the MCB does not open upon an
opening command.Master-Follower: the opening time limit in the master drive has to be at least 2 sec
longer than in the follower drive.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 30 s Def: 3s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s

ABB
MCB CONTROL OVERVIEW
no light =
INT - RELAIS
IOEC1 & IOEC2 -
Board DO5 / DO6
OFF
LWL "MCB Off"
(light on = no trip)
PPCS-Lin k
no light =
Signal = " 0 "
AMC3 LWL LWL

Converter Converter
D05
Heater & / Motor Heater

Control
D06
& / MCB Trip
Par.: 5.01
DO1-6 Status IOEC1 IOEC1
LWL
Converter
MCB
D05
Control
& / MCB Open
D06
& MCB Close
Par.: 5.02
DO1-6 Status IOEC2
IOEC2
Figure 21-4 LWL “MCB OFF” – Signal of IOEC1 2 - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 115/389

BACKSPIN LOCKOUT FUNCTION
If the motor is stopped or tripped it is accelerated in the other direction due to back flowing fluid.
If the pump/motor is started while driven in the wrong direction, the motor can be seriously damaged. Therefore, a
restart has to be prevented and a start inhibition must be active until the motor has stopped completely.
If this function is needed, the backspin lockout time has to be measured during commissioning and entered in
parameter 21.12 Backspin Lockout Time.
n Pump
rpm Stop
Command Stopped
Par.: 21.12
Backspin Lockout Time
Start inhibited
0 t s
Backspi n Lockout active Backspin Lockout not acti ve

Stopping
(ASW1 - Bit 8 = "1") (AS W1 - Bit 8 = "0")
Figure 21- 5 Backspin Lockout Function - Overview
21.11 BackspinLockFunc
This parameter activates the backspin lockout function. If lockout is active, a start command will be
ignored (Start inhibition is active). ASW1 – Bit08 (Backspin Lockout Act) will be set during a pending
lockout and drive status shows “Lockout Act”
Note!
This parameter can not be changed during an active lockout.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF No action, backspin lockout function is not used.
1 ON Backspin lockout function is active.
21.12 BackspinLockTime [s]

This parameter defines the start inhibition delay time. If this parameter setting is overwritten during
active lockout time, the new time will only be taken after the next stop. The former parameter setting is
still valid for the actual pending lockout.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 7200 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1s
21.13 BackspinLockReset
With this parameter an active lockout can be reset.
Note!
This parameter can only be set from service.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Backspin lockout, reset is not active
1 ON Backspin lockout, lockout (time) will be reset
21.14 SFLY BACKWARD EN

Selection of the backward search function for flying start. This parameter has to be set to ON if the drive
may be started into a rotating machine with negative speed. The flying start function is selected with
parameter 21.01.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF backward search is not active
1 ON backward search is active

ABB
21.15 CoastStopTrqLim
Selection of coast stop torque limit function.
If this function is enabled, the torque limiters are ramped down to the values in parameter 21.16 and
21.17 once the coast stop command is given and only provides torque within this band to decelerate
below self-excitation speed. Once stop has finished, the torque limiters are again set to the value as
they have been before the stop command was given.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DISABLED Function is disabled
1 ENABLED Function is enabled
21.16 CoastStopMaxTrq
Maximum allowed torque to which the torque limiters is ramped during coast stop
Unit: % Type: R Min: -100% Max: 100% Def: 3% Int. scaling:1 == 1 %
21.17 CoastStopMinTrq
Minimum allowed torque to which the torque limiters is ramped during coast stop
Unit: % Type: R Min: -100% Max: 100% Def: -3% Int. scaling:1 == 1 %
MSAI5150 ACS1000 117/389

Group 22 RAMP FUNCTIONS
22 RAMP FUNCTIONS
Speed reference ramp functions.
Figure 22-1 Ramp Function Generator - Overview
22.01 Acc/Dec 1/2 Sel

This parameter selects the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp pair in use. The selection can be performed
through digital inputs. If digital inputs are selected it is possible to switch over from ACC1/DEC1 to
ACC/DEC2 (0V DC on DIx – IOEC2 = Acceleration ramp 1 and deceleration ramp 1 are used, 24V DC
on DIx – IOEC2 = Acceleration ramp 2 and deceleration ramp 2 are used).
NAME VALUE MEANING
ACC/DEC 1 1
ACC/DEC 2 2
DI1 – IO2 3
DI2 – IO2 4
DI3 – IO2 5
DI4 – IO2 6
DI5 – IO2 7
DI6 – IO2 8
22.02 AccelTime 1 [s]

The time required for the speed to change from 0 to maximum speed. The maximum speed is defined
with parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the limit is
greater than the maximum limit.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 2000 s Def: 20s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s

ABB
22.03 DecelTime 1 [s]
The time required for the speed to change from maximum speed to zero. The maximum speed is
defined with parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of
the limit is greater than the maximum limit.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 2000s Def: 20s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s
22.04 AccelTime 2 [s]

The time required for the speed to change from 0 to the maximum speed. The maximum speed is
defined with parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of
22.05 DecelTime 2 [s]

The time required for the speed to change from maximum speed to zero. The maximum speed is
defined with parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of
22.06 ProcessStopRamp [s]

If process stop is activated and parameter PROCESS STOP MODE 21.03 is set to STOP RAMPING,
the drive starts to decelerating according to this parameter value. The time required for the speed to
change from maximum speed to zero.
22.07 ShapeTime [s]

Speed reference-softening time. Function is deactivated during the emergency stop and process stop.
Figure 22 2 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramp Shape - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 119/389

22.08 VARIABLESLOPE SEL
This function is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. The time
t for step A is defined by parameter 22.09 VAR SLOPE RATE. Example:Overriding system transmits the
speed reference with his own interval time. To get a straight line on SPEED REF3 the VAR SLOPE
FUNCTION can be used. In this case the Par. 22.09 has to be increased until SPEED REF 3 is a
straight line.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Function is disabled.
1 ON Variable slope is enabled and the slope rate is defined by parameter VARIABLE
SLOPE RATE 22.07.
Figure 22-3 Variable Slope Ramp - Diagram
22.09 VAR SLOPE RATE [ms]

Speed ramp time t for the speed reference change A, when parameter 22.08 VARIABLE SLOPE is ON.
22.10 EStopRampTime
Deceleration time for speed ramp function if MCW-B2 (OFF_3_N) is set to "0" (emergency stop function
active).
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1800 Def: 20 Int. scaling:100 == 1
22.11 EStopSpeedDiff
Monitors the deceleration of drive speed after an EMERGENCY STOP command has been given. This monitoring starts few
seconds after the drive has received the emergency stop signal. If the drive is not able to decelerate within specified rate,
drive will be tripped and an EMERGENCY OFF will be initiated
This function is only active if parameter is set > 0 rpm.

Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2000 Def: 10 Int. scaling:10 == 1rpm

ABB
Group 23 SPEED REFERENCE
23 SPEED REFERENCE
Speed reference functions.
LOCAL / REMOTE
ACCELER ATION
LI MITER COMPENSATION
LOCAL REF TORQ ACC COMP REF

3.07
REMOTE REF
24.15 AC C COM P DER TIME

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
24.16 AC C COMP FILT TIM E
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
SETPOINT
LIMITER W EIGHTING
SPEED REF
23.01
+
SPEED SH ARE x _
23.05
24.06 SET P W EIGHTING
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
24.07 SET POINT WEIGHT
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
ACC / DEC / SHAPE

23.04 + LI MITER
SPEED CORRECTI ON
MCW -B8, B9
MCW -B4 +
SPEED REF2 INCHING SPEED1 _
MCW -B6 SPEED REF4
3.01 23.02
INCHING SPEED2 SPEED REF3 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
+
RAMP
23.03 3.02
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED ACTUAL
SPEED
0
MCW -B5 HOLD
0
DROOP RATE
22.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 24.01
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1

FILTER WIN DOW CTRL
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 -
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 +

x
22.06 PROCESS STOP RAMP (-1)
23.07 WINDOW SEL ON
22.07 RAMP SHAPE TIME
23.06 SPEED ERROR FILTER TIM E 23.08 WINDOW INTEG ON
22.08 VARIABLE SLOPE
23.09 WINDOW WID TH POS
22.09 VARIABLE SLOPE RATE
23.10 WINDOW WID TH NEG
ACW 1-B2 RAMP BYPASS
ACW 1-B3 BAL RAMP OUT

SPEED STEP
Process Stop
(D I / OCW-B12)
PROCESS STOP RAMP ACTIVE 23.11 +
SPEED ERROR NEG
dV/dt 3.17 3.03
Figure 23-1 Speed Reference Chain - Overview
23.01 SPEED REF [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive.
23.02 InchingSpeed 1 [rpm]

Inching speed reference to replace the parameter 23.01 SPEED REF, when OVERR CTRL WORD 7.01
bit 8 is in state TRUE.
Unit: rpm Type: I Min: -18000 rpm Max: Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
18000rpm 01
MSAI5150 ACS1000 121/389

23.03 InchingSpeed 2 [rpm]
Inching speed reference to replace the parameter 23.01 SPEED REF, when OVERR CTRL WORD 7.01
bit 9 is in state TRUE
Unit: rpm Type: I Min: -18000 rpm Max: Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
18000rpm 01
23.04 SPEED CORRECTION [rpm]

This parameter value can be added to the filtered reference value.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Par. 20.01 Max: Par. Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 01
23.05 SPEED SHARE [%]

Speed reference share coefficient.
23.06 SPEED ERROR FILT [ms]

Speed reference and actual error filter time.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 ms Max: 999999 Def: 0 ms Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms
ms
WINDOW CONTROL
When window control is used, normally parameter 26.01 TORQUE SELECTOR = ADD. Window control mode can be
selected by a signal from the fieldbus via AUX CTRL WORD 1 (7.02 – Bit7) or by parameter 23.07 WINDOW SEL ON.
The size of the window (in window control mode) is determined by parameters 23.09 WINDOW WIDTH POS or 23.10
WINDOW WIDTH NEG (rpm).
When running with window control, the speed controller output is zero if speed error is less than number in WINDOW
WITH parameters. If speed error is larger than the number in WINDOW WIDTH, the speed controller output, TORQ
REF2 (3.09) is added to the torque reference. In AUX STATUS WORD 1 (8.02-Bit1) it is shown when speed error is
greater than or less than the WINDOW WIDTH value. Pay attention to the speed controller output limits, 20.07 SPC
TORQMAX and 20.08 SPC TORQMIN and to how much it has adapted to correct the torque reference.
When the window control is enabled, the integrator of the speed controller can be released or blocked by parameter
23.08 WINDOW INTG ON. When 23.08 = OFF, the window control works only as a P-controller.
Figure 23-2 Window Control, Effect of Load Change on a Torque Controlled Drive - Diagram

ABB
23.07 WindowSelectOn
The speed controller is deactivated as long as the speed deviation remains within determined limits,
which allows the torque reference to affect the process directly.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Function is disabled.
1 ON Speed controller is activated if the speed is outside the specified range
(parameter 23.09 and 23.10)
23.08 WINDOW INTG ON

The idea of Window control is to deactivate the speed controller as long as the speed deviation remains
within the window set by Parameters 23.09 WINDOW WIDTH POS and 23.10 WINDOW WIDTH NEG.
This allows the external torque reference to affect the process directly. For example, in Master/Follower
drives, where the follower is torque controlled, window control is used to keep the speed deviation of the
follower under control. The speed error output to the speed controller is zero, when the speed error is
within the window. If the load of the follower disappears due to a disturbance in the process, the speed
error will be outside of the window. The speed controller reacts and its output is added to the torque
reference. Speed control brings the speed difference back into the window. This function could be called
overspeed or underspeed protection in the torque control mode.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Integrator of speed controller is blocked when window control is on
1 ON Integrator of speed controller is released when window control is on
23.09 WINDOW WIDTH POS [rpm]

Positive limit for the window control.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: See Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 01
23.10 WINDOW WIDTH NEG [rpm]

Negative limit for the window control. The maximum limit is the absolute value of parameter 23.09.
WINDOW WIDTH POS.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: See Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 01
23.11 SPEED STEP [rpm]

An additional speed step value can be given to the speed controller directly as additive error input. The
total speed reference is limited by the parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED and 20.01 MINIMUM
SPEED (SPEED STEP max = MAXIMUM SPEED - SPEED REF - SPEED CORRECTION).Note!If the
overriding system or AMC application itself sends a reference value to SPEED STEP, the value of 23.11
must be set to zero before the stop command of the drive is given, otherwise the drive will keep running
with the speed step value.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Par. 20.01 Max: Par. Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 01
MSAI5150 ACS1000 123/389

STEP RESPONSE TEST
Manual tuning of the speed controller:
The step-response based tuning of the speed controller can be done with DriveWindow tool. Values for the steps can
also be defined with DriveWindow. For stepping up enter a positive value and for stepping down a negative value.
For monitoring the speed response the following signals can be selected on the display:
1.08 MOTOR TORQUE FILT, actual torque
1.02 SPEED SPEED , actual speed
3.03 SPEED ERROR NEG , filtered speed difference
Note: If the drive needs very fast response times a sample interval time shorter than 5ms are required. Use Data
Logger tool instead of Monitoring tool.
The parameter 23.11 SPEED STEP is used in step response tests. Steps of 1% or 2% of the nominal speed are set.
Bigger steps can also be used depending on the dynamic demands of the application. The value 20 corresponds to 20
rpm. Since a step given from DriveWindow is an absolute value, it must be proportional to the maximum speed of drive.
Increase the integral time constant parameter, 24.08 TIS, to a high value so that its effect is small. First, a step up is
given, e.g. 23.11 SPEED STEP = 20rpm. Then, when the speed is stabilised, a step down, e.g. 23.11 SPEED STEP = -
20rpm, is given.
The relative gain 24.03 KPS is increased until the response is sufficient.
The integral time constant 24.08 TIS is reduced until overshoot is observed in the response. The integral time constant
is then adjusted such that there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot (depending on the drive application). The
function of the integral part is to remove as quickly as possible the difference between reference and the actual value
caused by the proportional control.
If the drive is stable and allows a high proportional gain, the integral time constant can be set short and an
overcompensated step response is obtained. If the drive goes to torque limit during a step, a further compensation of
the response should be attempted.
Figure 23-3 Speed Control, Step Response - Diagram

ABB
Group 24 SPEED CONTROL
24 SPEED CONTROL
Figure 24-1 Speed Controller - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 125/389

Figure 24-2 Speed Controller, Set Point Weighting - Overview
24.01 DROOP RATE [%]

The amount of speed decrease caused by the load, i.e. drooping, is determined by means of this
parameter. Drooping is used in drives where a mechanical connection is not strong enough to enable
the use of torque control. Avoid using drooping in drives where speed accuracy is important to the
process. Example: If Droop Rate =10%, then, with the torque reference at 100%, the speed will
decrease by 1% when calculated from the rated speed.
Figure 24 3 Drooping as a Function of Torque Reference - Diagram

ABB
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL AS A FUNCTION OF TORQUE REFERENCE
The adaptive gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out disturbances, which are caused by e.g. low load and
backlash. Moderate filtering of speed error by parameter 23.06 SPEED ERR FILT TIME is typically not sufficient to
tune the drive.
Parameter 24.03 KPS MIN and 24.04 KPS WEAK POINT are used to determine the proportional gain through control
output after the torque limit function. When the output is zero, 24.02 KPS MIN is the proportional gain of the controller.
When the output exceeds the value of parameter 24.04 KPS WEAK POINT, the proportional gain is determined by the
parameter 24.02 KPS. The rate of change of the proportional gain can be smoothed by means of parameter 24.05
KPS WP FILT TIME. This parameter is a low-pass filter expressed in milliseconds.
Figure 24 4 Adaptive Speed Control as a Function of Torque Reference - Diagram
24.02 KPS [relat]

Relative gain for the speed controller. If the value 1 is selected, a 10% change in error value (e.g.
reference - actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by 10%.
24.03 KPS MIN [relat]

KPS MIN determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output is zero.
24.04 KPS WEAKPOINT [%]

The value of the speed controller output, where the gain is KPS
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 0,5 Def: 0 Int. scaling:100 == 1 %
24.05 KPS WP FILT TIME [ms]

The rate of the change of the proportional gain can be smoothened by means of this parameter.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0ms Max: 999999 Def: 100 ms Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms
ms
MSAI5150 ACS1000 127/389

SET POINT WEIGHTING
Set point weighting is a control method to improve the response of the speed controller to set point changes.
If enabled (see parameter 24.06) and adjusted correctly (see parameter 24.07), the weighting function prevents the
controller output from overshooting by weighting the set point with an adjustable factor (b in Block Diagram) before the
actual value is subtracted from it (see block diagram). The factor (set in %) only affects the p-term of the control
algorithm; the integral and derivative terms are normally weighted by a factor of 1.
Therefore, the controller works normally in steady-state operation and corrects actual speed deviations from the set
point to zero. If the function is enabled and the weighting factor is set to a value < 1, the speed controller does not
follow strictly preset ramps anymore. For applications requiring the speed controller to follow preset ramps without
delay, it is recommended to use the function Acceleration Compensation (see parameter 24.14 and 24.15).
Figure 24 5 Speed Controller, Set Point Weighting - Overview
24.06 SETPOINT SEL

Set Point Weighing is enabled by this parameter. The change over is bumbles, which means that
weighting can be changed on-line
NAME VALUE MEANING
OFF 0
ON 1
24.07 SETPOINT W GAIN [%]

The value of the speed controller output, where the gain is KPS
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0,3 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 %
24.08 TIS [s]

Integration time for the speed controller. Defines the time in which the maximum output is achieved if a
constant error value exists and the relative gain of the speed controller is 1.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 1000s Def: 2.5 s Int. scaling:1000 == 1 s
24.10 ANTIWINDUP ENA

The integrator of the speed controller can be forced to a certain value by setting this parameter to ON. If
BAL is set to ON and the signal BAL_NCONT is available the integrator uses the value at BAL REF
(see Figure 24-1). Forcing the integrator does not influence the P-term.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF integrator in not forced
1 ON integrator is forced
24.11 BAL REF [%]

External value for the integral part of the speed controller when external setting BAL is used.
Unit: % Type: R Min: -4 Max: 4 Def: 0 Int. scaling:100 == 1 %

ABB
24.12 DERIVATION TIME [ms]
Derivation time for speed controller. Defines the time in which the speed controller derivatives the error
value before the output of the speed controller are changed. If set to zero the controller works as a PI
controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 ms Max: 1000 Def: 0 ms Int. scaling:10 == 1 ms
ms
24.13 DERIV FILT TIME [ms]

The derivative filter time constant.
ms
INERTIA COMPENSATION
Inertia compensation torque can be calculated in the inverter when the time for derivative function is given. The
acceleration compensator gives an additional torque reference (3.07) relative to parameter 24.15 ACC COMP DER
TIME. If inertia changes during the process, the calculation of the inertia can be done with the overriding system, and
then the compensation torque is transmitted directly as a torque reference to address 25.04 TORQ REF B.
When an internal speed actual value is used, parameter 24.17 SLIP GAIN is also valid. Value 100 corresponds to the
rated slip of the motor. Value 0 means no slip compensation and calculated speed equals motor frequency.
Make sure that overcompensation does not occur, for example, the value of speed controller output 3.09 TORQ REF2
should not become more negative (positive) during acceleration (deceleration) than when the speed reference was
constant.
Figure 24 6 Inertia Compensation - Diagram
24.14 ACC COMP DER TIME [s]

Derivation time used for compensation during acceleration. In order to compensate inertia during
acceleration the derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. If parameter
24.15 is set to zero, the function is not activated.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 100 s Def: 0 s Int. scaling:1000 == 1s
24.15 ACC COMPFILT TIME [ms]

Acceleration compensation term filter coefficient.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: Max: 0ms Def: 8 ms Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms
999999 ms
24.16 ANTIWINDUP COEF [%]

This parameter affects only when internal speed is used as speed feedback. Gain for the slip of the
motor. 100% means full slip compensation. 0% means no slip compensation.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 129/389

ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL AS A FUNCTION OF SPEED
In certain applications it is useful to increase the relative gain and decrease the integration time at low speeds. This
improves the performance of the speed control at low speeds. The linear increase and decrease of these parameters is
started at speed KPS TIS MIN FREQ and ended at speed KPS TIS MAX FREQ. Changing the rate of relative gain and
integration time parameters is done by parameters 24.20 KPS VAL MIN FREQ and 24.21 TIS VAL MIN FREQ.
Figure 24-7 Adaptive Speed Control as a Func. of Speed - Diagram
24.17 KPS TIS MIN SPEED [rpm]

The minimum motor frequency limit above which the relative gains and integral time is defined by
parameters KPS VAL MIN FREQ and TIS VAL MIN FREQ.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Hz Max: 80 Hz Def: 2 Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
24.18 KPS TIS MAX SPEED [rpm]

The frequency point at which KPS and TIS become constant.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Hz Max: 80Hz Def: 4.7 Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
24.19 KPS VAL MIN SPEED [%]

Relative gain % of KPS value at the speed defined by parameter KPS TIS MIN FREQ.
24.20 TIS VAL MIN SPEED [%]

Relative integral time % of TIS at the speed defined by parameter KPS TIS MIN FREQ.

ABB
Group 25 TORQUE REFERENCE
25 TORQUE REFERENCE
LIMITER
TORQ REF SEL
TORQ REF A
APPL BLOCK 0 25.01
OU TPUT
03.18
1 25.02 TORQ REF A FTC
x +
TORQ REF SELECT LOAD SHARE LI MITER
25.07
25.03 TORQ REF1
3.08
RAMPING
20.09 TREF TORQMAX

TORQ REF B
20.10
25.04 + TREF TORQMIN
25.05 TORQ RAMP UP
25.06 TORQ RAMP DN
Figure 25 1 Torque Reference - Overview
t__sta_ref_vdcosc
t__sta_ref_pullout
t__sta_ref_slow
t__sta_ref_user
t__sta_ref_curr
t__sta_ref_nrot
t__sta_ref_spd
t__sta_ref_bc
Braking
Rotor User Pull-out V_dc
Current Chopper
speed torque torque oscillation
limitation duty cycle
limitation limitation limitation damping
limitation
Figure 25 2 Details of the Torque Limiting Chain
25.01 TORQUE REF A [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Torque reference. TORQUE REF A can be scaled by parameter LOAD SHARE.
25.02 TORQ REF A FTC [ms]

TORQUE REF A low pass filter time constant.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0ms Max: 60000 Def: 1000ms Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms
ms
MSAI5150 ACS1000 131/389

LOAD - SHARE CONTROL
Load sharing between master drive and slave drive is done by parameter 25.03 LOAD SHARE.
When the master and the slave are of equal size and the load is required to be equally divided, then 25.03 LOAD
SHARE is set to a constant value 100. If the operator wants to adjust the load share between the master and slave(s),
the scaling is calculated in the overriding system so that the percentage reference values means percentage of the
actual load.
NOTE!
It is possible for a slave to run at rated torque although it takes only 20% of the total load.
Example:
If the torque reference coming from the master is 100 i.e. the rated value, and LOAD SHARE = 25, the torque reference
of the slave is 25 i.e. ¼ of the rated value. This corresponds to 1/5 of the total load if the master and the slave section
motors have equal power ratings. The slave percentages sent to the drives are scaled in the control system, where the
motor size is taken into account.
The TORQUE REF A are limited by the torque limit 20.09 TREF TORQMAX and 20.10 TREF TORQMIN (see Figure
25 1).
Figure 25-3 Torque Ref1 from Torque Ref A - Diagram

ABB
25.03 LOAD SHARE [%]
TORQUE REF A scaling factor, which scales the external torque reference to a required level.
25.04 TORQUE REF B [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

TORQUE REF B is ramped by parameters TORQ RAMP UP and TORQUE RAMP DOWN. 25.04 TORQUE REF B is used
when load sharing is not needed or in case of a torque controlled single drive. Then the torque reference is transmitted fro
the overriding system. This torque reference passes through a ramp. The time of the ramp is determined by parameters
25.05 TORQ RAMP UP TIME and 25.06 TORQ RAMP DOWN TIME.The TORQUE REF B is limited by the torque limit
20.09 TREF TORQMAX and 20.10 TREF TORQMIN (see Figure 25 1).
Figure 25-4 Torque Ref1 from Torque Ref B - Diagram
25.05 TORQ RAMP UP [s]

Ramp time up parameter for TORQUE REF B.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 120s Def: 0s Int. scaling:100 == 1 s
25.06 TORQ RAMP DN [s]

Ramp time down parameter for TORQUE REF B.
25.07 TorqRefA or B Sel

This parameter defines the source of the external torque reference value.
NAME VALUE MEANING
TORQ REF A 0
TORQ REF B 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 133/389

Group 26 TORQREF HANDLING
26 TORQREF HANDLING
The torque reference can be given from the speed reference chain (TORQ REF2) or from the
torque reference chain (TORQ REF1) depending on the control mode. This group defines how
to handle the reference after the torque selector block.
TORQUE STEP
26.03
LOAD COMPENSATION
26.02 TORQUE REFERENCE
LIMITING
TORQ REF5 TORQ USED REF
OSCILLATION DAMPING
3.12 3.13
OS C_COMP_ON
126.01
OS C_COMP_FREQ
126.02
OS C_COMP_PHASE LIMITAT IO NS
126.03
OS C_COMP_GAIN TORQ REF4
126.04
3.11
TORQUE REFERENCE
TORQUE S ELECTOR SELECTOR
26.01
0
TORQ REF1
3.08 2 1 TORQ REF3
3
(EX TERNA L TORQUE REFERENCE) 3.10
4
MIN
5 6
MAX
TORQ REF2
3.09 +
(SP EED CONTROLLER OUTPUT) +
Figure 26-1 Torque Reference Selection - Overview
26.01 Torque Selector

The torque reference selector includes min/max-selectors, torque reference route, speed reference
route or addition of both torque and speed ref.
Note!
The torque selector can be modified only when the following conditions are true:
• Ref2 selected via 12.01 (local) resp. 12.02 (remote),
• torque control selected (99.14 = Torque Ctrl) and/or follower selected (70.08 = Follower).
With the other control modes that can be selected in 99.14 the torque selector is fixed to ‘SPEED’.
When running with pure torque control (26.01 = 3), the drive follows the external torque reference
(TORQUE REF A / B) and the actual speed is not controlled or limited. Then it is not possible to prevent
the drive section from overspeeding.
If a safety margin of the actual speed is needed, then 26.01 TORQUE SELECTOR is set to 4 (or 5).
Then the speed controller of the drive has to receive a speed reference value from the overriding
system which is slightly higher (lower if 26.01 = 5) than the actual speed. The actual speed then
remains below (above) the reference and the logic selects the smaller torque reference. A negative
(positive) speed difference causes changeover to speed control. A changeover from speed control to
torque control reference takes place when reference is lower (higher) than the controller output. This
function enables a smooth changeover from speed control to torque control and back.
NAME VALUE MEANING
ZERO 1
SPEED 2
TORQUE 3
MINIMUM 4
MAXIMUM 5
ADD 6

ABB
26.02 LOAD COMPENSATION [%]
It is possible to add a load compensation value to TORQ REF3.
Unit: % Type: R Min: See 20.06 Max: See Def: 0 Int. scaling:100 == 1 %
20.05
26.03 TORQUE STEP [%]

It is possible to add an additional torque step to TORQ REF4.
Unit: % Type: R Min: See 20.06 Max: See Def: 0 Int. scaling:100 == 1 %
20.05
MSAI5150 ACS1000 135/389

Group 27 FLUX CONTROL
27.01 FLUX OPT ENA

(130.24) The motor flux is optimised in order to minimise motor losses and reduce noise. The flux optimisation is
used in drives that usually operate below nominal load.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 FALSE Function is disabled.
-1 TRUE Flux optimisation function is active.
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: FALSE Int. scaling:1 == 1
27.02 FLUX BRK ENA

(130.23) The braking ability of the drive is highly improved by using the flux braking.
During braking the mechanical energy of the drive has to be eliminated by the motor and inverter. By
modifying the magnetising level of the motor, thermal losses can be increased and the drive can be
decelerated more effectively.
Function can be used in drives with no active front end.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 FALSE Function is disabled.
-1 TRUE Flux braking function is active.
Figure 27 1 Flux Braking - Diagram
27.03 FLUX REF IN [%]

(130.03) Input for the external flux reference. Internal flux control sets the limits for the external flux control
values according to the motor state.
27.04 MAX FLUX REF [%]

(130.01) Flux reference maximum limit.
27.05 MIN FLUX REF [%]

(130.02) Flux reference minimum limit.
27.07 MIN FLUX OPT [%]
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 84.99998 Int. scaling:

ABB
Group 28 DC LINK CONTROL
28 DC LINK CONTROL
Parameters for charging, discharging and neutral point voltage supervision.
All parameter in this group are inverter type specific and set during the commissioning according
the drive type code.
They are only visible after entering the service passcode.
28.01 MCB ClosingLevel

Not applicable for ACS1000 software.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1
28.02 DC ChargingLevel [V]

DC link voltage level at which the protection IGCTs are closed.
Note:This parameter is automatically preset by the software loading package.

Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 4300 Int. scaling:1==1V
28.03 ChargingTime [s]

Timeout for the charging sequence. If the DC link is not charged within this time, a trip will be
initiated.

Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 120 Def: 60 Int. scaling:10==1s
28.04 DischargeTime [s]

Timeout for the discharging sequence. If the DC link is not discharged within this time, a trip will be
initiated.

28.05 DischargedLevel [V]

DC Voltage level at which the DC link is considered as discharged. Before the DC link is considered
as discharged (and for example the cabinet door locking is released) the measured DC voltage level
(2.01) has to be below the level defined by this parameter.

28.06 MinChargingTime [s]

Monitoring of charging function. If the charging level is reached too soon, a fault will be generated. This
is a protection feature, preventing MCB closing, for example in a case of faulted voltage measurement.
28.07 NpVoltDevLimit [V]

Maximum allowed level for the DC Voltage unbalance while charging up DC link. The neutral point
voltage actual value (parameter 2.08 NP VOLTAGE) is compared against this parameter value
during the charging sequence, and if the limit is reached the fault will occur.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 137/389

28.08 ModulationDischrg
Not applicable for ACS1000.
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: -1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1
28.09 VLU CtrlSuperv

28.10 HV ChrgRelaySupv
28.11 VLU GUSP PowerLoss

28.12 DUDT MAX CHARGING [V/ms]

Maximum rise of the DC-link voltage during charging.
If the voltage increases faster the charging circuit is probably defect and a fault message is generated.

Unit: V/ms Type: R Min: Max: Def: 500 Int. scaling:
28.15 PassiveDischDelay
Parameter defines the waiting time until the grounding switch can be operated, if the TC Stałe Machine
still stays in the INIT sequence (6.42 TC STATE- Stałe 0, 1 or 2) or a communication fault is active after
the software initilization time has elapsed.
With this delay, it can be guaranteed that the DC-Link voltage is really zero also without communication
link between the measurement device and the AMC board not working.
During this sequence an additional alarm message is shown: „ PassiveDischarge”
Note!
Parameter change is only allowed by ABB service. If parameter is set to zero (0), the monitoring
function is disabled.
28.16 NpVoltDevIncTime
NP voltage deviation increase time after modulation stop. The NP voltage threshold will be increased
after stopping modulation for the time set in this parameter.
Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3600 Def: 300 Int. scaling:1 == 1s

ABB
Group 29 SCALAR CONTROL
29 SCALAR CONTROL
NOT AVAILABLE
When parameter 99.09 CONTROL MODE is set to SCALAR the scalar control mode is activated.
This parameter group is only visible if SCALAR - control mode is selected.
NOTE! All scalar control parameters above Group 99 have to be checked during commissioning.
29.01 FREQUENCY REF [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This is input for the frequency reference.
29.02 FrequencyMax [Hz]

Operating range maximum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter SPEED
MAX. When changing the SPEED MAX value, the software updates this parameter accordingly.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: see 29.03 Max: 200 Hz Def: 50Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
29.03 FrequencyMin [Hz]

Operating range minimum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter SPEED MIN.
When changing the SPEED MIN value, the software updates this parameter accordingly. For step-up
transformer option: if parameter 132.23 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the minimum frequency is
limited to that minimum starting frequency for step-up.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: -200 Hz Max: see Def: - 50Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
29.02
MSAI5150 ACS1000 139/389

140/389
UDC1
UDC2
Local
DC-VO LTAGE
LIMITER CURRENT
Freq Ref LIMITATION
29.01 LIMITER ACC/DEC/SHAPE UDC
SCALAR CONTROL
Local Freq Ref

X
Load Share
23.05
DC OVE RVOLTAGE MAXIMUM
22.01 Acc/Dec 1/2 Sel 29.02 FREQUENCY MAX ACCEL TIME 1/2 CURRENT
Inverter Current
Accel Ti me1 29.03 FREQUENCY MIN DECEL TIME 1/2
22.02
Accel Ti me2 22.06 PR STOP RAMP Max Motor Current
22.03 20.04
22.07 SHAPE TIME
Decel Ti me1 MIN
22.04 MaxInverterCurrent
22.05 Decel Ti me2
Figure 29-1 Scalar Control - Overview

OS CILATION MAKE FLUX REF
HYSTE RESIS CONTRO L
DAMP ING (sin e wav e gen erato r)
Flux X Act
Motor Torque
1.09 Flux Y Act
uses torque modul ator

FLUX REF SWITCHING FREQ
CONTROL CONTROL
3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I

Flux Used Ref Switch Freq Ref
3.14
IR COMP
COMPENSATION
CALCULATION
IR Compensation Flux Act

3.15
IR Comp Weak Flux X Act
Flux Y Act
99.03 MOTOR NOM VOLT

Frequency
99.05 MOTOR NOM FREQ 1.05
ABB

ABB
Group 30 MOTOR PROTECTION
30 MOTOR PROTECTION
The motor can be protected against overheating by:
• temperature measurement of the motor using PT100 or PTC sensors by using analogue inputs
(with a separate transducer)
• a thermal switch inside the motor connected to digital input DI14-IOEC1
EXTERNAL: The motor over temperature detection is based on the measured values of the
motor temperature by means of PT100.
Motor Thermal Protection
30.01 EXT MOTOR THERM PROT
AI2 - IOEC2
(4.17) MotTempPhase U1
SCALING (4.09)
13.12 Ext ernal Alarm Motor Temp Alarm
: 30.05 M OT T EM P AL M L
MotTempAlarm U1
13.16 : Ext ernal Trip Motor Temp Trip

M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip U1
30.06
Motor Temp Meas Lost
MeasLost Alarm Alarm
enable
AI2-IOEC2 < 2mA Motor Temp Meas Lost
MeasLost Trip Trip
AI2-IOEC2
MeasLost Alarm U1
30.02 M OT TEM P M EA S U
MeasLost Trip U1
AI3 - IOEC2
(4.18) MotTempPhase V1
SCALING (4.10)
13.18
MotTempAlar m V1
13.22 : Mot TempTrip V1

30.06 M OT T EM P T RIP L
enable
AI3-IOEC2 < 2mA
AI3-IOEC2
MeasLostAlarm V1
30.03 M OT TEM P M EA S V MeasLost Trip U1
AI4 - IOEC2
(4.19) MotTempPhase W1
SCALING (4.11)
13.24
MotTempAlar m W1
13.28 :
M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip W1
30.06
enable
AI4-IOEC2 < 2mA
AI4-IOEC2
MeasLostAlarm W1
30.04 M OT TEM P M EA S W MeasLostTrip W1
Figure 30 1 Motor Thermal Protection - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 141/389

30.01 ExtMotorThermProt
This parameter defines the operation in case the motor thermal protection function detects overheating
of the motor.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT If actual motor temperature exceeds the ALARM LIMIT (Par. 30.05) an
STOP alarm signal will be generated and if actual motor temperature exceeds the
TRIP LIMIT (30.06) a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be
stopped
2 WARNING If actual motor temperature exceeds the ALARM LIMIT (Par. 30.05) or the
TRIP LIMIT (Par. 30.06) only an alarm signal will be generated
3 NO External motor temperature supervision is not active
30.02 MotWdgUTempMeas1
This parameter activates the first motor winding temperature measurement of phase U by using
analogue input AI2-IOEC2 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer
which provides a 0(4)...20mA signal for the AI). The supervision for measurement loss is only active, if
Par. 13.14 AI2 MINIMUM IO2 is set to 4mA/2V .
Note:
If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par.: 30.02, 30.03, 30.04) a Soft Stop will only
be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.
2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated
3 NO No action, motor temperature measurement is not used
30.03 MotWdgVTempMeas1
This parameter activates the first motor winding temperature measurement of phase V by using
Note:
VALUE NAME MEANING

ABB
30.04 MotWdgWTempMeas1
This parameter activates the first motor winding temperature measurement of phase W by using
Par. 13.26 AI4 MINIMUM IO2 is set to 4mA/2V.
Note:
VALUE NAME MEANING
30.05 MotTempAlarmLevel [C]

Motor temperature alarm limit. When measured temperature of external sensor (range e.g. –
10...180° C) rises above this limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 50 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 110 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C
30.06 MotTempTripLevel [C]

Motor temperature trip limit. Drive is tripped when measured temperature of external sensor (range e.g.
-10...180° C) rises above this limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: Par. 30.05 Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C
MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION
i / in
Par.: 30.07: 400%

MotorProtCurrLev 1
OVERLOAD
Par.: 30.08: 200%

MotorProtCurrLev 2
Par.: 30.09: 150%

MotorProtCurrLev 3
20 480 t/s
1200
Par.: 30.10 Par.: 30.11
MotorProtTime1 MotorProtTime2 Par.: 30.12
MotorProtTime3
Figure 30 2 Motor Overload Protection - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 143/389

30.07 MOTCURR PROTLVL 1 [%]
Motor protection current level 1. Note!The maximum limit could be less but not over 400% (up to
selected ratio between inverter and motor). The maximum value is calculated by following formular:
InvNomCurrent (Par.: 06.11) * 3

Max = * 100%
MotorNomCurrent (Par.: 99.03) * 2
Figure
Unit: % Type: R Min: 20 Max: 400 Def: 400 Int. scaling:100 == 1%

Motor protection current level 2 (maximum limit see Parameter 30.07).

Motor protection current level 3 (maximum limit see Parameter 30.07).
30.10 MOT PROT TIME 1 [s]

Motor protection time 1 that corresponds to motor protection current level 1.

Motor protection time 2 that correspond to motor protection current level 2.

Motor protection time 3 that correspond to motor protection current level 3.
30.13 StallFunction
This parameter defines the reaction of the stall protection once it gets active.
NAME VALUE MEANING

1 DISABLED No action, motor stall protection is not active.
2 ALARM Motor stall protection is active; if motor is stalled, an alarm signal will be
generated
3 FC2 Motor stall protection is active; if motor is stalled, a trip signal will be
FAULT generated and the modulation will be stopped.
30.14 StallFreqLLim
Defines the motor stall frequency low level. If motor frequency is below this level, the first condition to
supervize the motor for stall conditions is fulfilled.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1Hz
30.15 StallCurrHLim
Defines the motor current high level. If motor RMS current is above this level, the second condition to
supervize the motor for stall conditions is fulfilled.

ABB
30.16 MaxStallTime
Time value for the stall protection logic (delay time for the stall alarm or fault generation after the above
detection conditions one and two have been fulfilled).
I %
FILT MOT RMS CUR
Stall area
Operation area
30.15 StallCurHighLim
INU FREQ ACT (ABS) f Hz

30.14 StallFreqLowLimit
Figure 30-4 Stall Protection, Frequency Limit - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 145/389

30.17 UnderloadFunc
Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction.
The protection is activated if :
- the motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter 30.19 UNDERLOAD CURVE,
- this condition has lasted longer than the time set by parameter 30.18 UNDERLOAD TIME,
- output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal frequency of the motor.
The protection function assumes that the drive is equipped with a motor of the rated power.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO No action, motor underload protection is not active.
2 WARNING Motor underload protection is active; if motor is underloaded, an alarm
signal will be generated.
3 FAULT Motor underload protection is active; if motor is underloaded, a trip signal
will be generated and the drive will be stopped.
Figure 30-5 Motor Underload Protection - Diagram
30.18 UNDERLOAD TIME [s]

(186.44) Time limit for underload logic.

ABB
30.19 UNDERLOAD CURVE
(186.45) One of the 5 fixed underload curves can be selected for underload protection:
Figure 30-6 Motor Underload Curves - Diagram
30.20 Floating Gnd Sel

(152.07) Enables single phase-to-earth detection (“Floating Ground Supervision”).
For reaction selection (alarm/trip) see 152.08.
30.21 MOT OVERLOAD PROT

(186.47) Selection of reaction if motor overload (motor UL) protection is active.
Further settings for the motor overload protection must be set in paramters 30.07 to 30.12.
NAME VALUE MEANING
PROT 0 Function disabled
DISABLE
PROT 1 Function enabled, only alarm appears if in motor overload protection
W/ALARM area
PROT W/TRIP 2 Function enabled, drive trips with FC2 fault reaction if in motor
overload protection area
Unit: Type: Enum Min: 0 Max: 2 Def: 2 Int. scaling:1 == 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 147/389

Group 31 FAULT FUNCTIONS
31.03 AI<MinFuncExtRef1
Operation in cases the reference value 1 (analogue input signal AI1-IOEC2) drops below the minimum
limit. The function is only activated if the parameter 13.08 AI1 MINIMUM IOEC2 is set to 4mA/2V.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO No action
2 FAULT Drive trips in case of analogue signal loss
3 CNST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with constant speed15
SPD15 (Par.34.16)
4 LAST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with the last speed
SPEED reference
31.04 AI<MinFuncExtRef2
Operation in cases the reference value 2 (analogue input signal AI1-IOEC1) drops below the minimum
limit. The function is only activated if the Parameter 13.03 AI1 MINIMUM IOEC1 is set to 4mA/2V.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO No action
SPD15 (Par.34.16)
SPEED reference
31.06 PanelLossSuperv
Defines the operation of the drive if the control panel stops communicating, when it is selected as the
control location for the drive (e.g. local mode).
NOTE!
If you select CNST SPD 15 or LAST SPEED, make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case
communication with the Control Panel fails.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO No panel link supervision
2 FAULT Fault indication is displayed, fault bit is set (FW5 – Bit 09) and drive stops
according to the setting of Parameter 21.02 STOP FUNCTION
3 CNST Warning indication is displayed, alarm bit is set (AW5 – Bit 03) and drive
SPD15 runs continuously with constant speed15 (Par.34.16).
4 LAST Warning indication is displayed, alarm bit is set (AW5 – Bit 03) and drive
SPEED runs continuously with the last actual speed
31.07 AUTORESTART CW

B0 ENA AR EXU Enable Auto Restart for EXU Trips
B1 ENA AR UV Enable Auto Restart for Undervoltage Trips
B2 ENA AR OV Enable Auto Restart for Overvoltage Trips
B3 ENA AR OC Enable Auto Restart for Overcurrent Trips
B4 ENA AR SF Enable Auto Restart for Switching Frequency Trips
B5 ENA AR FC2 Enable Auto Restart for motor side FLTCL2 Trips
B6 ENA AR RBM Enable Block Modulation Auto Restart for Redundant SD
Unit: Type: PB Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:1==1

ABB
31.08 AR TIMEOUT MAX [ms]
Maximum value of Auto Restart timeout timer. This parameter defines the maximum allowed time to
delay the trip reaction on pending faults, which require an Auto Restart. During this time control tries to
reset pending faults. Control is in state AUTORESET. If this time elapses drive trips.
Unit: ms Type: I Min: 0 Max: Def: 3000ms Int. scaling:
16777.2s
31.09 MAX NR OF SUCC AR [pcs]

Maximum number of successive Auto Restarts. If the internal AR successive counter is bigger than the
value given by this parameter, drive will trip due to Autorestart Loop.
Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: Def: 5 Int. scaling:1==1
8388610
31.10 TIME SUCC AR [ms]

Evaluation time to check if Auto Restart was successful or not. After this time has elapsed the internal
counter of successive auto restarts will be reset.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: 30000 Int. scaling:
16777.2s
MSAI5150 ACS1000 149/389

31.11 Overl@LowFreq Sel
Overload protection for low frequency speed ranges.
As long as motor frequency is in the range of 0Hz to 5Hz (adaptable by parameter 133.05 FREQ HYST 70%)
and inverter RMS current is bigger than the linear approximation from 133.30 70% LIM I LIMIT (0Hz) to 100%
(5Hz), the overload protection is active and drive will trip after a delay time.
The delay time can be set in parameter 133.10 70%LIM DELAY TIME or 33.12 Overl@LowFreq, depending on
the selection in this parameter.
If 133.10 is selected as source for the time delay, the delay is depending on how much the inverter is
overloaded (e.g. if inverter is 120% overloaded, the delay time is 133.10 divided by 2). If 33.11 is set to 33.12,
the delay time is indepent of overload condition.
NAME VALUE MEANING
31.12 0 Overload protection delay time is set with parameter 31.12 and not dependent on
overload condition.
133.10 1 Overload protection delay time is set with parameter 133.10, but trip delay is dependent
on overload condition (e.g. trip delay at 110% overload = 133.10; trip delay at 120%
overload = 133.10 / 2; ...)
I_inv_rms [%]
100%
70%
(133.30)
5Hz n [Hz]
(133.05)
Figure
31.12 Overl@LowFreq Time

Overload maximum time delay in low frequency speed ranges. Independent on overload condition.
Once the inverter rms current is within overload area for a time equal or longer than set in this
parameter, drive will trip.

ABB
Group 32 SUPERVISION
32 SUPERVISION
These parameter values can be altered while the ACS1000 is running. Free programmable relay
output can be used to indicate a supervision limit. The limit bit from each supervision function is
set in Limit Word 2 (Par. 8.07).
Figure 32 1 Limit Supervision (Actual and Reference Signals) - Diagram
32.01 LimSupervAction
This parameter defines the operation in case one of the supervision functions below is activated. If one
of the supervision functions is active the delay time will be started. The status of each limit supervision
function will be shown in Par. 8.07 LIMIT WORD2.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT If one of the supervision functions below is active, a trip signal will be
STOP generated and the drive will be stopped
2 ALARM If one of the supervision functions below is active, only an alarm signal will
be generated
3 NO No alarm/fault will be set if one of the supervision functions below is active
32.02 LimSupervDelTime [s]

If one of supervision function is active this delay timer will be started.
32.03 SpeedRefFunction
This parameter activate the speed reference supervision function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO Supervision not used
2 LOW LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit.
3 HIGH LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit.
32.04 SpeedRefLimit [Hz]

Speed reference supervision limit.
Unit: rpm /Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 21000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm /
1Hz
MSAI5150 ACS1000 151/389

32.05 SpeedActFunction
This parameter allows activating the actual speed supervision function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
2 LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit.
LIMIT
3 HIGH Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit.
LIMIT
4 ABS LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. Limit is
LIM supervised in both rotating directions, forward and reverse.
32.06 SpeedActLimit [Hz]

Actual speed limit supervision
Unit: rpm/Hz Type: R Min: -21000 Max: 21000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm/
1 Hz
32.07 MotCurrentFunction
This parameter activates the motor current supervision function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
32.08 MotCurrentLimit [A]

Motor current supervision limit. Setting in actual ampere, step is 1% of In, adjustable 0...5000A
Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 A
32.09 MotTorqueFunction
This parameter activates the motor torque supervision function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
32.10 MotTorqueLimit [%]

Motor torque supervision limit. Setting in 0% ... 400% of the nominal torque of the motor.
32.11 SupSig1 Function

This parameter allows activating the “supervision signal 1” function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
LIMIT
LIMIT

ABB
32.12 SupSig1Group+Indx
A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to “supervision signal 1” by setting parameter 32.12 to
the parameter group and index the value is to taken from. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x the group
and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
When the actual value of INVERTER AIR TEMPERATURE should be supervised, parameter 32.12 is
The default setting of 32.18 is 8501, ACTUAL VALUE 1.

32.13 SupSig1 Limit

Signal 1 supervision limit of previous selected signal in 32.12
32.14 SupSig2 Function

This parameter allows activating the “supervision signal 2” function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
LIMIT
LIMIT
32.15 SupSig2Group+Indx
A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to “supervision signal 2” by setting parameter 32.15 to
the parameter group and index the value is to taken from. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x the group
and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
When the actual value of INVERTER AIR TEMPERATURE should be supervised, parameter 32.15 is
The default setting of 32.21 is 8502, ACTUAL VALUE 2.

32.16 SupSig2 Limit

Signal 2 supervision limit of previous selected signal in 32.15
MSAI5150 ACS1000 153/389

Group 33 CONSTANT SPEED
33 CONSTANT SPEED
The following parameters (except those marked with “O”) can be altered while the ACS1000 is
running. The ACS1000 has 15 programmable constant speeds, ranging from 0 to 18000rpm.
Negative speed values cannot be given directly; this has to be done with the digital input
SIGNAL DIRECTION. If constant speed is activated, the absolute value of the speed is read
from parameter group 33. The sign of constant speed 15 is considered when used as a Fault
Speed (sees parameter 30.18 and 30.19 and figure 12-3).
In External, when External Control Location EXT1 is selected, constant speed override any other
references.
Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque reference or process PID reference is
followed (see Torque Control and PID Control Macros).
Figure 33-1 Constant Speed Selection - Diagram

ABB
33.01 ConstantSpeedSel
This parameter defines which digital inputs (IOEC2 - DI1...DI6) are used to select Constant speeds.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT SEL 1
DI1 (SPEED 1) 2
DI2 (SPEED 2) 3
DI3 (SPEED 3) 4
DI4 (SPEED 4) 5
DI5 (SPEED 5) 6
DI6 (SPEED 7
DI1, 2 8
DI3, 4 9
DI5,6 10
DI 1,2,3 11
DI 3,4,5 12
DI4,5,6 13
DI3,4,5,6 14
33.02 ConstantSpeed 1 [RPM]

Constant speed 1 selection.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: Def: 300rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm
18000rpm

Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 600rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm
18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

Constant speed 6 selection
18000rpm

Constant speed 7 selection
18000rpm
MSAI5150 ACS1000 155/389

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

ABB
Group 34 CRITICAL SPEED
34 CRITICAL SPEED
In some mechanical systems, certain speed ranges can cause resonance problems. With this
parameter group it is possible to select up to five different speed ranges that the ACS 1000 will
avoid. It is not required that Parameter 34.04 CRITICAL SPEED 2 LOW is higher than
Parameter 34.03 CRITICAL SPEED 1 HIGH, as long as the LOW parameter of one set is lower
than the HIGH parameter of the same set. Sets may overlap, but the skip will be from the lower
LOW value to the higher HIGH value.
Figure 34-1 Critical Speed, Function of High and Low Limit - Diagram
34.01 CRIT SPEED ENABLE

Enable of filtering critical speeds.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Critical speed supervision is not active
1 ON Critical speed supervision is active, drive avoids the defined critical speeds
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1
34.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW

Start of critical speed 1 (low value)
18000rpm
MSAI5150 ACS1000 157/389

34.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH
Stop of critical speed 1 (high value)
18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

18000rpm

ABB
Group 35 EXT MOTOR PROT
35 EXT MOTOR PROT

Only available with IOEC 3 / 4 Board (see Parameter 75.01 / 75.02)
35.01 BearingTmpProtDE
Motor bearing temperature protection for Driven End. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and
measurement loss.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Bearing temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the
STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated,
bearing temperature supervision (35.02 and 35.03) is active.
2 ALARM Bearing temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated, bearing
temperature supervision (35.02 and 35.03) is active.
3 NO No action, bearing temperature protection is not used.
35.02 BrgTmpAlarmLevDE [C]

Motor bearing temperature alarm level for Driven End. An alarm will be generated when measured
temperature (PT100 range -10...180°C) rises above this limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 110 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C
35.03 BrgTmpTripLevDE [C]

Motor bearing temperature trip level for Driven End side. Drive is tripped when measured temperature
(PT100 range -10...180°C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated
35.04 BearingTmpProtNDE
Motor bearing temperature protection for Non Driven End. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature
and measurement loss.
NAME VALUE MEANING
SOFT STOP 1
ALARM 2
NO 3
35.05 BrgTmpAlarmLevNDE [C]

Motor bearing temperature alarm level for Non Driven End. An alarm will be generated when measured
temperature (PT100 range -10...180°C) rises above this limit.
35.06 BrgTmpTripLevNDE [C]

Motor bearing temperature trip level for Non Driven End. Drive is tripped when measured temperature
(PT100 range -10...180°C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated
MSAI5150 ACS1000 159/389

35.07 ExtMotorProtAlarm
Operation in case the external motor protection is active (IOEC3 - DI11). Selection of external motor
protection. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘External Motor Protection Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI11).
With parameter 82.06 DI11 INVERT IO3 it is possible to select if the digital input for the alarm signal is
high or low active IOEC3-DI11 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF External motor protection function is disabled
1 ON External motor protection function is active
35.08 MotorCoolingProt
Selection of external motor cooling protection. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Motor Cooling
Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI6) and ‘Motor Cooling Trip’ (IOEC3-DI7). With parameter 82.04 DI6 INVERT IO3
it is possible to select if the digital input for the alarm signal is high or low active.
IOEC3-DI6 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated IOEC3-DI7 = “0” (low signal) :
drive will be stopped by and a fault message will be generated
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF External motor cooling protection function is disabled
1 ON External motor cooling protection function is active
35.09 VibrationProtDI
External vibration protection function: This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Vibration Supervision
Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI8) and ‘Vibration Supervision Trip’ IOEC3-DI9’. With parameter 82.05 DI8 INVERT
IO3 it is possible to select if the digital input for the alarm signal is high or low active. IOEC3-DI8 = “1“
(high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated IOEC3-DI9 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be
stopped by and a fault message will be generated.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF External vibration protection function is disabled
1 ON External vibration protection function is active
35.10 VibrationProtAI1
Vibration signal 1 supervision. Reaction in case of too high vibrations and measurement loss.
NOTE!
If this function is enabled par. 81.26 AI1 Select IO3 is set = 3 ‘VibraSens1’. Enabling is only possible
when the supervision functions of the load bearing temperature 1 (35.14) and the transformer
temperature ext/3 (36.02 and 36.07) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Vibration protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive will be
STOP stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated, Vibration
supervision (35.12 and 35.13) is active.
2 ALARM Vibration protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be
stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated, Vibration supervision (35.12
and 35.13) is active.

ABB
35.11 VibrationProtAI2
Vibration signal 2 supervision. Reaction in case of too high vibrations and measurement loss.
NOTE!
If this function is enabled par. 81.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 3 ‘VibraSens2’. Enabling is only possible
when the supervision functions of the load bearing temp. 2 (35.17), the outside air temp. (37.04), the
second cooling water pressure (190.44) and the output trafo temp. (36.12) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Vibration protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive will be
STOP stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated, Vibration
supervision (35.12 and 35.13) is active.
2 ALARM Vibration protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be
stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated, Vibration supervision (35.12
and 35.13) is active.
35.12 VibrationAlmLev [%]

Vibration alarm level. An alarm will be generated when the measured vibration (80.17 VibraSens1 or
80.18 VibraSens2) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 35.09 VibrationProtect.
35.13 VibrationTripLev [%]

Vibration trip level. A trip will be generated when the measured vibration (80.17 VibraSens1 or 80.18
VibraSens2) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 35.09 VibrationProtect.
35.14 LoadBrgTmpProt1
Motor bearing temperature protection 1. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and
measurement loss.
NOTE!
If this function is enabled par. 81.26 AI1 Select IO3 is set = 2 ‘LoadBearTemp1’. Enabling is only
possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 1 (35.10) and the transformer
temperature ext/3 (36.02 and 36.07) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated, bearing
35.15 LoadBrgTmpAlmLev1 [C]

Load bearing temperature alarm level 1. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature
(PT100 range –10…180° C) rises above this limit.
35.16 LoadBrgTmpTrpLev1 [C]

Load bearing temperature trip level 1. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range –
10…180° C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated
MSAI5150 ACS1000 161/389

35.17 LoadBrgTmpProt2
Load bearing temperature protection 2. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and measurement
loss.
NOTE!
If this function is enabled par. 81.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 2 ‘LoadBearTemp2’. Enabling is only
possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35.11), the outside air temp. (37.04),
the second cooling water pressure (190.44) and the output trafo temp. (36.12) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
drive will not be stopped - only an alarm signal will be generated, bearing
temperature supervision (35.16 and 35.17) is active
35.18 LoadBrgTmpAlmLev2 [C]

Load bearing temperature trip level 2. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range -
10...180° C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated
35.19 LoadBrgTmpTrpLev2 [C]

Load bearing temperature trip level 2. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range -
10...180°C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated

ABB
MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION (OPTIONAL)
Motor thermal protection with second winding temperature measurements on optional I/O-board IOEC4:
temperature measurement of the motor using PT100 or PTC sensors by using analogue inputs (with a separate
transducer).
Motor Thermal Protection

30.01 EXT MOTOR THERM PROT
AI2 - IOEC4
(85.07) MotTempPhase U2
SCALING (85.03)
86.08 External Alarm Motor Temp Alarm
MotTempAlarm U2
86.12 : Ext ernal Trip Motor Temp Trip

M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip U2
30.06
Motor Temp Meas Lost
MeasLost Alarm Alarm
enable
AI2-IOEC4 < 2mA Motor Temp Meas Lost
MeasLost Trip Trip
AI2-IOEC4
MeasLost Alarm U2
35.20 M OT TEM P M EA S U MeasLost Trip U2
AI3 - IOEC4
(85.08) MotTempPhase V2
SCALING (85.04)
86.14
MotTempAlar m V2
86.18 : Mot TempTrip V2

30.06 M OT T EM P T RIP L
enable
AI3-IOEC4 < 2mA
AI3-IOEC4
MeasLostAlarm V2
35.21 M OT TEM P M EA S V
MeasLost Trip V2
AI4 - IOEC4
(85.09) MotTempPhase W2
SCALING (85.05)
86.20
MotTempAlar m W2
86.24 :
M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip W2
30.06
enable
AI4-IOEC4 < 2mA
AI4-IOEC4
MeasLostAlarm W2
35.22 M OT TEM P M EA S W MeasLostTrip W2
Figure 35-1 Optional Motor Thermal Protection - Overview
35.20 MotWdgUTempMeas2
This parameter activates the second motor winding temperature measurement of phase U by using
Note!
be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost. If this function is enabled par. 86.26 ‘AI2
Select IO4’ is set = 2 ‘MotWgTmpPhU2’
VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 163/389

35.21 MotWdgVTempMeas2
This parameter activates the second motor winding temperature measurement of phase V by using
Note!
VALUE NAME MEANING
35.22 MotWdgWTempMeas2
This parameter activates the second motor winding temperature measurement of phase W by using
Par. 86.22 AI4 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V.
Note!
VALUE NAME MEANING

ABB
Group 36 TRANSFORMER PROT
36 TRANSFORMER PROT
Only available with IOEC3-Board (see Parameter 75.01) or ACS 1000i
36.01 TrafoTmpProtectDI
Selection of binary trafo temperature protection (oil or winding). This parameter activates the binary
inputs ‘Trafo Temperature Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI2) and ‘Trafo Temperature Trip’ IOEC3-DI3’. With Par.
82.02 DI2 INVERT IO3 it is possible to select, if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active.
IOEC3-DI2 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated
IOEC3-DI3 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be stopped and a fault message will be generated
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF External transformer protection function is disabled
1 ON External transformer protection function is active
36.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI
Selection of analogue trafo temperature protection (oil or winding). Operation in case of trafo
temperature to high and measurement loss.
NOTE!
This parameter will be fixed set to “SOFT STOP” to prevent overheating of the transformer, if
“Integrated Transformer Fan” option is used (Par.: 41.07 INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN INST) or with ACS
1000i.
With ACS 1000: If this function is enabled, par. 81.26 AI1 Select IO3 is set = 1 ‘TrafoTmpExt/3’.
Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 1 (35.10) and the load
bearing temperature 1 (35.14) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Trafo temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive
STOP will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. Trafo
temperature supervision is active.
2 ALARM Trafo temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive
will not be stopped - only an alarm signal will be generated.
Trafo temperature supervision is active.
3 NO No action, analogue trafo protection is not used.
36.03 TrafoTmpAlmLExt/3 [C]

Transformer temperature alarm level. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (80.01
TrafoTempExt/3) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 36.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI.
36.04 TrafoTmpTrpLExt/3 [C]

Transformer temperature trip level. Drive is tripped when measured temperature rises above this limit
and a fault message will be generated. Protection is activated by parameter 36.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 165/389

36.05 TrafoBuchholzProt
Selection of Trafo Buchholz. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Trafo Buchholz Alarm’ (IOEC3-
DI4) and ‘Trafo Buchholz Trip’ (IOEC3-DI5). With parameter 82.04 DI4 INVERT IO3 it’s possible to
select, if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active. IOEC3-DI4 = “1“ (high signal) : only an
alarm message will be generated, IOEC3-DI5 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be stopped by and a fault
message will be generated.
NOTE!
This function is only available if the “Integrated Transformer Fan” option is not used ((Par.: 41.07
INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN INST is set to “NO”) and this function is not available with ACS 1000i.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Transformer buchholz protection function is disabled
1 ON Transformer buchholz protection function is active
36.06 TrafoOilLevProtec
Selection of trafo oil level protection. This parameter activates the binary input ‘Trafo Oil Level Alarm’
(IOEC3-DI1). With parameter 82.01 DI1 INVERT IO3 it’s possible to select, if the digital input for alarm
signal is high or low active. I IOEC3-DI3 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated.
NOTE!
This function is not available with ACS 1000i.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Transformer oil level protection function is disabled
1 ON Transformer oil level protection function is active
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1
36.07 TrafoTmpSelect
Only ACS 1000i:
Selection of the transformer temperature sensors that are used for the supervision function (36.02).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 1 only temperature sensor 1 used,
2 12 temperature sensor 1 and 2 used,
3 123 temperature sensor 1, 2 and 3 used;
36.08 TrafoTmpAlarmLev1 [C]

Only ACS 1000i:
TrafoTemp1) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 36.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI
36.09 TrafoTmpTripLev1 [C]

Only ACS 1000i:
Transformer temperature trip level. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (4.08 TrafoTemp1)
rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated. Protection is activated by parameter 36.02
TrafoTmpProtectAI.
36.10 TrafoTmpAlarmLev2 [C]

Only ACS 1000i:
TrafoTemp2) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 36.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 190.1 + Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C
10°C

ABB
36.11 TrafoTmpTripLev2 [C]
Only ACS 1000i:
Transformer temperature trip level. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (4.08 TrafoTemp2)
rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated. Protection is activated by parameter 36.02
TrafoTmpProtectAI.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 200 °C Def: 190.2 + Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C
10°C
36.12 OutpTrafoTmpProt
Selection of analogue trafo temperature protection (oil or winding). Operation in case of trafo
temperature to high and measurement loss.
NOTE!
If this function is enabled, par. 81.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 5 ‘OutpTrafoTmp’. Enabling is only possible
when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35.11), the load bearing temp. 2 (35.17), the
outside air temp. (37.04) and the second cooling water pressure (190.44) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Output trafo temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the
Trafo temperature supervision is active.
2 ALARM Output trafo temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped - only an alarm signal will be generated. Trafo
temperature supervision is active.
3 NO No action, analogue output trafo protection is not used.
36.13 OutpTrafoTmpAlmL [C]

Output transformer temperature alarm level. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature
(80.21 OutputTrafoTemp) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 36.12
OutpTrafoTmpProt.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200°C Def: 70 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C
36.14 OutpTrafoTmpTrpL [C]

Output transformer temperature trip level. Drive is tripped when measured temperature rises above this
limit and a fault message will be generated. Protection is activated by parameter 36.12
OutpTrafoTmpProt.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 167/389

Group 37 EXT INV PROTECT
37 EXT INV PROTECT

Only available with IOEC 3 / 4 Board (see Parameter 75.01 / 75.02)
37.01 ExtWtrCoolingProt
Selection of external water cooling operation. This parameter activates the binary output 'External Water
Cooling Unit Start' (IOEC4-DO5) as well as the binary inputs ‘External Water Cooling Alarm’ (IOEC4-
DI1) and ‘External Water Cooling Trip’ IOEC4-DI2’. With parameter 87.01 DI1 INVERT IO4 it is possible
to select if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active.
IOEC4-DI1 - an alarm message will be generated
IOEC4-DI2 - drive will be stopped by a low signal value and a fault message will be generated
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF External water cooling function is disabled
1 ON External water cooling function is active
37.02 OutpSw TypeSelect
This parameter is used to select the type of the OUTPUT SWITCH, which is installed
between the INU output and the motor. The output side switch is used for drive operation
prevention purposes, ensuring safe motor side maintenance operations.
NOTE!
Parameter has to be set according to installed output switch type
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT USED Inverter output side switch is not used or not existing.
2 ISOLATOR Inverter output side switch is an isolator.
3 GND SW Inverter output side switch is a grounding switch.
37.03 InpSw TypeSelect

This parameter is used to select the type of the INPUT SWITCH, which is installed between
the Inverter input and the transformer (or the Main Circuit Breaker in case of DTL
configuration). The input side switch is used for drive operation prevention purposes,
ensuring safe supply side maintenance operations.
NOTE!
Parameter has to be set according to installed input switch type.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT USED Inverter input side switch is not used or not existing.
2 ISOLATOR Inverter input side switch is an isolator.
3 GND SW Inverter input side switch is a grounding switch.

ABB
37.04 OutsideAirTmpProt
Selection of outside air temperature measurement & protection. Operation in case of outside air
temperature and measurement loss (AI4 - IOEC3).
NOTE!
If 1 or 2 is selected, par 81.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 1 ‘OutsideAirTemp’. Enabling is only possible
when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35.11), the load bearing temp. 2 (35.17), the
second cooling water pressure (190.44) and the output trafo temp. (36.12) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Outside air temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the
outside air temperature supervision (37.05 and 37.06) is active.
2 ALARM Outside air temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped - only an alarm signal will be generated, outside air
3 NO No action, outside air temperature protection is not used.
37.05 OutAirTmpAlmLev [C]

Outside air temperature alarm level. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature rises
above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 37.04
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 45 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1°C
37.06 OutAirTmpTripLev [C]

Outside air temperature trip level. Drive is tripped when measured temperature rises above this limit and
a fault message will be generated. Protection is activated by parameter 37.04
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 200 °C Def: 55 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1°C
37.07 OutpSw FeedbackSig

This parameter is used to select the type and amount of output switch feedback signals
NOTE!All feedback signals are meant as high active signals.

NAME VALUE MEANING
TWO SIGNALS 1 Both, close and open feedback signal is available
OPEN FDB 2 Only open feedback is available.
CLOSED FDB 3 Only closed feedback is available.
37.08 InpSw FeedbackSig

This parameter is used to select the type and amount of input switch feedback signals
NOTE!All feedback signals are meant as high active signals.

NAME VALUE MEANING
TWO SIGNALS 1 Both, close and open feedback signal is available
OPEN FDB 2 Only open feedback is available.
CLOSED FDB 3 Only closed feedback is available.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 169/389

Group 38 OPTIONAL FUNC
38 OPTIONAL FUNC
Optional function used by the customer.
The parameters marked with (O) can only be altered while the ACS1000 is stopped.
38.01 MotorHeater
This parameter activates the motor heater function. Normally the digital output DO5-IOEC1 (NO
MOTOR HEATER ON) is energized, even if parameter 38.01 is set to “NO”. If the function is activated,
the motor heater order on command is controlled from digital output DO5-IOEC1. The digital output
IOEC1-DO3 will be de-energized, if parameter 38.01 is set to “YES”, the drive is not in “RUNNING” –
state, no HEATER ALARM signal is active (DI12 – IOEC1) and digital output MOTOR COOLER
ORDER ON (IOEC3 – DO1) is not activated. The motor heater trip signal is connected to IOEC1-DI12
(in series with cabinet heater). If the ORDER ON command is set and the trip signal has a low value, an
alarm message will be generated.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO Motor heater function is not active
1 YES Motor heater is installed, function is active
38.02 MotorCooler
This parameter activates the motor cooler function. If the function is activated, the motor cooler order on
command is controlled from output IOEC3-DO1; the motor cooler trip signal is connected to IOEC3-
DI12.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Motor cooler is used. If motor cooler trip signal is active the drive will be
STOP stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.
2 ALARM Motor cooler is used. If motor cooler trip signal is active the drive will not be
stopped - only an alarm signal will be generated.
3 NO No action, motor cooler is not used.
38.03 MotorCoolerTimeOff [S]

Delay time to switch off the motor cooler when drive is stopped.
38.04 CabinetHeater
This parameter activates the cabinet heater function. The cabinet heater trip signal is connected to
IOEC1-DI12 (in series with motor heater). If the cabinet heater function is selected and the trip signal
has a low value, an alarm message will be generated.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO Cabinet heater function is not active
1 YES Cabinet heater is installed, function is active
38.05 BrkChop Installed

This parameter activates the brake chopper function (only available if IOEC4- board is installed).
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 0
YES 1

ABB
38.06 BrkResi Overtemp
If parameter 38.05 BRAKE CHOPPER INSTALLED is set to “YES”, the braking chopper supervision
function is active as well.
NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLE CHOP 0
ALARM 1
38.07 SynBypassFunction
This parameter activates the Synchronized Bypass function for starter. If the parameter is set to:
NAME VALUE MEANING
SBYP 2-4 MTR 1
SBYP FOR 1 MTR 2
NO 3
38.08 BrkResi Therm Cap [kJ/K]

Value of the external resistor. Will be set automatically if internal resistor is selected.
Unit: Ω Type: R Min: 4 Max: 100 Def: 4 Int. scaling:
38.09 BrkChop coeff s1

Thermal capacity of the brake resistor. Will be set automatically if internal resistor is selected.
Unit: kJ/K Type: R Min: 2 Max: 1000 Def: 10 Int. scaling:
38.10 BrkResi Resistanc [ohm]

Braking chopper resistor trip temperature value.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 100 Int. scaling:
38.11 BrkChop coeff s0

Thermal time constant of braking resistor without forced cooling.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 9999 Def: 1 Int. scaling:
38.12 BrkChop TimeConst [s]

This parameter activates the braking chopper fan.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 0
YES 1
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: NO Int. scaling:1==1
38.13 BrkResi coeff c2

Thermal time constant of braking resistor with forced cooling. This will be set automatically if internal
resistor is selected.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 171/389

38.14 SafeTrqOffCtrl
This parameter activates the safe torque off (STO) function (connected to digital input
selected in parameter group 72). The safe torque off signal operates also the INU Output
Isolator or INU Grounding Switch if installed and selected.
FUNCTION:
Parameter Setting: LOW ACTIVE / HIGH ACTIVE. If Safe Torque Off monitoring
function is used this parameter is normally set to LOW ACTIVE.
ACS 1000 is in "Ready ON" – State :

Safe Torque Off active Þ ACS 1000 remain in "READY ON" – state (MCB ON, charging,
is still possible) Þ ACS 1000 state changes also to "NOT READY RUN" Þ CDP312R Panel
shows INU Status "Ready ON", "Not Ready Run" and "SafeTrqOffCtrl".
ACS 1000 is in "Ready RUN" – State :

Safe Torque Off active Þ MCB will not open, DC - Link stays charged Þ ACS 1000 state
changes to " NOT READY RUN " Þ CDP312R Panel shows INU Status "Not Ready Run"
and "SafeTrqOffCtrl"
ACS 1000 is in "Ready REF" – State :

Safe Torque Off active Þ reaction depending on selection of parameter 38.15 SAFE
TORQUE OFF STOP MODE
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT USED 1
LOW ACTIVE 2
HIGH ACTIVE 3
38.15 SafeTrqOffStopM
This parameter defines the drive reaction when the ACS 1000 is in "Ready REF" – State and
the Safe Torque Off function became active.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO REACTION 1
STOP RAMP 2
STOP TORQ 3
STOP COAST 4
38.16 EmergeStopCtrl
This parameter activates the Emergency Stop function (connected to digital input selected in
parameter group 72). Emergency Stop is a category 1 stop which finally ends by hardwired
timer relays in an emergency off (category 0 stop).
FUNCTION:
Parameter Setting: LOW ACTIVE / HIGH ACTIVE. If Emergency Stop monitoring
function is used this parameter is normally set to LOW ACTIVE.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT USED 1
LOW ACTIVE 2
HIGH ACTIVE 3

ABB
38.17 ArcFaultDetection
This parameter activates the Arc Fault Detection function (connected to digital input
selected in parameter group 72).
FUNCTION:
Parameter Setting: LOW ACTIVE / HIGH ACTIVE. If Arc Fault monitoring function is
used this parameter is normally set to LOW ACTIVE.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT USED 1
LOW ACTIVE 2
HIGH ACTIVE 3
38.18 GndCurrent1Prot
Selection of analogue ground current protection reaction.
NAME VALUE MEANING
SOFT 1 Ground current supervision 1 is used and if trip level is reached reaction is
STOP SOFT STOP
ALARM 2 Ground current supervision 1 is used and if alarm level is reached reaction
is an ALARM
NO 3 No action, analogue ground current protection is not used.
38.19 GndCurrent1AlmL [mA]

Ground current protection 1. An alarm will be generated when measured current rises above this limit.
Protection is activated by parameter 38.18 GndCurrent1Prot
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 25 Int. scaling:
38.20 GndCurrent1TrpL [mA]

Ground current protection 1. A fault will be generated when measured current rises above this limit.
Protection is activated by parameter 38.18 GndCurrent1Prot.
38.21 GndCurrent2Prot
Selection of analogue ground current protection 2 reaction.
NAME VALUE MEANING
SOFT 1 Ground current supervision 2 is used and if trip level is reached reaction is
STOP SOFT STOP
ALARM 2 Ground current supervision 2 is used and if alarm level is reached reaction
is an ALARM
NO 3 No action, analogue ground current protection 2 is not used.
38.22 GndCurrent2AlmL [mA]

Ground current protection 2. An alarm will be generated when measured current rises above this limit.
Protection is activated by parameter 38.21 GndCurrent2Prot
38.23 GndCurrent2TrpL [mA]

Ground current protection 2. A fault will be generated when measured current rises above this limit.
Protection is activated by parameter 38.21 GndCurrent2Prot.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 173/389

Group 39 RIDE THROUGH
39 RIDE THROUGH
The ride through function prevents an under voltage fault when short voltage dips in the DC
intermediate circuit occur.
The ride-through function of the ACS 1000 is expected to keep the drive in operation and
prevent a trip when the main (input) power fails. During ride-through operation, the voltage of
the DC bus is kept at a specified level. For this purpose, energy from the rotating mass of the
motor and load is taken through the inverter to compensate for losses and maintain the DC bus
voltage. In the process, the motor speed drops. The ride-through mode can be maintained as
long as the rotating mass has sufficient energy that can be extracted to keep the DC bus
voltage up. The ACS 1000 ride-through function provides adjustable limits for the minimum
speed permitted during ride-through, and the maximum time allowed for ride-through to be
active. If the input power is restored, within the permitted time and speed, the mode
automatically changes from ride-through to normal operation. After the transition to normal
operation, the motor is accelerated to the speed setting that was active before the input power
failure. If the input power is not restored before the set time and speed limits are reached, then
the drive is tripped.
It is also possible to disable ride-through operation completely. If it is disabled, then the drive
trips immediately if the input power is lost.
[%] DC Bus Voltage The ride-through voltage levels are
explained on the basis of Figure 39-1.
D
100
C A Undervoltage Trip Level 65%
B B Undervoltage Alarm Level 71%
A
C Ride-Through Level 80%
D Overvoltage Trip Level 129%
time
t1 t2 t3
Figure 39-1 Ride Through, Voltage Levels - Diagram
39.01 RIDETHRU ENA

This parameter activates the ride through function.
ATTENTION:
If ride through is enabled the negative torque limit (20.06 MINIMUM TORQUE) must not be 0.
Otherwise the voltage cannot be kept.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Ride through function is disabled
1 ON Ride through function is active
39.02 MAX RIDETHRU LEN [s]

Time limit to activate ride through function. If time elapsed, a trip will follow.

ABB
39.04 AuxRideThrghEnabl
This parameter activates the auxiliary voltage ride through function. If the auxiliary voltage drops below
the minimum voltage level, the aux. ride through function will be activated. If the auxiliary voltage does
not come back before the AUX RIDE THROUGH TIME has elapsed, the drive will trip and a fault
message will be generated.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Aux. ride through function not used
1 ON Aux. ride through function is active
39.05 AuxRideThrghTime [s]

Time limit within the aux. power has to exceed minimum voltage level after a voltage drop.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 5 s Def: 1 s Int. scaling:1000 == 1 s
39.06 AuxRideThTimeOffl [s]

Time limit within the aux. power has to exceed minimum voltage level after a voltage drop during the
drive is offline.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 5s Def: 1s Int. scaling:1000==1s
39.07 BattFaultReact
This parameter activates the back-up supply battery supervision (DI4 - IOEC1).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 Fault A fault message will be generated.
2 Alarm Only an alarm message will be generated.
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 2 Int. scaling:1==1
39.08 BattFaultDelayTime [h]

This parameter defines the remaining time till a battery fault message will be generated in case of an
active battery alarm. Only active if parameter 39.07 BattFaultReact is set to Alarm.
Unit: h Type: R Min: 1 Max: 720 Def: 336 Int. scaling:10=1h
39.09 BattFaultRemTime [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter shows the remaining time till an battery fault message will be generated in case of an
active battery alarm.
Unit: h Type: R Int. scaling: 10=1h
MSAI5150 ACS1000 175/389

Group 40 PID-CONTROL
40 PID-CONTROL
Intended for use with different closed loop control systems such as pressure control, level control
and flow control.
The PID Control Macro allows the ACS 1000 to take a reference signal (setpoint) and an actual
signal (feedback), and automatically adjust the speed of the drive to match the actual signal to
the reference. The minimum and maximum values of the PID Controller output are the same as
Parameter 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED.
NOTE!
These parameters can only be seen when the PID Control Macro is selected.
Process Error Value
Gain PID Controller

Output
Gain
PID Integration Time

Figure 40-1 PID Controller Gain, I-Time and Error Value – Diagram
40.01 PID Gain

PID Controller Gain selection.This parameter defines the gain of the PID Controller. The setting range is 0.1 ...
100. If 1 is selected, a 10% change in error value causes the PID Controller output to change by 10%. If the
Maximum SPEED is set to 1500 rpm for example, the actual speed reference is changed by 150 rpm.
Figure 40-1 PID Controller Gain Settings (MAXIMUM SPEED is 1500 rpm)
Unit: Type: R Min: 0.1 Max: 100 Def: 1 Int. scaling:100 == 1
40.02 PID IntegratTime [s]

PID Controller integration time selection.Defines the time in which the maximum output is achieved if a
constant error value exists and the relative gain is 1. Integration time 1s denotes that a 100% change is
achieved in 1s.
Unit: S Type: R Min: 0.02s Max: 320s Def: 10s Int. scaling:100 == 1 s

ABB
40.03 PID DerivTime [s]
PID Controller derivative time selection. Derivative is calculated according to two consecutive error
values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula: in which TS = 12ms sample time For example:
If there is a 10% step in error value, the error in the output of the PID Controller is: The derivative is
filtered with a 1-pole filter. Parameter 40.4 PID DERIV FILTER defines the time constant of the filter
Figure
Unit: S Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 0 s Int. scaling:100 == 1 s
40.04 PID DerivFilter [s]

Time constant of the 1-pole filter.
Unit: S Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 1 s Int. scaling:100 == 1 s
40.05 ErrorValueInvers
PID Controller error value inversion. This parameter allows inverting the Error Value (and thus the
operation of the PID Controller). Normally, a decrease in Actual Signal (feedback) causes an increase in
drive speed. If a decrease in actual is desired to cause a decrease in speed, set Error Value Invert to
YES.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO PID Controller error value inversion is not active
1 YES PID Controller error value inversion is active
40.06 ActualValueSel
Actual signal source for the PID Process Controller is selected by this parameter. Analogue input AI1-
IOEC4 is fix connected to actual signal 1 (ACT1) and analogue input AI2- IOEC4 is fix connected to
actual signal 2 (ACT2) for the PID controller.
In the list of parameter values choices AI denotes ACT1 and A2 denotes ACT2. ACT1 and ACT2 are
combined by subtraction, addition, multiplication or other function as listed below:
• MIN (A1,A2) sets the parameter value either ACT1 or ACT2, depending which one has the smallest
value
• MAX (A1,A2) sets the parameter value either ACT1 or ACT2, depending which one has the biggest
value
• sqrt (A1–A2) sets the parameter value to square root of (ACT1 – ACT2)
• sqA1 + sqA2 sets the parameter value to square root of ACT1 plus square root of ACT2
Note!
Use the sqrt (A1-A2) or sqA1+sqA2 function if the PID-Controller controls flow with a pressure
transducer measuring the pressure difference over a flow meter.
NAME VALUE MEANING
ACT1 1
ACT1 - ACT2 2
ACT1 + ACT2 3
ACT1 * ACT2 4
ACT1 / ACT2 5
MIN (A1,A2) 6
MAX (A1,A2) 7
sqrt (A1 - A2) 8
sqA1 + sqA2 9
MSAI5150 ACS1000 177/389

40.07 Act 1 Minimum [%]
Minimum value for actual value 1. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of
the selected analogue input. Refer to parameter group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input minimum and
maximum settings.
Figure

ABB
40.08 Act 1 Maximum [%]
Maximum value for actual value 1. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values
of the selected analogue input. Refer to parameter group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input minimum and
maximum settings.
Figure
40.09 Act 2 Minimum [%]

Minimum value for actual value 2. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum
values of the selected analogue input. Refer to parameter group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input
minimum and maximum settings.
For scaling refer to parameter 40.07.
40.10 Act 2 Maximum [%]

Maximum value for Actual value 2. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum
values of the selected analogue input. Refer to Parameters group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input
minimum and maximum settings.
For scaling refer to parameter 40.08.
40.11 Act1UnitScale
This parameter matches the actual value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.19) to the Unit
defined by Parameter 40.12.
40.12 Act1Unit
Selection of the Unit of the actual 1 value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.19).
1 = rpm actual value 1 will be displayed in rpm
2 =bar actual value 1 will be displayed in bar
3 = % actual value 1 will be displayed in %
4 =C actual value 1 will be displayed in °C
5 =mg/l actual value 1 will be displayed in milligram / litre
6 =kPa actual value 1 will be displayed in kilo Pascal
MSAI5150 ACS1000 179/389

40.13 Act2UnitScale
This parameter matches the actual value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.20) to the Unit
defined by Parameter 40.14.
40.14 Act2Unit
Selection of the Unit of the Actual 2 value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.20).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 rmp actual value 1 will be displayed in rpm
2 bar actual value 1 will be displayed in bar
3 % actual value 1 will be displayed in %
4 C actual value 1 will be displayed in °C
5 mg/l actual value 1 will be displayed in milligram / litter
6 kPa actual value 1 will be displayed in kilo Pascal
40.15 AI<MinFuncExtAct1
Operations in case of actual value 1 (analogue input signal AI1-IOEC4) drops below the minimum limit.
The function is only activated if the parameter 86.04 AI1 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO No action
SPD15 (Par.34.16)
SPEED reference
40.16 AI<MinFuncExtAct2
Operations in case of actual value 2 (analogue input signal AI2-IOEC4) drops below the minimum limit.
The function is only activated if the Parameter 86.10 AI2 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO No action
SPD15 (Par.34.16)
SPEED reference

ABB
ACTUAL VALUE SCALING
10V (100%) 100% 10V (100%) 100% 100% 100%
8V (75%) 8V (80%)
60%
4V (25%) 4V (40%)
2V (0%) 20%
0V 0% 0V 0% 0% 0%
Actual Scaled Actual Actual Scaled Actual Actual Scaled Actual
Minimum AI 2V / 4mA Minimum AI 0V / 0mA
Actual 1 Maximum 75% Actual 1 Maximum 80% Actual 1 Maximum 20%

Actual 1 Minimim 25% Actual 1 Minimim 40% Actual 1 Minimim 60%
Figure 40-5 PID Control, Actual Value Scaling
MSAI5150 ACS1000 181/389

Group 41 COOLING SYSTEM
41 COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system parameter of ACS1000.
Automatic Change Over Fan/Pump with Redundant Cooling System
With “Redundant Cooling System” (two fans or pumps are selected) the continuous operation of
the drive is guaranteed if a fan (air) or pump (water) failure occures. Switch-over from the faulty
to the stand-by device will take place automatically.
With the “Automatic change over” - function the cycle time and running time for both fans/pumps
can be set. If for example a cycle time of 10h and a Fan1/Pump1 run time of 6h is selected,
Fan1/Pump1 will run for 6 hours. Then they will be stopped and Fan2/Pump2 will run for 4h.
After 4h Fan1/Pump1 are swiched on again.
With water cooling the supervision of the conductivity is disabled for the time defined by par.
41.15 WtrPmpChangeMask after a change-over.
1st cycle start 1st cycle finished
Fan1/Pump 1 2nd cycle start
ON
OFF
Fan2/Pump 2
ON
OFF
6h 4h t
10h 10h
40.02 FAN1/PUMP1 RUN TIME
40.01 FAN/PUMP CYCLE TIME
Figure 41-1 Redundant Cooling System, Automatic Fan / Pump Change - Diagram

ABB
41.01 Fan/PumpCycleTime
Automatic Change Over Fan/Pump with Redundant Cooling System
With “Redundant Cooling System” (two fans or pumps are selected) the continuous operation of the
drive is guaranteed if a fan (air) or pump (water) failure occures. Switch-over from the faulty to the
stand-by device will take place automatically.
With the “Automatic change over” - function the cycle time and running time for both fans/pumps can be
set. If for example a cycle time of 10h and a Fan1/Pump1 run time of 6h is selected, Fan1/Pump1 will
run for 6 hours. Then they will be stopped and Fan2/Pump2 will run for 4h. After 4h Fan1/Pump1 are
swiched on again.
With water cooling the supervision of the conductivity is disabled for the time defined by par. 41.15
WtrPmpChangeMask after a change-over.
Figure 41 1 Redundant Cooling System, Automatic Fan / Pump Change - Diagram
This parameter defines the cycle time of the redundant cooling system.
Unit: h Type: R Min: 2 Max: 24 Def: 10 Int. scaling:1 == 1
41.02 Fan1/Pump1RunTime
Parameter defines the switch over time between Fan1 / Pump1 and Fan2 / Pump2.
Unit: h Type: R Min: 1 Max: 41.01 – Def: 6 Int. scaling:100 == 1h
1h
COOLING SYSTEM OFF DELAY

For cooling down the power system after switching off the MCB, the cooling system will not be switched off
immediately. Therefore the cooling system is running longer after switching of the MCB for a programmable time.
During this time the status “CoolOffDely” will be shown on Panel status (Par.: 8.10 DriveStatus).
Figure 41-2 Cooling System, Fan / Pump Off Delay - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 183/389

cooling system off comand,

Cooling
start of "OFF" - delay switch "OFF" - command
System
cooling Fan/Pump
On
Cooling System Cooling System

Running Off Delay Time
Off
t
s
41.20/28.04 PUMP/FAN OFF DELAY

default = 300s
Figure 41-3 Cooling System, Fan / Pump Off Delay - Diagram
41.03 AirCoolFanSel
This parameter activates the selected cooling fan in an air cooled drive. If parameter selection is set to
TWO (FAN1&2) the redundant cooling fan function is active. In case one of the fan is disturbed, the
other fan is switched on automatically.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 ONE (FAN 1) Cooling fan 1 is installed
2 ONE (FAN 2) Cooling fan 2 is installed (only with IOEC 3)
3 TWO (FAN12) Redundant cooling fans 1 2 are installed (only with IOEC 3)
41.04 FanAlarmReset
Resetting of an active fan ALARM.
Note!
Parameter will be set back automatically to OFF.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Fan alarm reset not active
1 RESET Reset command will be set
41.05 InvAirFilterSupvi
Parameter activates monitoring of air filter in an air cooled drive. If function is activated and digital input
signal is high, an ALARM will be generated. IOEC1 - DI09
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Air filter supervision function is disabled
1 ON Air filter supervision function is active

ABB
41.06 RedAuxFanInstall
This parameter activates the redundant auxiliary fan function. The selection is only possible in water
cooling unit and if Par.: 41.09 AMOUNT OF COOLING PUMP is set to “TWO (PUMP1&2)”. Hardware –
controlled relays, controls both aux. fans. Only trip and alarm signals are monitored by software. If this
parameter is set to “Yes” and one of the two aux. fans trips, only alarm will be set. If both aux. fans are
tripped, fault will be set and drive trips according to “Trip 1b” reaction. The function is only available if
IOEC4 – board is installed. 0 =NO Redundant aux. fan is not installed 1 = YES Redundant aux. fan is
installed
3 3 -K11 -K12
Pump 1 Pump 2
-Q13 -Q14
Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2
3 IOEC1
3 IOEC4
-DI3 -DI9
-K13 -K14 -Q13 -Q14
Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2
3 3
-K13 -K14
M M Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2
Normal Operation Aux. Fan 1 Faulty Aux. Fan 2 Faulty
-K11 -K12 -K11 -K12 -K11 -K12

Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
-Q13 -Q14 -Q13 -Q14 -Q13 -Q14

Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2
-K13 -K14 -K13 -K14 -K13 -K14

Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2
Figure 41-4 Redundant Auxiliary Cooling Fan - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 185/389

INTEGRATED TRANSFORMER FAN
The function of Integrated Transformer Fan has to be used if an integrated transformer is installed. The selection is
only possible if IOEC3-Board is installed. If function is activated, the Buchholz protection will be deactivated (see group
36.05 Trafo Buchholz Protection). To protect the Transformer against overheating, parameter 36.02 Trafo Temp
Protection AI will be fixed set to “SOFTSTOP” and parameter 81.04 AI1 MINIMUM IO4 to “4 mA”.
Note!
If one or both (in redundant trafo fan control) fan(s) has (have) tripped only an Alarm will be set. There is no trip
supervison for integrated transformer fan.
In tegrated Trafo Fan
Option
IntegTrafoFanInst
41.07
NO
ONE (FAN1)
1 ONE (FAN2)
TWO (FAN1&2)
IntTrafFan1 Alarm
9.55
> AW2 / Bit 05
Automatic Change
Over Function / IntTrafoFan1Trip Fan1
Supervision 8.01
AirCoolingFanSel (DI4 - IOEC3)
41.03 MSW / Bit 07
(TWO(FAN1&2) IntTrafoFanReset
41.08
IntegTrafoFanInst Auto Chg Active
41.07 >
(TWO(FAN1&2)
WtrCoolingP umpSel IntTrafFan2 Alarm
41.09 9.55
(TWO(PUMP1&2)
ActRunTimeFan1/Pump1
> AW2 / Bit 06
Fan1/Pump1
5.15
Fan/PumpCycleTime ActRunTimeFan2/Pump2 / IntTrafoFan2Trip Fan2
41.01 5.16 Supervision 8.01
(DI5 - IOEC3)
Fan1/Pump1RunTime Fan 2/Pump2 Fan1/Pump1OrderOn MSW / Bit 07
41.02 IntTrafoFanReset
Fan2/Pump2OrderOn 41.08
IntTrafFan1Order On
DO5 - IOEC3
IntTrafFan1 &
& > Alarm
5.14
IntTrafFan2 Alarm & ActRunTrafoFan
IntTrafFan2Order On
DO6 - IOEC3
IntTrafFan2 &
&
> Alarm
5.14
IntTrafFan1 Alarm & ActRunTrafoFan
Figure 41 5 Integrated Transformer Fan - Overview
41.07 IntegTrafoFanInst
This parameter activates the integrated transformer function. Depending on the installed fans the
parameter has to be set to the correct value; not available with ACS 1000i.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO Integrated transformer fan is not installed, function is not active
2 ONE (FAN 1) Integrated transformer cooling fan 1 is installed, function is active
3 ONE (FAN 2) Integrated transformer cooling fan 2 is installed, function is active
4 TWO Integrated transformer cooling fans 12 are installed, redundant function is
(FAN12) active
41.08 TrafoFanAlmReset
Resetting of an active integrated transformer fan ALARM; not available with ACS 1000i.
Note!
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Fan alarm reset not active

ABB
INVERTER AIR COOLING TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION
To protect the ACS 1000 (IGCTs, diodes, choke etc.) against overheating the air cooling temperature inside the cubicle
is monitored.
Note: For security reason the auto-cooling is only started with open ground switch (doors closed).
Figure 41-6 Air Cooling System, Temperature Supervision – Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 187/389

Cooling Air Temperature

°C
Air Temperature Trip Level

(Par.: 41.19 = 55°C)
Hysteresis (5°C)
Air Temperature Alarm Level

(Par.: 41.18 = 45°C)
Air Temp. Auto-Cool Level Hysteresis (5°C)
(Par.: 41.18 - 2°C = 43°C)
Hysteresis (1°C)
Air Temperature Low Trip 0
(fixed = -0.5°C)
Time
Trip "Inverter Air Temperature"; ACS1000 switch on prevented s
Trip "Inverter Air Temperature" reset possible; ACS1000 is ready to switch on
Auto-cooling on (MCB off, aux. power external)
Warning -> Inverter Air Temperature to high
Trip -> Inverter Air Temperature to high
Trip reset possible -> Inverter Air Temperature to high
Warning disapear -> Inverter Air Temperature to high

Auto-cooling off
Figure 41 7 Air Cooling System, Temperature Supervision - Diagram

ABB
INVERTER AIR COOLING DIFFERENCE PRESSURE SUPERVISION
To protect the ACS 1000 (IGCTs, diodes, choke etc.) against overheating the air-cooling temperature inside the cubicle
and the air flow/pressure is monitored. Therefore a pressure differential sensor is installed in the control box to measure
the pressure between control box and power part of the inverter.
In case of the ACS 1000i the air pressure across the inverter (fan group 1/3 ) and the transformer (fan group 2/4 ) is
monitored.
Pressure transducers –B5261 and in case of ACS1000i –B5262 monitor the air pressure (connected to DI3 on IOEC1).
The following figure shows only the difference pressure for ACS 1000 (ACS 1000i not shown).
AIR PRESSURE
SUPERVISION
Trip Delay
Air Difference Pressure

Air Press Trip Delay
Digital Input
DI3 - IOEC1 Note!
Default: 5s AIR PRESSURE FAIL Supervision signal during
41.21 ON DELAY fan start, change over
fans (Redundant Cooling
System) and normal run!
B1
ControlBox
WR
P
p < - 250 Pa
Cooling Air Difference Pressure FAN
Figure 41-8 Air Cooling System, Pressure Supervision – Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 189/389

Single and Redundant Cooling Fan System:

ABB
Cooling Air Pressure
Pa
DI3 - IOEC
Cooling Air Pressure
Pa 0
DI3 - IOEC
Air differential -
Air differential- pressure sensor
pressure sensor
"Air diff pressure to low
Trip "Air diff pressure to low
"Air pressure to low " => Start "Fail On Delay
Warning "Air pressure to low " (

MSAI5150 ACS1000 Warning "Air pressure
191/389 to low
Figure 41-9 Air Cooling System, Pressure Supervision - Diagram
41.09 WtrCoolPumpSel
This parameter activates the selected water cooling pump in a water cooled drive. If parameter is
selected to TWO (PUMP 1 and 2) the redundant water cooling pump function is active. In case one of
the pump is disturbed, the other pump is switched on automatically.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 ONE (PUMP 1) Water cooling pump 1 is installed
2 ONE (PUMP 2) Water cooling pump 2 is installed
3 TWO (PUMP 1 and 2) Redundant water cooling pump is installed (Pump 1 2)
41.10 PumpAlarmReset
Resetting of an active pump ALARM.
Note!
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Pump alarm reset not active

ABB
AUTO COOLING CONTROL WITH WATER COOLING SYSTEM
The water conductivity increases if water cooling pumps have been switched off for a longer time (after switching off the
MCB). To avoid a long waiting time until the MCB can be switched on again, it is necessary to bring the water
conductivity down into the allowed operating range. Therefore the “Auto cooling control” - function can be used. It can
be enabled with par. 41.16 WtrAutoCoolMode.
Function!
If water conductivity is above the value of par. 41.17 WtrAutoCoolStCond the “Auto Cooling On Delay”- time (par. 41.11
AutoCoolOnDelay) is started. The waiting time before the auto cooling sequence will be started can be seen on the
panel at Par. 5.17 AutoCoolWaitTime (counting down to zero!). After cooling on delay time has been exceeded cooling
pump 1 will start automatically. On the Panel the drive status “AutoCoolOn” will be shown (Par.: 8.10 DriveStatusWord).
Water conductivity starts to decrease and if conductivity is below alarm limit the auto cooling sequence will stop (drive
status “AutoCoolOn” disappears) and the pump off delay time (Par.: 41.20 Pump Off Delay) starts. During this time the
status “CoolOffDely” will be shown on panel status (Par.: 8.10 DriveStatus). After exceeding cooling off delay time
pump 1 will stop. Water conductivity starts to increase again. If water conductivity is above alarm limit the auto cooling
sequence starts again but this time with starting of pump 2.
Note!
The auto cooling system is always alternating between cooling pump 1 and pump 2, if parameter 41.09 Water
CoolingPumpSelection is set to “TWO(Pump12) otherwise only selected pump (Pump1 or Pump2) will start. The “Auto
cooling start sequence” will not be started if parameter 41.11 AutoCoolOnDelay is set to ZERO.
Water
Cooling On Delay "Start"
Conductivity
us Cooling Pump 1 "ON"
Cooling Pump Off delay "ON"
Cooling Pump 1 "OFF"
Cooling On Delay "Start"

41.11 41.20
Cooling Pump 2 "ON"
Cooling Pump Off delay "ON"
Trip Level Cooling Pump 2 "OFF"

41.27
Alarm Level
41.26
WtrAutoCoolStCond
41.17
Pump 1
ON
OFF
t
Pump 2 Auto Cooling Pump 1 On

ON
OFF
t
Auto Cooling Pump 2 On

Figure 41 10 Water Cooling System, Auto Cooling Sequence - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 193/389

41.11 AutoCoolOnDelay
Parameter defines the time delay for the automatic cooling system on command.If the MCB
is open and the actual water conductivity is higher than the ALARM limit the automatic
cooling sequence will be started. The cooling pump will be switched on automatically after
the AUTO COOL ON DELAY time has elapsed. In the drive status word the message
“AUTO COOLING” will be displayed (an alarm will not be generated).
Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3600 Def: 120 Int. scaling:1 == 1min

ABB
START SEQUENCE OF REDUNDANT WATER COOLING SYSTEM
The water conductivity increases if drive has been switched off for a longer time. Therefore it is necessary to bring the
water conductivity down into the allowed operating range before the drive can be started again. To avoid a trip after the
automatic switch over function changes to pump 2 (see Figure 41 1), it is helpful to check the water conductivity in
pump 2 systems as well.
Function!
If water conductivity is above alarm limit after initialisation, pump 2 will be started immediately to bring down the water
conductivity. On the Panel the drive status “StartSeqOn” will be shown (Par.: 8.10 DriveStatusWord). After water
conductivity is below alarm limit the 1st delay time of 15s is started and if time is over without reaching the alarm limit
again the cooling system will be switched over to pump1. After pump1 has started it could be that the water conductivity
is bad again (from pump1 system, pipe …) and the alarm level will be exceeded. After water conductivity is below
alarm limit the 2nd delay time of 15s is started and if time is over without reaching the alarm limit again, the drive status
changes to “RdyForMCB On” and the “Start Sequence” is swiched off.
Note!
The “Start Sequence” will not be started if water conductivity is below alarm limit after switching on the auxiliary power.
Therefore Pump1 will start immediately.
Aux. Power On
Water
Start of 15s delay time
Cond uctivity Init Done
us
Pump change over
Start of 15s delay time

Drive Start allowed
Trip Level
Alarm Level
Pump 1
ON
OFF
Pump 2
ON
OFF
Cooling Pump "Start sequence"

Figure 41-11 Redundant Water Cooling System, Start Sequence - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 195/389

41.12 WtrCoolStartSeq
Selection of redundant cooling system start sequence function. This function can only be selected if
ACS1000 is a water cooled system and parameter 41.09 AMOUNT OF WATER COOLING PUMPS is
set to “TWO (PUMP1&2)”.¨
Note!
If start sequence is active the drive is not ready for closing the MCB.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Redundant water cooling system start sequence is not active
1 ON Redundant water cooling system start sequence is active
INVERTER WATER VALVE CONTROL

The cooling system is controlled and monitored by the ACS 1000. Water conductivity, temperature and pressure of the
cooling water in the main cooling circuit and the level in the expansion tank are monitored.
The motor valve in the raw water circuit is closed or opened depending on the temperature of the main cooling circuit.
Due to different water valves and valve motors the parameter has to be set to the right value (normally done by loading
package).
Figure Valve and Motor type

ABB
Figure 41-12 Water Cooling System, Control Valve - Overview
41.13 WtrValvePulseIntv [s*C]

Parameter defines the “Lifting height” - value of the installed water valve (see ). Note! This parameter
can only be changed by service.
Unit: mm Type: R Min: 1 Max: 50 Def: 10 Int. scaling:1 == 1 mm
41.14 WtrValvePulseWidth [s/C]

Parameter defines the “Motor lift” - value of the installed water valve motor (see Table 41-1). Note! This
parameter can only be changed by service.
Unit: s/mm Type: R Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1
s/mm
41.15 WtrPmpChangeMask [s]

Water cooling system. Masking (supervision disabling) time for the internal cooling water conductivity
supervision after the pump change-over. The conductivity supervision is released earlier if the actual
conductivity value after the pump changeover is below the alarm level (parameter 190.09
InvWtrCondAlmLev).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 197/389

41.16 WtrAutoCoolMode
Water cooling system. Selection of pump auto cooling mode.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 RUN Water cooling pumps are running unless there is a pump related fault.
ALWAYS
2 AUTOM Pumps will be stopped after the off delay time is over (defined by
OFF parameter 190.03 PumpOffDelay). The off delay time starts as soon the
MCB is open.
3 AUTOM Auto cooling control is active (see Figure 41 10).
OFF ON

ABB
41.17 WtrAutoCoolStCond [uS]
Water cooling system. Parameter defines the water conductivity value when the automatic cooling sequence
will be started (see Figure 41 10).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 199/389

4.03 WATER PRESSURE 1
WATER PRESSURE SUPERVISI ON
SCALING Alarm High
Water Outp. Press.
Water Pressure 1 High Alarm
(4...20 mA = AI I
I > = H1
0...6.0bar) Limit H1
0.05bar HHyst
Default: 6bar
Default:
Default: 0bar 5.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
13.36 AI3 LowValue IO1 41.35 ALARM LEVE L HIGH
Default: 4mA
WATER PRESSURE 1 WATER PRESSURE 1
Default: 0.1s SUPERVISI ON SUPERVISION
13.38 AI3 Filter IO1 Trip High Trip High Delay Fix
Default: 0mA Water Outp. Press. Water Outp. Press.
13.39 AI3 Offset IO1
High Trip High Trip Delayed
AI I
WATER PRESSURE I > = H2
SUPERVISI ON Limit H2
Measuremen t Lost
0.05bar HHyst
Water Press. 1
MeasLost Default:
AI I 6 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE
2s
I < = L1 (AI3 - IOEC1 < 3mA) 41.36 TRIP LEVEL HIGH FAIL ON FIX DELAY
3mA L1
Ana logue Input

WATER PRESS DIFF
AI3 - IOEC1
SUPERVISI ON
Alarm High
Water Diff. Press.

AI I High Alarm
I > = H1
B11 B13 B12 Limit H1
P T Q 0.05bar H1 Hyst
I I I
V5 Default:
TO CO NV ERTER 4.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.37 ALARM LEVE L HIGH
PART OF
WATER CO OLING SYSTEM
FLOW DIAGRAM WATER PRESS DIFF
(see Figure 41-7) SUPERVISI ON
Alarm L ow
Water Diff. Press.

AI I Low Alarm
I < = L1
Limit L1
0.05bar L1 Hyst
Default:
2 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.38 ALARM LEVE L LOW
80.20 WATER PRESS DIFF WATER PRESSURE 1

SUPERVISI ON SUPERVISION
Trip Lo w Trip Delay Var
+ Water Diff. Press. Water Diff. Press.
Water Press. Diff. Low Trip Low Trip Delayed
AI I
I < = L2
Limit L2
- Note!
0.05bar L2 Hyst Supervision signal during
Default: pump start and change
Default:
2.5 s over pumps (Redundant
1.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.22 WTR PRESSURE
41.39 TRIP LEVEL LOW FAIL ON DELAY Cooling System)
WATER PRESSURE 1
SUPERVISION
Trip Delay Fix
Water Diff. Press.
Low Trip Delayed
following supervisions
only active with closed
cooling system:
Note!
41.34 80.19 WATER PRESSURE 2 Supervision signal during
SUPERVISI ON
open cool. system Alarm High 0.5 s
WTR PRESSURE normal run!
FAIL ON FIX DELAY
0 Water Inp. Press.
High Alarm
AI I
closed cool. system I > = H1
Water Pressure 2 Limit H1
0.05bar HHyst
Water Pressure Input

(4...20 mA = Default:
0...6.0bar) 2.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.40 ALARM LEVE L HIGH
WATER PRESSURE
SCALING
Trip High Trip High Delay Fix
Water Inp. Press. Water Inp. Press.
AI I
I > = H2
Default: 6bar AI4 HighValue IO3 Limit H2
81.20
0.05bar HHyst
Default: 0bar AI4 LowValue IO3
81.21
Default:
Default: 4mA 3.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE
81.22 AI4 Minimum IO3 41.41 5s
FAIL ON FIX DELAY
TRIP LEVEL HIGH
Default: 0.1s AI4 Filter IO3
81.23
WATER PRESSURE 2
Default: 0mA AI4 Offset IO3 SUPERVISI ON
81.25 Alarm L ow
WATER PRESSURE Water Inp. Press.

SUPERVISI ON Low Alarm
Measuremen t Lost AI I
I < = L1
Limit L1
Water Press. 2
MeasLost 0.05bar LHyst
AI I
I < = L1 (AI4 - IOEC3 < 3mA)
3mA L1 Default:
Ana logue Input 0.2 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.42 ALARM LEVE L LOW
AI4 - IOEC3

Trip Lo w Trip Low Delay Fix
Low Trip Low Trip Delayed
AI I
I < = L2
Limit L2
0.05bar LHyst
Default:
0.1 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE
41.43 1s
TRIP LEVEL LOW FAIL ON FIX DELAY
Figure Inverter Water Cooling Pressure Supervision
Unit: us Type: R Min: -5 Max: 5 Def: 0.4 Int. scaling:100 == 1uS

ABB
41.18 InvAirTmpAlmLevel [C]
Inverter air temperature alarm level. When the measured air temperature (ADCVI or IOEC1-AI2,
selected with 41.29) rises above this limit an alarm signal will be generated.Note: The default value
depends on the inverter type.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 69 °C Def: 45…66 Int. scaling:1==1°C
°C
41.19 InvAirTmpTripLev [C]

Inverter air temperature trip level. When the measured air temperature (ADCVI or IOEC1-AI2,
selected with 41.29) rises above this limit a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be
stopped.Note: The default value depends on the inverter type.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 72°C Def: 55...71 °C Int. scaling:1== 1°C
41.20 Pump/Fan OffDelay [s]

Delay time to switch off the pump when the MCB is open.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 900s Def: 300s Int. scaling:1000==1s
41.21 AirPresFailOnDela [s]

Delay time for air pressure fail use. If the pressure drops below the minimum limit, the delay time will be
started. If the pressure does not come back during this time, an alarm/fault signal will be generated and
the drive will be stopped.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 20s Def: 5s Int. scaling:1000== 1s
41.22 WtrPresFailOnDela [s]

Delay time for water pressure fail. If the pressure drops under the minimum limit, the delay time will be
started. If the pressure didn’t come back during this time, an alarm/fault signal will be generated and the
drive will be stopped.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 4s Def: 2.5s Int. scaling:1000== 1s
41.23 InvWtrTmpAlmLevel [C]

Inverter water temperature alarm level. When measured water temperature value rises above this limit
an alarm signal will be generated. (AI2 – IOEC1)
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 59 °C Def: 39 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1°C
41.24 InvWtrTmpTripLev [C]

Inverter water temperature trip level. When measured water temperature rises above this limit a trip
signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped (AI2 - IOEC1).
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 60°C Def: 41°C Int. scaling:1 = 1°C
41.25 InvWtrTmpPumpOn [C]

Inverter water temperature pump on level. When the measured water temperature drops below this limit
the pump will be switched on automatically to increase the water temperature before the drive is started.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 2°C Max: 60°C Def: 15°C Int. scaling:1 = °C
41.26 InvWtrCondAlmLev [uS]

Inverter water conductivity indication. When measured water conductivity rises above this limit, an alarm
signal will be activated (analogue input AI4 - IOEC1).
Unit: uS Type: R Min: 0uS Max: 1.8uS Def: 0.5uS Int. scaling:1 = 1uS
41.27 InvWtrCondTripLev [uS]

Inverter water conductivity indication. When measured water conductivity rises above this limit, a trip
signal will be activated after a delay of 30 min. and the drive will be stopped (analogue input AI4 -
IOEC1).
Unit: uS Type: R Min: 0uS Max: 1.9uS Def: 0,7uS Int. scaling:1 = 1uS
MSAI5150 ACS1000 201/389

41.28 RefWtrTemperature [C]
Inverter water temperature reference value.
Default value depends on type code pos. 11: max. raw water temperature + 2 °C.When the reference
value was reached once after starting and then drops more than 5 °C an alarm is generated.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 5°C Max: 50°C Def: 30°C Int. scaling:1 =1°C
41.29 InvAirTempSelect
This parameter selects the input signal for the inverter air temperature supervision.Only air cooled
type!
NAME VALUE MEANING
InvAirTmp1 1
InvAirTmp2 2
InvAirTmp12 3
41.30 InvWtrTmpPmpOffLo [C]

Inverter water temperature pump off low level. When the measured water temperature drops below this
limit the pump will be switched off automatically, because the cooling water is freezing.The pump will
be switched on as soon as the temp. is 1 °C above the limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0.1 °C Max: min (10 Def: 2°C Int. scaling:10 = 1°C
°C, 41.25 - 1
°C)
41.31 InvWtrTmpPmpOffHi [C]

Inverter water temperature pump off high level. When the measured water temperature rises above this
limit the pump will be switched off automatically.The pump will be switched on as soon as the temp. is
10 °C below the limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 41.24 + 4°C Max: 99 °C Def: 60°C Int. scaling:10 = 1°C
41.32 InvWtrTmpDeadBand [C]

Reserved for future use!This parameter defines the dead band value for the measured internal
cooling water temperature, used for the internal cooling water temperature control. The external
cooling water motor valve control is based on this internal cooling water temperature measurement.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10°C Def: 0.5°C Int. scaling:10==1°C
41.33 WtrCoolSysLeakage
Liquid leakage sensor selection.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 0
YES 1
Unit: - Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1
41.34 WtrCoolSysClosed
Selection of the closed water cooling system. This system needs the second water pressure
measurement (input pressure) on IOEC3, AI4.
NOTE!
If Yes is selected, par 81.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 4 ‘CoolWtrPres2’.Enabling is only possible for
water cooled types when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35.11), the load bearing
temp. 2 (35.17), the outside air temp. (37.04) and the output trafo temp. (36.12) are disabled.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO Open water cooling system
1 YES Closed water cooling system
Unit: - Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1

ABB
41.35 WtrPres1AlmLevHi [b]
Inverter water pressure 1 in the cooling system (analogue input AI3 - IOEC1), high alarm limit.When
the pressure rises above this limit, an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.
Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0.1 Max: 5.9 Def: 5.5 Int. scaling:100==1bar
41.36 WtrPres1TripLevHi [b]

Inverter water pressure 1 in the cooling system (analogue input AI3 - IOEC1), high trip limit.When the
pressure rises above this limit, after a delay of 2s a trip signal is activated and the drive will stop.
41.37 WtrPresDifAlmHi [b]

Inverter water difference pressure (pressure 1 – pressure 2) high alarm level. If the water pressure
difference rises above this limit an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.
Note!This parameter is only active with closed cooling system (parameter 41.34 = YES).
41.38 WtrPresDifAlmLo [b]

Inverter water difference pressure (pressure 1 – pressure 2) low alarm level. If the water pressure
difference sinks below this limit an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.
Note!
If water pressure sinks below this limit with redundant cooling pumps, the pump will be changed. In
addition an alarm will be generated, and after resetting the alarm the faulty pump will be selected
again.If parameter 41.34 is set to NO the input pressure is zero (diff. pressure = output pressure).
Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0.1 Max: 5.9 Def: 2 Int. scaling:100==1bar
41.39 WtrPresDifTripLo [b]

Inverter water difference pressure (pressure 1 – pressure 2) low trip level. If the water pressure
difference sinks below this limit after the delay WtrPresFailOnDel (par. 41.22) a trip signal is
activated and the drive will stop.
Note!If parameter 41.34 is set to NO the input pressure is zero (diff. pressure = output pressure).
41.40 WtrPres2AlmLevHi [b]

Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 - IOEC3), high
alarm limit.
When the pressure rises above this limit, an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.
41.41 WtrPres2TripLevHi [b]

Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 - IOEC3), high
trip limit.
When the pressure rises above this limit, after a delay of 5s a trip signal is activated and the drive will
stop.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 203/389

41.42 WtrPres2AlmLevLo [b]
Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 - IOEC3), low
alarm limit.
When the pressure sinks below this limit, an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.
41.43 WtrPres2TripLevLo [b]

Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 - IOEC3), low trip
limit.
When the pressure sinks below this limit, after a delay of 1s a trip signal is activated and the drive will
stop.

ABB
INVERTER WATER COOLING PRESSURE SUPERVISION
To protect the ACS1000 against water flow inside the cubicle (leakage) and overheating of power components
(IGCTs, diodes, choke etc.) the water pressure is monitored.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 205/389

4.03 WATER PRESSURE 1
WATE R PRESSURE SUPERVISION
SCALING Ala rm High
Water Outp. Press.
Water Pressure 1 High Alarm
(4...20 mA = AI I
I > = H1
0...6.0b ar) Limit H1
0.05bar HHyst
Default: 6bar
Default:
Default: 0bar 5.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
13.36 AI3 LowValue IO1 41.35 ALARM L EVE L HIG H
Default: 4mA
WATER PRESSURE 1 WATE R PRESSURE 1
Default: 0.1s SUPERVISION SUPE RVISI ON
13.38 AI3 Filter IO1 Trip High Trip High Delay Fix
Default: 0mA Water Outp. Press. Water Outp. Press.
13.39 AI3 Offset IO1
AI I
WATE R PRESSURE I > = H2
SUPERVISION Limit H2
Measurement Lost HHyst
0.05bar
Water Press. 1
MeasLost Default:
AI I 6 b ar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE
I < = L1 (AI3 - IOEC1 < 3mA) 41.36 2s
T RIP LEVEL HIGH FAIL O N F IX DELAY
3mA L1
Ana log ue Input
WATER PRESSURE DIFF
AI3 - IOEC1 SUPERVISION
Ala rm High
Water Diff. Press.

AI I High Alarm
I > = H1
P T Q 0.05bar H1 Hyst
I I I
V5 Default:
TO CONV ERTER 4.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.37 ALARM L EVE L HIG H
PART OF
WATE R COOLING SY STEM
FLOW DIAGRAM WATER PRESSURE DIFF
(see Figure 41-7) SUPERVISION
Alarm Low
Water Diff. Press.

AI I Low Alarm
I < = L1
Limit L1
0.05bar L1 Hyst
Default:
2 b ar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.38 ALARM L EVE L LOW
80.20 WATER PRESSURE DIFF WATE R PRESSURE 1

SUPE RVISI ON SUPE RVISI ON
Trip Lo w Trip Delay Var
+ Water Diff. Press. Water Diff. Press.
Water Press. Diff. Low Trip Low Trip Delayed
AI I
I < = L2
Limit L2
- Note!
0.05bar L2 Hyst Supervision signal during
D efault: pump start and change
Default: 2.5 s
1.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.22 WTR PRESSURE over pumps (Redundant
41.39 T RIP LEVEL LOW FAIL O N DELAY Cooling System)
WATE R PRESSURE 1
SUPE RVISI ON
Trip Delay Fix
Water Diff. Press.
Low Trip Delayed
following supervisions
only active with closed
cooling system:
Note!
41.34 80.19 WATER PRESSURE 2 Supervision signal during
SUPERVISION
open cool. system Ala rm High 0.5 s
WTR PRESSURE normal run!
FAIL O N F IX DELAY
0 Water Inp. Press.
High Alarm
AI I
closed cool. system I > = H1
Water Pressure 2 Limit H1
0.05bar HHyst
Water Pressure Input

(4...20 mA = Default:
0...6.0b ar) 2.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.40 ALARM L EVE L HIG H
WATE R PRESSURE
SCALING
SUPERVISION SUPE RVISI ON
Trip High Trip High Delay Fix
AI I
I > = H2
Default: 6bar AI4 HighValue IO3 Limit H2
81.20
0.05bar HHyst
Default: 0bar AI4 LowValue IO3
81.21
Default:
Default: 4mA 3.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE
81.22 AI4 Minimum IO3 41.41 5s
FAIL O N F IX DELAY
T RIP LEVEL HIGH
Default: 0.1s AI4 Filter IO3
81.23
WATER PRESSURE 2
Default: 0mA AI4 Offset IO3 SUPERVISION
81.25 Alarm Low
WATE R PRESSURE Water Inp. Press.

SUPERVISION Low Alarm
Measurement Lost AI I
I < = L1
Limit L1
Water Press. 2
MeasLost 0.05bar LHyst
AI I
I < = L1 (AI4 - IOEC3 < 3mA)
3mA L1 Default:
Ana log ue Input 0.2 bar INV WTR PRESS URE
41.42 ALARM L EVE L LOW
AI4 - IOEC3

SUPERVISION SUPE RVISI ON
Trip Low Trip Low Delay Fix
Low Trip Low Trip Delayed
AI I
I < = L2
Limit L2
0.05bar LHyst
Default:
0.1 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE
41.43 1s
T RIP LEVEL LOW FAIL O N F IX DELAY
Figure 41-13 Water Cooling System, Pressure Supervision – Overview

ABB
Cooling Water Pressure, Output / Diff.
bar
Output Pressure Trip High Level

(Par.: 41.36 = 6.0 bar) Hysteresis (0.05bar)
Output Pressure Alarm High Level
Difference Pressure Alarm High Level
Difference Pressure Alarm Low Level Hysteresis (0.05bar)

(Par.: 41.38 = 2.0 bar)
Difference Pressure Trip Low Level Hysteresis (0.05bar)
(Par.: 41.39 = 1.5 bar)
Time
s
Warning -> Difference pressure too low Warning disappears -> Difference pressure too high
Trip -> Difference pressure too low (0.5s / 190.05 delayed) Warning disappears -> Output pressure too high
Trip reset possible -> Difference pressure too low Trip reset possible -> Output pressure too high
Warning disappears -> Difference pressure too low Trip -> Output pressure too high (2s delayed)
Warning -> Output pressure too high
Warning -> Difference pressure too high
Figure 41-14 Water Cooling System, Ouput / Difference Pressure Supervision - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 207/389

Cooling Water Pressure, Input Only Closed Cooling System

bar
Input Pressure Trip High Level

Input Pressure Alarm High Level

Input Pressure Alarm Low Level Hysteresis (0.05bar)

(Par.: 41.42 = 0.2bar)
Input Pressure Trip Low Level Hysteresis (0.05bar)

(Par.: 41.43 = 0.1bar)
Time
s
Warning -> Input pressure too low Warning disappears -> Input pressure too high
Trip -> Input pressure too low (1s delayed ) Trip reset possible -> Input pressure too high
Trip reset possible -> Input pressure too low Trip -> Input pressure too high (5s delayed )
Warning disappears -> Input pressure too low Warning -> Input pressure too high
Figure 41-15 Water Cooling System, Input Pressure Supervision - Diagram

ABB
INVERTER WATER COOLING TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION
To protect the power components of ACS1000 (IGCTs, diodes, choke etc.) against overheating the water temperature
is monitored.
WATER TEMPERATURE
WATER TE MPERATURE SUPERVISION
SCALING Alarm
ACT Water Temperature

AI I Water Temperature Alarm
(4...20 mA = 0...100°C) I > = H2
Limit H2
Default: 100°C 4.02 1°C H2 Hyst

13.30 AI2 HighValue I O1
Default: 0°C Default: 39°C
13.31 AI2 LowValue IO1 41.23 INV WTR TEMP
ALARM LEVEL
Default: 4mA
WATER TEMPERATURE
Default: 0.5s SUPERVISION
13.33 AI2 Filter IO1
Auto. Cooling
Default: 0mA
13.34 AI2 Offset I O1
WATER TE MPERATURE
AI I Auto. Cooling Pump On
I > = H1
SUPERVISI ON Limit H1
Measurement Lost
1 °C H1 Hyst
AI I Water Temp MeasLost INV WTR TEMP

3mA L1
I < = L1
(AI2 - IOEC1 < 3mA) 2°C
- AUTOCOO L LEVEL
Ana logue Input
AI2 - IOEC1 WATER TEMPERATURE
SUPERVISION
Trip
AI I Water Temperature High Trip

I > = H3
P T Q 1°C H3 Hyst
I I I
V5
TO CO NVERTER Default: 41°C
41.24 INV WTR TEMP
PART OF TRIP LEVEL
WATER COOLING SYSTEM
FLOW DIAGRAM WATER TEMPERATURE
(see Figure 41-7) SUPERVISION
Low Trip
AI I Water Temperature Low Trip

I < = L1
Limit L1
(Aut o.Cooling P ump On)
1°C L1 Hyst
Default: 15°C INV WTR TEMP

41.25 PUMP ON
WATER TEMPERATURE
SUPERVISION
Low Trip
AI I Water Temperature Low Trip

I < = L2
Limit L2
(Pump Off)
1°C L2 Hyst

41.30 PUMP OFF
WATER TEMPERATURE
SUPERVISION
High Trip
AI I Water Temperature High Trip

I > = H1
Limit H1
(Pump Off)
10°C H1 Hyst

41.31 PUMP OFF
Figure 41-16 Water Cooling System, Temperature Supervision - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 209/389

Cooling Water Temperature Internal

°C
Temperature Pump Off High Lev.
(Par.: 41.31 = 60°C)
Hysteresis (10°C)
Temperature Trip Level

(Par.: 41.24 = 41°C)
Hysteresis (1°C)
Temperature Alarm Level

(Par.: 41.23 = 39°C)
Hysteresis (1°C)
Hysteresis (1°C)
Temperature Pump On Level
(Par.: 41.25 = 15°C)
Hysteresis (1°C)
Temperature Pump Off Low Lev.
(Par.: 41.30 = 2°C)
Time
Trip, Pump ON -> Water temperature too low s
Pump OFF
Pump ON
Trip reset possible -> Water temperature too low,
Pump OFF (depends on autocooling setting)
Warning -> Water temperature too high
Trip -> Water temperature too high
Pump OFF
Pump ON
Trip reset possible -> Water temperature too high
Warning disappears -> Water temperature too high
Figure 41-17 Water Cooling System, Temperature Supervision - Diagram

ABB
INVERTER WATER COOLING CONDUCTIVITY SUPERVISION
To protect the ACS1000 power components (IGCTs, diodes, choke etc.) against flash over the water cunductivity inside
the water cooling system is monitored.
Function not included in the picture:
During 5 minutes after switching the MCB on the inverter conductivity alarm and trip thresholds are set to 1.5 mS. That
is to avoid erroneous alarm or trip messages when the cooling pump starts to run.
WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY
WATER CONDUCTIVITY
SUPE RVISI ON SUPE RVISION
SCALING
Auto Cooling On Auto Cooling On
Auto.
Cooling
ACT Water Conductivity On
AI I
(4...20 mA = 0,05...2,0us) I >= H1
Limit H1
4.04
0,1us H1 Hyst
Default: 2us
Default: 0.05us Default: 0,4us INV WTR COND AUTO COOLING ON
13.41 AI4 Low Value IO1 41.17 AUTO COOL LE VEL DELAY
Default: 4mA
13.42 AI4 Minimum IO1 Default: 2h
Default: 30s 41.08
13.43 AI4 Filter IO1
Default: 0mA WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY
13.44 AI4 Offs et IO1 SUPE RVISI ON
Alarm
WATER CONDUCTIVITY
SUPERVISI ON Water Conductivity Alarm
Measurement Lost AI I
I > = H1
Limit H1
Water Cond MeasLost
0,1us H1 Hyst
AI I (AI4-IOEC1 < 3mA)
I < = L1
3mA L1
Default: 0,5us INV WTR COND
Ana logue Input 41.26 ALARM LEVE L
AI4 - IOEC1
WATER CO NDUCTIVITY WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY

SUPE RVISI ON SUPE RVISI ON
Trip Trip Delay Water
Water
Conductivity Conductivity
B11 B13 B12 Trip Delayed
AI I
Trip
P T Q
I I I I > = H1
Limit H1
V5
TO CO NV ERTER 0,1us H1 Hyst
PART OF Default:
W ATE R CO OLING SY STEM 0,7us
FLOW DIAGRAM INV WTR COND TRIP INV WTR COND TRIP
41.27 30 min
(see Figure 41 -7) LEVEL FIX DELAY
Figure 41-18 Water Cooling System, Conductivity Supervision - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 211/389

Cooling Water Conductivity

uS
Conductivity Trip Level
(Par.: 41.27 = 0.7uS)
Hysteresis (0,1us)
Conductivity Alarm Level

(Par.: 41.26 = 0.5uS)
Hysteresis (0,1us)
WtrAutoCoolStCond
(Par.: 41.17 = 0.4uS)
Time
Start Autocooling when MCB open and enabled with par. 41.16 s
Warning -> Water conductivity to high

Trip -> Water conductivity to high (30min delayed)
Trip reset possible -> Water conductivity to high

Warning disapears -> Water conductivity to high
Figure 41-19 Water Cooling System, Conductivity Supervision - Diagram

ABB
WATER COOLING STATE MACHINE
MSAI5150 ACS1000 213/389

MCB On
Drive Alarm
MCB Off
MCB Control
Reset
MCB Open
Drive Trip Feedback
1b
Closed
Autoc ooling
On Delay
Delay Reset Pum p Off Bypass

Auto Cooling
Delay Pump On
Water Cooling Redundant

System
Single
Pu mp2
Pu mp Selection
Pump1
Pump1 Pump2
Yes Tripped Yes Tripped
NO NO
Pump1 Pump2
Start Star t
Pump
Running
Trip
Water Pressu re
OK
Delay Time Delay Time
Pump Start Pu mp Run
Trip Trip
Trip Water Alarm

T empera ture
LOW
Trip Water Alarm

T empera ture
HIGH
OK
Trip Water Alarm

Conductivity
OK
Reset
Drive
Ready to Start
Figure 41-20 Single Water Cooling System - State Machine

ABB
WATER COOLING STATE MACHINE
Water Coolin g
System
Single
Redundant
Cooling Off
Seq Start
On
On
Pu mp Auto
Ch an ge Off
High Pump Co unter Reset

Con ductivity
Interval Time
OK
Co oling Pump1 Off Pump2 Off

Seq Finished Run Time Run Time
On On
Reset Reset
Alarm Trip
Alarm Trip
Pump1 Pump2
On Command On Command
Yes Yes
1st Alar m 1st Alar m
Pump1 2nd Pump2 2nd

Pum p1 Yes Pump2 Yes
Tripped Trip Tripped Trip
Tripped Tripped
No No
Tripped 1st
Alarm
nd
2 Trip
1st Alar m
Tripped
2nd Trip
1st Alarm 1st Alar m
Pump1 Pump2 Pressure 2nd Pressure 2nd

Start Start Pump1 Trip Pump2 Trip
Pump Pump1 Pump2

Runni ng Runni ng Runni ng
Figure 41-21 Redundant Water Cooling System - State Machine
MSAI5150 ACS1000 215/389

41.44 InvWtrTmpTripLevLo [C]
Inverter water temperature trip level (low). When measured water temperaturer falls below this trip limit
a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped (AI2 - IOEC1).
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 Max: 60 Def: 10 Int. scaling:1=1°C
41.45 InvWtrLevLowProt
Inverter water low level detection selection, which is connected to DI10 on IOEC4.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NOT USED 1 Level sensor is not installed.
ALARM HA 2 Level sensor is installed and the alarm apears with a high active signal.
ALARM LA 3 Level sensor is installed and the alarm apears with a hlow active signal.

ABB
Group 42 LOAD PROTECTION
42 LOAD PROTECTION
Motor over- underload protection parameter of ACS1000.
This function prevents running the motor within unpermitted operating ranges for a longer
period.
Figure 42-1 Motor Over– / Underload Protection - Diagram
42.01 LoadProtFunction
This parameter activates the motor load protection function. If the actual motor frequency is above the
start frequency (Par.: 42.07 LoadProtStartFrequency) the calculation of ideal motor current and
monitoring function will be started.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF No action, motor load protection is not used.
1 ON Motor load protection is active.
42.02 LoadProtDelayTime [s]

If the actual rms motor current is above overload or below underload current limits this delay timer will
be activated.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 217/389

42.03 UnderLoadAlarmLim [%]
This parameter defines the under load alarm limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current, see figure
42.1). If the actual rms motor current is within the alarm and trip range (below alarm and above trip
current) the programmable delay timer (Par.: 42.02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. If the
motor current does not exceeds the alarm current within the delay time an alarm will be occur (9.54
AW4 – Bit13). If the motor current exceeds the alarm current limit an alarm will disappear.
42.04 UnderLoadTripLim [%]

This parameter defines the under load trip limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current, see figure
42.1). If the actual rms motor current remains under the trip range, the programmable delay timer (Par.:
42.02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. If the motor current does not exceed the trip current
within the delay time a fault will be occur (9.20 FW4 – Bit0) and the drive will be stopped according to
SOFTSTOP sequence.
42.05 OverLoadAlarmLim [%]

This parameter defines the over load alarm limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current, see figure
42.1). If the actual rms motor current is within the alarm and trip range (above alarm and below trip
current) the programmable delay timer (Par.: 42.02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. If the
motor current does not fall below the alarm current within the delay time an alarm will be occur (9.57
AW4 – Bit12). If the motor current is below alarm current limit the alarm will disappear.
42.06 OverLoadTripLim [%]

This parameter defines the over load trip limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current, see figure 42.1).
If the actual rms motor current exceeds the trip range, the programmable delay timer (Par.: 42.02
LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. If the motor current does not drop under the trip current within
the delay time a fault will be occur (9.20 FW4 – Bit1) and the drive will be stopped according to
SOFTSTOP sequence.
42.09 FrequencyLevel_P2 [Hz]

Frequency of load point 2.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par.42.08 Max: 100Hz Def: 10 Hz Int. scaling:10 == 1Hz

Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par.42.09 Max: 100Hz Def: 15 Hz Int. scaling:10 == 1Hz

Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par.42.10 Max: 100Hz Def: 20Hz Int. scaling:10 == 1Hz




ABB

42.17 LoadProtStartCurr [A]

Current of start load point, which corresponds to Par. 42.07 Load Protection Start Frequency.
Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4000A Def: 10A Int. scaling:1 == 1A
42.18 CurrentLevel_P1 [A]

Current of load point 1, which corresponds to Par. 42.08 Frequency Level P1.





Current of load point 6, which corresponds to Par. 42.13 Frequency Level P6



MSAI5150 ACS1000 219/389

42.27 MotCurrFiltTime [ms]
The actual motor current used for the load protection can be filtered.
This is needed for small motors with very low motor current to allow small hysteresis values.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 500 Int. scaling:
42.28 MotCurrHyst [A]

The over-/underload indication is reset with a hysteresis for the actual motor current.The
hysteresis can be adjusted with this parameter.
Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10 Def: 5 Int. scaling:

ABB
Group 43 43
MOTOR PHASE UNBALANCE SUPERVISION

Due to special kind of cables used for an ESP application, it is necessary to supervise the motor phase unbalance
between the three motor phases in order to prevent overheating of one motor phase.
During operation the ACS 2000 software continuously calculates the maximum difference between the three motor
phases.
If the actual motor unbalance current is inside the operating range (below motor unbalance alarm and trip current) no
alarm/fault is active. If the actual motor unbalance current is outside the operating range an alarm/fault will be
generated.
This function makes it possible to avoid, running the motor within permitted operating ranges for a longer period.
IMotPhase Par.: 1.25 MotCurrent Phase U

A
(RMS)
Par.: 1.27 MotCurrent Phase W Par.: 1.26 MotCurrent Phase V

(RMS) (RMS)
Par.: 1.28 Motor Phase Unbalance Current

- m in. Mo to r P hase Cu rrent)
(Difference = m ax. Mo to r P hase Cu rrent
Par.: 43.04 MotPhaseUnbalTripCurrent

MotPhaseUnbalTripLim
Par.: 43.03 MotPhaseUnbalAlarmCurrent
MotPhaseUnbalAlmLim
motor phase unbalance alarm (start of delay time)

fMot
Hz
motor phase unbalance trip (start of delay time)
Par.: 110.02 MotNomCurrent * Par.: 43.03 MotPhaseUnbalAlmLim

MotPhaseUnbalAlarmCurrent =
100 %
Par.: 110.02 MotNomCurrent * Par.: 43.04 MotPhaseUnbalTripLim

MotPhaseUnbalTripCurrent =
100 %
Figure 43-1 Motor phase unbalance protection diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 221/389

Group 43 ESP PROTECTION
43 ESP PROTECTION
ESP application protection parameter of ACS1000.
Par.: 99.03 MotNomCurrent * Par.: 43.03 MotPhaseUnbalAlmLim

MotPhaseUnbalAlarmCurrent =
100 %
Par.: 99.03 MotNomCurrent * Par.: 43.04 MotPhaseUnbalTripLim

MotPhaseUnbalTripCurrent =
100 %
Figure 43-1 Motor Phase Unbalance Protection - Diagram
43.01 MotPhaseUnbalFunc
This parameter activates the motor phase unbalance protection function.
Note!
This parameter can only be overwritten from service.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF No action, motor phase unbalance protection is not used.
1 ON Motor phase unbalance protection is active.
43.02 MotPhUnbalDelTime [s]

If the maximum deviation between the three motor phases exceeds the alarm or trip current limits this
delay timer will be activated.

ABB
43.03 MotPhUnbalAlmLim [%]
This parameter defines the motor phase unbalance alarm limit (in percentage of the nominal motor
current, see figure 43.1).
If the actual motor phase unbalance current is above alarm current the programmable delay timer (Par.:
43.02 MotPhaseUnbalDelayTime) will be started. If the motor phase unbalance current does not drop
under the alarm current within the delay time an alarm will be occur (AW1 – Bit5).
If the motor unbalance current drops under the alarm current limit the alarm will disappear.
43.04 MotPhUnbalTripLim [%]

This parameter defines the motor phase unbalance trip limit (in percentage of the nominal motor
current, see figure 43.1).
If the actual motor phase unbalance current is above trip current the programmable delay timer (Par.:
43.02 MotPhaseUnbalDelayTime) will be started. If the motor current does not drop under the trip
current within the delay time a fault will be occur (FW1 – Bit5) and the drive will be stopped according to
SOFTSTOP sequence.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 223/389

Group 48 CUSTOMER SUP SIG
48 CUSTOMER SUP SIG

Customer application supervison function of ACS1000.
This parameter group allows the customer to define an own supervision function. It is possible
to define three different signals (CSS1.1 … CSS1.3) and their logical interconnection (OR or
AND - gate). Additionally is it possible to invert (high or low active) those signals.
If NOT SEL is selected, the function is disabled.
If ONLY STATUS is selected, only the status bit in parameter 8.04 AUX STATUS WORD 3 will
be set, no alarm or fault will be initiated.
If ALARM is selected, only the alarm message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel. No
trip reaction is active.
If SOFTSTOP, TRIP 1a or TRIP 1b is chosen, drive stops according selected trip reaction and
the fault message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel.
CustSig1 Reaction
48.01
CustSig1 TypeSel
48.02
CustSig1.1 Invert
48.05
Signal Selection
CSS1.1 NOT SEL
CustSig1.1 Grp&Idx
48.03 Group & Index
CustSig1.1 BitNum ONLY STATUS
48.04 Bit Number -1
OR ALARM
Output 9.17
CSS1.1 Act
> CSS1 (AW7 - B07
CustSig1.2 Invert Act SO FTSTOP
48.08 7.03
(ACW2 - B06
Signal Selection
TRIP 1a
CSS1.2 7.03
CustSig1.2 Grp&Idx (ACW2 - B01
48.06 Group & Index
TRIP 1b
A ND 7.03
CustSig1.2 BitNum
48.07 Bit Number -1
(ACW2 - B02
Output
&
OR
CSS1.2 Act
CustSig1.3 Invert
48.11 CustSupSig1 Active
Signal Selection > 8.04
CSS1.3 (ASW3 - B02

CustSig1.3 Grp&Idx
48.09 Group & Index
CustSig1.3 BitNum
48.10 Bit Number -1
Output OR
CustSupSig1 Fault
CSS1.3 Act
> 9.09
(FW9 - B07
Figure 48-1 Customer Supervision Signal 1 - Overview
48.01 CustSig1Reaction
This parameter activates the customer supervision signal 1.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT SEL Function is not active
2 ONLY Only status indication is active
STATUS
3 ALARM If supervision signal is active, an alarm will be generated
4 SOFT STOP If supervision signal is active, a fault will be generated and the drive trips
according to “Softstop” trip reaction
5 TRIP 1A If supervision signal is active, a fault will be generated and the drive trips
according to “Trip 1a” trip reaction
6 TRIP 1B If supervision signal is active, a fault will be generated and the drive trips
according to “Trip 1b” trip reaction

ABB
48.02 CustSig1TypeSel
With this parameter the logical interconnection (AND or OR) of customer supervision signal 1 is
selected.
If AND is selected, customer supervision signal 1 will only be set if all three signals (CSS1.1 …
CSS1.3) are active.
If OR is selected, customer supervision signal 1 will be set if one of three signals (CSS1.1 … CSS1.3)
is active.
Note!
Only if CSS1.1 … 1.3 INVERT is set to DIRECT.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 AND gate is active
1 OR gate is active
48.03 CustSig1.1Grp+Idx
A binary signal (i.e. from a status word) is assigned to Customer Supervision Signal 1.1 (CSS 1.1) by
setting parameter 48.03 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.
Additionally the bit number, which identifies the signal within the status word, has to be selected with
parameter 48.04.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
If Par. 48.03 is set to “809” and 48.04 is set to “0”, customer supervision signal 1.1 is active when 8.09
DI1-14 STAUS WORD IOEC2 / BIT 0 is “1” (digital input 1 of IOEC2 is active).
By default CS1.1 is set to “0”.

48.04 CustSig1.1BitNum
This parameter specifies the bit number (0...15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48.03.
48.05 CustSig1.1Invert
Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 1.1 (CSS 1.1).
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR - gate
1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR - gate
Selection of Group and Index of Customer Supervision Signal 1.2 (CSS 1.2).
Description see parameter 48.03
This parameter specifies the bit number (0...15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48.06
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR – gate
MSAI5150 ACS1000 225/389

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR – gate
CUSTOMER SUPERVISION SIGNAL 2

This parameter group allows the customer to define an own supervision function. It is possible to define three different
signals (CSS1.1 … CSS1.3) and their logical interconnection (OR or AND - gate). Additionally is it possible to invert
(high or low active) those signals.
If NOT SEL is selected, the function is disabled.
If ONLY STATUS is selected, only the status bit in parameter 7.03 AUX STATUS WORD will be set, no alarm or fault
will be initiated.
If ALARM is selected, only the alarm message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel. No trip reaction is active.
If SOFTSTOP, TRIP 1a or TRIP 1b is chosen, drive stops according selected trip reaction and the fault message
“CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel.
CustSig2 Reaction
48.12
CustSig2 TypeSel
48.13
CustSig2.1 Invert
48.16
Signal S election
CSS2.1 NOT SEL
CustSig2.1 Grp&Idx
48.14 Group & Index
CustSig2.1 BitN um ONLY STATUS
48.15 Bit Number -1
OR ALARM
Output 9.17
CSS2.1 Act
> CSS2 (AW7 - B08
CustSig2.2 Invert Act SOFTSTOP
48.19 7.03
(ACW2 - B06
Signal S election
TRIP 1a
CSS2.2 7.03
CustSig2.2 Grp&Idx (ACW2 - B01
48.17 Group & Index
TRIP 1b
AN D 7.03
CustSig2.2 BitN um
48.18 Bit Number -1
(ACW2 - B02
Output
&
CSS2.2 Act OR
CustSig2.3 Invert
48.22
CustSupSig2 Active
Signal S election
CSS2.3
> 8.04
(ASW3 - B03
CustSig2.3 Grp&Idx
48.20 Group & Index
CustSig2.3 BitN um
48.21 Bit Number -1
Output OR
CustSupSig2 Fault
CSS2.3 Act
> 9.09
(FW9 - B08
Figure 48-2 Customer Supervision Signal 2 - Overview

ABB
48.12 CustSig2Reaction
This parameter activates the customer supervision signal 2.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT SEL Function is not active
2 ONLY Only status indication is active
STATUS
3 ALARM If supervision signal is active, an alarm will be generated
4 SOFT STOP If supervision signal is active, a fault will be generated and the drive trips
according to “Softstop” trip reaction
5 TRIP 1A If supervision signal is active, a fault will be generated and the drive trips
according to “Trip 1a” trip reaction
6 TRIP 1B If supervision signal is active, a fault will be generated and the drive trips
according to “Trip 1b” trip reaction
48.13 CustSig2TypeSel
With this parameter the logical interconnection (AND or OR) of customer supervision signal 2 is
selected.
If AND is selected, the customer supervision signal 2 will only be set if all three signals (CSS2.1 …
CS2.3) are active.
If OR is selected, the customer supervision signal 2 will be set if one of three signals (CSS2.1 … CS2.3)
is active.
Note!
Only if CSS1.1 … 1.3 INVERT is set to DIRECT.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 AND gate is active
1 OR gate is active
A binary signal (i.e. from a status word) is assigned to Customer Supervision Signal 2.1 (CSS 2.1) by
setting parameter 48.14 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.
Additionally the bit number, which identifies the signal within the status word, has to be selected with
parameter 48.15.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
If Par. 48.14 is set to “809” and 48.15 is set to “0”, customer supervision signal 2.1 is active when 8.09
DI1-14 STAUS WORD IOEC2 / BIT 0 is “1” (digital input 1 of IOEC2 is active).
VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 227/389

VALUE NAME MEANING
Description see parameter 48.14 By default CS2.3 is set to “0”.
VALUE NAME MEANING
EXAMPLE 1:
A special customer ALARM is generated if ACS1000 is running and digital input DI11 - IOEC4 is not set (OFF)
ACS1000 Running
AN D
(8.01 - B2)
ALARM
DI11 - IOEC4
(85.11 - B10)
& 9.17
(AW7 - B08)
CustSup1SigAct
1 Consta nt "1"
(8.04 - B14) 8.04
(ASW3 - B02)
Figure 48-3 Customer Supervision - Example 1 (Alarm)

ABB
EXAMPLE 2
Digital output DO1-IOEC2 is set if ACS1000 is running in REMOTE mode, actual speed equals reference speed and
inverter air temperature is above 40°C
ACS1000 Ref S peed = Act Speed AN D
(8.01 - B8 AT SETPOINT)
CustSup2SigAct
REMOTE - Mode
(8.01 - B9 REMOTE)
& 8.04
(ASW3 - B03)
Inv Air Temp > 40°C
(8.07 - B7 SUP SIG1)
Digital Output Selection
Limit Supervision Selection 14.01 DO1 Group+Index IO2 : 804

14.02 DO1 Bit Number IO2 :3
14.02 DO1 Inv ert IO2 : DIRECT DO1 - IOEC
32.01 LimitSupervisAction : NO
32.02 LimSupDelayTime : 3s
32.17 SupSig1Function : HIGH LIMIT
32.18 SupSig1Group+Indx : 216
32.19 SupSig1Limit : 40
Figure 48 4 Customer Supervision - Example 2 (DO)
EXAMPLE 3
It is also possible to combine the customer supervision signal 1 2 :
Drive trips with trip reaction TRIP 1a if ACS1000 is running in LOCAL – Mode or digital Input DI6 – IOEC2 is set to ON
ACS1000 Running
AN D
(8.01 - B2)
CustSup1SigAct
REMOTE - Mode
(8.01 - B9 REMOTE) & 8.04 OR
(ASW3 - B02) CustSup2SigAct
DI6 - IOEC2
1
Constant 1
(8.09 - B5)
> 8.04
(8.04 - B14)
(ASW3 - B03
Constant 0
0
(8.04 - B13)
Trip 1a
8.04
(ACW2 - B01)
Figure 48 5 Customer Supervision - Example 3 (Trip)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 229/389

Group 50 SPEED MEASUREMENT
50 SPEED MEASUREMENT
If measurement from ENCODER is faulty during magnetizing, running or stopping the speed
feedback selection will be switched to INTERNAL and an alarm / fault message will be displayed.
SPE ED
MEASURE MT
Mot or Model
Motor Speed
1.02
ENCODER
Speed Measured
1.04
FILTER
50.03 SPEED FB SEL
Motor Speed Filt
50.01 SP EED SCALING 1.03
50.02 SPEED MEAS MO DE
50.04 ENCODER PULS NUMBER
50.06 SD ACT FILT TIME
50.05 ENCODER ALM/FLT
Figure 50-1 Speed Measurement - Overview

ABB
50.01 SPEED SCALING [rpm]
This parameter defines the actual speed (in rpm) that corresponds to the value of 20000 in the overriding
system. This parameter has only scaling effect to the actual speed signals, which can be read from the
overriding system (integer scaling).
Figure
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: 18000rpm Def: 1500rpm Int. scaling:15000 ==
1500 rpm
50.02 MEAS MODE

Selects the measurement type of the pulse encoder mode.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 A_- B DIR positive edges for speed ; channel B: direction
1 A_-_ positive and negative edges for speed ; channel B: not used
2 A_-_B DIR positive and negative edges for speed ; channel B: direction
3 A_-_B_-_ channel A B: positive and negative edges for speed and direction
50.03 SpeedFeedbackSel
Source of the speed feedback to the speed controller.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 INTERNAL internal actual speed
2 ENCODER pulse encoder module is used (see also Par. 75.03 ENCODER MODULE)
50.04 PULSE NR [p]

Number of encoder pulses per revolution.
50.06 SP ACT FILT TIME [ms]

Time constant of the first order actual speed filter.
ms
MSAI5150 ACS1000 231/389

Group 51 MASTER ADAPTER
51 MASTER ADAPTER
This parameter group defines the communication parameters when FBA (Field Bus Adapter) is
used. Parameter names depend on the selected FBA type.
This group name identifies which communication hardware module is connected to the ACS 1000
drive. Some option modules support multiple protocols, which can be selected with a parameter.
The setup parameters can be modified either by using the drive panel or by PC software, e.g.
DriveWindow.
Note!
The changes to the parameters in group 51 do not come into effect immediately but only when the
power of the fieldbus adapters was switched off and then switched on again.
51.01 MODULE TYPE

Module type and software version
Unit: Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
51.02 FIELDBUS PAR2

Different meanings depending on module type
51.03 FIELDBUS PAR3
51.04 FIELDBUS PAR4
51.05 FIELDBUS PAR5
51.06 FIELDBUS PAR6
51.07 FIELDBUS PAR7
51.08 FIELDBUS PAR8
51.09 FIELDBUS PAR9
51.10 FIELDBUS PAR10

ABB
MSAI5150 ACS1000 233/389

Group 52 EC FAN
52 EC FAN
ACS1000 EC (electronically commutated) fan parameter group.
To enable the EC fan functionality first set parameter 75.06 to EC FAN, otherwise the whole
parameter group is read protected.
52.01 InvFan RefSpeed ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Inverter fan reference speed signal. The actual reference shown in this signal will be converted to an analog
signal (IOEC1-AO1), which is given to the EC fan.
Refer to the graphic below for a better understanding of the inverter fan speed calculation.
Figure 52-1 Inverter fan speed reference calculation overview
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1

ABB
52.02 TraFan RefSpeed ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Integrated transformer fan reference speed signal. The actual reference shown in this signal will be converted to
an analog signal (IOEC3-AO1), which is given to the integrated transformer fan.
Refer to the graphic below for a better understanding of the transformer fan speed calculation.
Figure 52-2 Tranformer reference speed calculation
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
52.05 AirFiltPressMon ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Air filter pressure monitoring signal. Measures pressure from ambient to inverter compartment.
Unit: Pa Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
52.06 PrSens ExpectVal ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameters shows the expected value of the pressure sensor in Pascal [Pa], which is calculated
depending on the fan speed reference.
52.06(52.01,52.02) = (52.34/[max(52.15,52.25)]^2)*max(52.01,52.02)^2
Unit: Pa Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 235/389

52.10 AirPress SensCalib
The air pressure sensor must be calibrated to ensure proper measurements. The calibration sequence
is as follows:
1. Init condition: DC link discharge & grounding switch open
2. Start calibration sequence by setting parameter 52.10 AirPressSensCalib to CALIBRATE
3. Fan(s) will now turn to nominal speed (without software filter) and run there for 30sec. During the
calibration process an active alarm is present “PressMonCalibAct”.
4. After 30 seconds, the actual measured differential pressure is written to parameter
52.34 ExpPressAtNomSpd, which is taken for the slope calculation of the monitoring function.
5. The calibration process is finished and parameter 52.10 AirPressSensCalib reset to DISABLED.
Note!
In order to ensure the measurements which are taken during the calibration process, the final result
must be in a certain range (define by parameters 210.26 AirPress MinExpect & 210.27 AirPress
MaxExpect). If the range is exceeded the “old” value from 52.34 is not changed and a calibration fault is
active.
NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0 Calibration not active.
CALIBRATION 1 Calibration is active.
52.11 FanRedundancy
Selection of EC fan redundancy configuration.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 0 No EC fan redundancy configuration.
YES 1 EC fan redundancy configuration.
52.12 FanOption IntTr

The EC fans are splitted in two groups. Each group is controlled by one analog output (IOEC1 - AO1
& IOEC3 - AO2).
This parameters allows to select between two different hardware approaches.
NAME VALUE MEANING
OPT 0 Option mixed: Grp1 --> inverter fan 1, transformer fan 1; Grp2 --> inverter fan
MIX 2, transformer fan 2
OPT 1 Option seperate: Grp1 --> inverter fan 1, inverter fan 2; Grp2 --> transformer
SEP fan 1, transformer fan 2
52.13 FanRdyRunStopDel
After the set time in this parameter, the fans are stopped if the drive is in RdyRun state (MCB closed,
but not modulating)
52.15 InvFanNomSpd
Inverter fan nominal speed. Fan speed at nominal inverter operation.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 1700 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.16 InvRedFanNomSpd
Inverter fan nominal speed in redundant configuration. Fan speed of both inverter fans at nominal
inverter operation.
52.17 InvFanMinSpd
Minimum fan speed of inverter fan, for both, single and redundant configuration.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52.18 Def: 900 Int. scaling:1 == 1

ABB
52.18 InvFanMaxSpd
Maximum fan speed of inverter fan for both, single and redundant configuration.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 52.17 Max: 2500 Def: 1770 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.19 InvFanRefFiltTime
Inverter fan reference filter time. The reference given to the fan is filtered using this time.
52.20 InvFanRefWaveForm
Inverter fan reference waveform.
The speed reference to the fan can be quadratic or linear depending on inverter rms current (=160.81).
NAME VALUE MEANING
LINEAR 0 The fan reference is linear dependent on the inverter rms current
(160.81).
QUADRATIC 1 The fan reference is quadratic dependent on the inverter rms current
(160.81).
52.21 MaxCurAtMinSpd
Maximum allowed inverter RMS current, where the fan is still allowed to run with minimum fan speed
(Parameter 52.17) for single configuration. The input must be given in percentage of the maximum
allowed current of the inverter.
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 75 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.22 MaxCurAtRedMinSpd
Maximum allowed inverter RMS current, where the fan is still allowed to run with minimum fan speed
(Parameter 52.17) for redundant configuration. The input must be given in percentage of the maximum
allowed current of the inverter.
52.25 TraFanNomSpd
Transformer fan nominal speed. Fan speed at nominal transformer power.
Note!
There is no measurement of the transformer power. Therefore it is calculated as follows:
TransfPower = 1.05 x 161.16 FILTERED POWER
52.26 TraRedFanNomSpd
Transformer fan nominal speed in redundant configuration. Fan speed of both transformer fans at
nominal transformer power.
Note!
There is no measurement of the transformer power. Therefore it is calculated as follows:
TransfPower = 1.05 x 161.16 FILTERED POWER
52.27 TraFanMinSpd
Minimum fan speed of transformer fan for both, single and redundant configuration.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52.28 Def: 900 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.28 TraFanMaxSpd
Maximum fan speed of transformer fan for both, single and redundant configuration.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 52.27 Max: 2500 Def: 1770 Int. scaling:1 == 1
MSAI5150 ACS1000 237/389

52.29 TraFanRefFiltTime
Transformer fan reference filter time. The reference given to the fan is filtered using this time.
52.30 TraFanRefWaveForm
Transformer fan reference waveform.
The speed reference to the fan can be quadratic or linear depending on inverter transformer power
(=1.05 x 161.16 FILTERED POWER).
NAME VALUE MEANING
LINEAR 0 The fan reference is linear dependent on the calculated (1.05 x 161.16)
transformer power.
QUADRATIC 1 The fan reference is quadratic dependent on the calculated (1.05 x
161.16) transformer power
52.31 MaxPowAtMinSpd
Maximum allowed transformer power (=1.05 x 161.16 FILTERED POWER), where the fan is still
allowed to run with minimum speed (52.27) for single configuration. The input must be given in
percentage of the maximum allowed power of the transformer.
52.32 MaxPowAtRedMinSpd
Maximum allowed transformer power (=1.05 x 161.16 FILTERED POWER), where the fan is still
allowed to run with minimum fan speed (52.27) for redundant configuration. The input must be given in
percentage of the maximum allowed power of the transformer.
52.33 TraNominalPower
Integrated transformer nominal power in kVA.
Note!
The data must be taken from the transformer name plate!
Unit: kVA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 500 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.34 ExpPressAtNomSpd
Expected pressure at nominal fan speed (maximum of inverter and transformer fan). This parameter is
dependent on drive type.
Note!In case of cooling fan redundancy it takes the redundant fan nominal speed. If the air pressure
calibration is used, this value is automatically written at the end of the calibration.
Unit: Pa Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 120 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.35 PressMon HighValue

Pressure sensor dependent maximum/high value, which can be measured.
Unit: Pa Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 500 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.36 PressMon LowValue

Pressure sensor dependent minimum/low value, which can be measured.
Unit: Pa Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52.35 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1
52.37 PressMon SensMax

Pressure sensor maximum voltage signal, supplied to analog input 1 on IOEC1
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10 Def: 4.5 Int. scaling:1 == 10

ABB
52.38 PressMon SensMin
Pressure sensor minimum voltage signal, supplied to analog input 1 on IOEC1.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52.37 Def: 0.5 Int. scaling:1 == 10
52.39 PressMon AlmDelay

Pressure monitoring alarm delay. Delay time of the pressure alarm, if actual measured pressure is
below or above the alarm limits.
52.40 PressMon TripDelay

Pressure monitoring trip delay. Delay time of the pressure alarm, if actual measured pressure is below
or above the trip limits.
52.41 PressMon AlmLevLo

Pressure monitoring low alarm level.
If 52.06 x (1 - 52.41) is lower than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.12 AI1
IOEC1) an alarm will be generated.
52.42 PressMon AlmLevHi

Pressure monitoring high alarm level.
If 52.06 x (1 + 52.42) is lower than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.12 AI1
IOEC1) an alarm will be generated.
52.43 PressMon TripLevLo

Pressure monitoring low trip level.
If 52.06 x (1 - 52.43) is lower than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.12 AI1
IOEC1) a fault class 1 trip will be generated.
52.44 PressMon TripLevHi

Pressure monitoring high trip level.
If 52.06 x (1 + 52.44) is higher than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.12
AI1 IOEC1) a fault class 1 trip will be generated.
52.45 FanDist AlmDel

Fan disturbed alarm delay time.
Without redundant fan:

Delay time for the alarm message, if whether the inverter or the transformer fan is disturbed.
With redundant fan:

Delay time for the alarm message, if whether the inverter or the transformer fan is disturbed.
Additionally the still operational fan speed will be increased as it would be operated with single fan
configuration, in order to keep the drive running.
52.46 FanDist FltDel

Fan disturbed trip delay time. Delay time for the fault class 1 trip, if whether the inverter or the
transformer fan is disturbed.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 239/389

52.47 FanDist IncDel
Fan disturbed fan speed increase delay time. If one of the fans is disturbed, the still operational fan
speed will be increased to single configuration speed after this delay time.
Note!
Only relevant in redundant configuration.
52.48 FanDist ResDel1

Fan disturbed reset delay/wait time for inverter fans.
If not operational fan recovers at least for the time set in this parameter, the fan control automatically
changes back to redundant operation with all fan running with less fan speed.
Note!
Only relevant in redundant configurations.
52.49 FanDist ResDel2

Fan disturbed reset delay/wait time for transformer fans.
If not operational fan recovers at least for the time set in this parameter, the fan control automatically
changes back to redundant operation with all fan running with less fan speed.
Note!
Only relevant in redundant configurations.
52.50 FanAuxSupplyType
Parameter selection whether the fans are internally or externally supplied.
The parameter is set by manufacturing key, respectively software download.
NAME VALUE MEANING
EXTERNAL 0 The fans are supplied from externally.
INTERNAL 1 The fans are supplied internally (only supplied if MCB is closed)

ABB
Group 55 MOTOR DATA 1
55 Motor Data 1
These group can be used to define 4 different sets of motor parameters.
Each of these motors can be selected by parameter 99.15.
The values are then copied to the standard parameter groups (20, 99 ,150).
When setting the first parameter e.g. 55.01 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE to 0 all values from the
standard groups are copied to group 51.
55.01 Motor Nom Voltage [V]

Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate. It is not possible to start the ACS 1000 Drive Macro without
setting this parameter.
55.02 Motor Nom Current [A]

Rated motor current.
Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. scaling:10 == 1A
55.03 Motor Nom Freq [Hz]

Nominal frequency from the motor rating plate.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. scaling:100== 1Hz
55.04 Motor Nom Speed [rpm]

Nominal speed from the motor rating plate.
Unit: rmp Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1rpm
55.05 Motor Nom Power [kW]

Nominal power from the motor rating plate.
Unit: kW Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1kW
55.06 Motor Nom CosFii

Motor cos phi from the motor rating plate.
Unit: Type: R Min: 0.00 Max: 1.00 Def: 0 Int. scaling:100==1
55.07 Minimum Speed [rpm]

Negative speed reference limit in rpm.(see Figure 23-1)For step-up transformer option: if parameter
132.23 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the minimum speed is limited according to that minimum starting
frequency for step-up.
Unit: rmp Type: R Min: -20000 rpm Max: Par. Def: see par. Int. scaling:see par 50-
20.02 20.14 01
55.08 Maximum Speed [rpm]

Positive speed reference limit in rpm. (see Figure 23-1)
Unit: rmp Type: R Min: Par.20.01 Max: Def: see par. Int. scaling:see par 50-
18000rmp 2014 01
55.09 User Max Mot Cur [%]

Maximum output current in motor mode in % of the motor nominal current.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 241/389

55.10 Rs [Ohm]
Stator resistance.
Unit: Ω Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
55.11 Ls [mH]
Stator main inductance.
Unit: mH Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
55.12 SigmaLs [mH]

Stator stray inductance.
Unit: mH Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
55.13 Rotor TimeConst [ms]

Rotor time constant.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
55.15 Lm [T = 0.0%] [%]

Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.
Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point.
Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
55.16 Lm [T = 12.5%] [%]

55.17 Lm [T = 25.0%] [%]

55.18 Lm [T = 37.5%] [%]

55.19 Lm [T = 50.0%] [%]

55.20 Lm [T = 62.5%] [%]

55.21 Lm [T = 75.0%] [%]

55.22 Lm [T = 87.5%] [%]


ABB
55.23 Lm [T = 100.0%] [%]
55.24 Lm [T = 112.5%] [%]

55.25 Lm [T = 125.0%] [%]

55.26 Lm [T = 137.5%] [%]

55.27 Lm [T = 150.0%] [%]

55.28 Lm [T = 162.5%] [%]

55.29 Lm [T = 175.0%] [%]

55.30 Lm [T = 187.5%] [%]

55.31 Lm [T = 200.0%] [%]

55.32 im [Flux = a] [%]

Magnetization current in % of motor nominal current for flux = “A”, level less than nominal.First point of
no-load curve.
55.33 Lm [Flux = a] [%]

Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table for flux = A
Values is given as % of inductance value at nominal operation point.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 243/389

55.34 im [Flux = nom] [%]
Magnetization current in % of motor nominal current for flux = “NOM”, level equal nominal.Second point
of no-load curve.
55.35 Lm [Flux = nom] [%]

Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table for flux = NOM
Values is 100 if flux is 100 %
55.36 im [Flux = b] [%]

Magnetization current in % of motor nominal current for flux = “B”,level higher than nominal.Third point
of no-load curve.
55.37 Lm [Flux = b] [%]

Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table for flux = B
Values is given as % of inductance value at nominal operation point.
55.38 Gener. Nom CosFii

Motor nominal power factor in generator mode.
Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0.5 Int. scaling:1 == 1000
55.39 User Max Gen Cur [%]

Maximum generating current (as % of motor nominal current) from user.
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 800 Def: 100 Int. scaling:
55.40 Flux Ramp Time [s]

Flux ramp time from zero to flux nominal value.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0.01 Max: 100 Def: 0.5 Int. scaling:
55.41 IRCompensationENA
Switch for Ir-compensation function
NAME VALUE MEANING
FALSE 0 IR compenstation is disabled
TRUE 1 IR compensation is enabled
55.42 IRCurrentCtrl ENA

Switch for Ir-compensation current controller function
NAME VALUE MEANING
FALSE 0 IR compensation current controller is enabled
TRUE 1 IR compensation current controller is disabled
55.43 IRCompCurrDir ENA

Switch for Ir-compensation current direction function
NAME VALUE MEANING
FALSE 0 IR compensation current direction is enabled
TRUE 1 IR compensation current direction is disabled
55.44 IR Compensation [s]

Ir-compensation needed voltage boost
Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 0.7 Int. scaling:1 == 100

ABB
56.01 Motor Data 2

Motor data 2 parameter 56.01 - 56.44. For a detailed description refer to Motor Data 1 (Par. 55.01 -
55.44)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 245/389

57.01 Motor Data 3

Motor data 3 parameter 57.01 - 57.44. For a detailed description refer to Motor Data 1 (Par. 55.01 -
55.44)

ABB
58.01 Motor Data 4

Motor data 4 parameters 58.01 - 58.44. For a detailed description refer to Motor Data 4 (Par. 55.01 -
55.44)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 247/389

Group 60 Group 60…63CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
FIELDBUS / DDCS COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB - AC80
Figure Overview of CH4 DDDCS communication between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and AC80
(ABB Advant Controller 80)

ABB
DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB - AC80
Figure Overview of CH4 data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and AC80 (ABB
Advant Controller 80)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 249/389

CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW, MVD – AMC3 Þ ABB - AC80
Definition of the read / write location for datasets (FA).
Contains (drive) dataset connection parameters, which connect certain dataset fields directly to the Motor Control SW
or Application SW.
Connection principle:
•Parameters “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” define the AMC – table index which are read and then written to DataSet xx Field
Index (n).
•Parameters “DS(n) RDVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” which are written to
DataSet xx Field Index (n).
NOTE!
If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED, corresponding dataset must be set in master system (AC80) as
well, otherwise a transmit error will be generated.
Figure Overview of data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and AC80 (ABB Advant
Controller 80) via CH4

ABB
CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW, ABB - AC80 Þ MVD – AMC3
or Application SW.
•Parameters “DS(n) PARWR I(n)” defines the AMC-table group+index numbers, where the values are written, which
are read from the corresponding DataSet xx Field Index (n).
•Parameters “DS(n) WRVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRR I(n)” which are read from
NOTE!
If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED, corresponding dataset must be set in master system (AC80) as
well, otherwise a receive error will be generated.
Figure Figure Overview of data exchange between and AC80 (ABB Advant Controller 80) and MVD –
AMC3 via CH4
MSAI5150 ACS1000 251/389

FIELDBUS / DDCS COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB ACDA – AMC3
Figure Overview of CH4 DataSet communication between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and ACDA
(ABB Aux. Control Device Adapter)

ABB
DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB ACDA – AMC3
Figure Overview of CH4 data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and ACDA – AMC3
(Aux. Control Device Adapter)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 253/389

CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW, MVD-AMC3 Þ ACDA–AMC3
or Application SW.
•Parameters “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” define the AMC – table index which are read and then written to DataSet xx Field
Index (n).
•Parameters “DS(n) RDVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” which are written to
NOTE!
If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED, corresponding dataset must be set in master system (ACDA) as
well, otherwise a transmit error will be generated.
Figure Overview of data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and ACDA – AMC3 (Aux.
Control Device Adapter)

ABB
CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW, ACDA–AMC3 Þ MVD–AMC3
or Application SW.
•Parameters “DS(n) PARWR I(n)” defines the AMC-table group+index numbers, where the values are written, which
are read from the corresponding DataSet xx Field Index (n).
•Parameters “DS(n) WRVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRR I(n)” which are read from
NOTE!
If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED, corresponding dataset must be set in master system (ACDA) as
well, otherwise a receive error will be generated.
Figure Overview of data exchange between ACDA – AMC3 (Aux. Control Device Adapter) and MVD
(Medium Voltage Drive)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 255/389

SIGNAL TRANSFER OVERVIEW, ACDA Þ VSD - DRIVE (MVD-AMC3)
Figure 60-1 Overview of data exchange between ACDA – AMC3 (APU - Auxiliary Pumping Unit) and
MVD – AMC3 via CH4

ABB
Group 60 CH4 ACTUAL SIGNALS
60 CH4 ACTUAL SIGNALS

DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW - DATA SET RECEIVE
SIGNAL TRANSFER OVERVIEW, ACDA => VSD - DRIVE (MVD-AMC3)
60.01 ACDA/MainCtrlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter shows the received value from ACDA (Aux. Control Device Adapter) via Data Set 100
Value 1.
B00 ON 1 Auxiliaries ON sequence (command to charging the INU
and closing the MCB)
0 Auxiliaries OFF sequence (command to opening the MCB
and discharging the INU)
B01 OFF2 1 No OFF2
0 Emergency OFF (=> Stop by coasting, MCB off).
Command to “ON INHIBIT” state
B02 OFF3 1 No OFF 3
0 Emergency STOP (=> Stop by torque limit). Command to
“ON INHIBIT” state
B03 RUN 1 Command to “RDY REF”- state
0 Command to Stop
B04 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Normal operation.
B05 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable Ramp-function generator
0 Speed ramping stopped. Freeze the actual set point from
the ramp-function generator
B06 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Enable set point
B07 RESET 1 Fault resetting with a rising edge
0 No significance.
if next conditions are fulfilled:
- bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0
- bit RAMP-HOLD = 0
- bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0
previously ON
B09 INCHING_2 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 2.
See conditions Inching_1.
previously ON.
B10 REMOTE_CMD 1 ACDA control system is requesting to control the drive.
B11 EXT_CTRL_LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2). Effective if
parameter 12.02 is set to COMM.MODULE
0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1). Effective if
parameter 12.02 is set to COMM.MODULE
B12 PROCESS_STOP_N 1 Process Stop is not active.
0 Process Stop is active.
B13 ARU_BLOCK_MOD 1 Modulation of ARU is blocked.
B14 RESERVED 0
B15 NOT USED 0
MSAI5150 ACS1000 257/389

60.02 ACDA/Ref1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
This parameter shows the received Speed Reference value from ACDA (Aux. Control Device Adapter,
e.g. AC80, AC800, AMC33 – Aux.Controller) via Data Set 100 Value 2.
Unit: scal Type: I Int. scaling: 20000 ==
SpeedScaling
60.03 ACDA/Ref2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter shows the received reference 2 value from ACDA (Aux. Control Device Adapter, e.g.
AC80, AC800, AMC33 – Aux.Controller) via Data Set 100 Value 3.
Unit: % Type: I Int. scaling: 100 = 1%
60.04 ACDA/AuxCtrlWord1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter shows the transmit value to ACDA (Aux. Control Device Adapter) via Data Set 102
Value 1.
B00 TRIGG_DLOG_1 Trigger data logger no 1
B01 TRIGG_DLOG_2 Trigger data logger no 2
B02 RAMP BYPASS Speed ramp bypassing
B03 BAL RAMP OUT Forcing of ramp output
B04 DO1 CTRL OVER SYST Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system
B05 REAL TIME CLOCK SET Par. 98.01 set of new real time clock
B06 HOLD NCONT Holding of the speed controller's output
B07 WINDOW CTRL Par. 26.01 Torque Selector forcing to window control
B08 BAL NCONT Forcing of speed controller's output
B09
B10
B11
B12 DO2 CTRL OVER SYST see B04
B13 USER MACRO CTRL Macro change request
B14 DO3 CTRL OVER SYST see B04
B15 NOT USABLE

ABB
Group 61 CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
61 CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

CH4 communication parameter.
61.01 NOT USED
61.03 CH4 CONFIGURATION

CH4 is used to communicate with ABB Advant Controller (e.g. AC80) or with AMC3 - Master control
system. The CH4 has to be configured as a POLLED SLAVE for communication.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DISABLED The CH4 disabled.
1 POLLED SLAVE The CH4 is a polled slave channel.
2 FAST MASTER The CH4 is a fast master channel.
61.04 ACDA/MCW CtrlSel

This parameter is used to activate bit number B01, B02 & B12 of ACDA Main Control Word (CH4) if selected.
NOTE!
If the parameter is set to NOT USED, the signals are set internally to constant 1. This parameter is only active if ACDA
communication module is used (parameter 75.02 ACDA COMM MODULE is set to DSET100 R/W).
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NOT USED Desired bits of ACDA - MCW are not used.
1 ENABLED Desired bits of ACDA - MCW are used.
61.05 ACDA/ACW1 CtrlSel

This parameter is used to activate the ACDA - Auxiliary Control Word 1 from CH4 (e.g. AC80, AC800, AMC33 –
Aux.Controller).
NOTE!
If the parameter is not used the signals are set internally to constant “1”or constant “0” respectively. This parameter is only
active if ACDA communication module is used (parameter 75.02 ACDA COMM.MODULE is set to DSET100 R/W).
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NOT USED ACDA - ACW1 is not used.
1 ENABLED ACDA - ACW1 is used.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 259/389

Group 62 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION
62 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION

This group defines the parameter group and index, to where the received values from the ACDA
controller), received via DDCS CH4, are sent and the parameter group and index of the signals,
which are transferred from AMC33 to the ACDA – Controller via DDCS CH4.
62.01 DS100101 Enable

This prameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 100 and DataSet 101.
NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1
62.02 DS100 PARWR I1

Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 100 Index 1 is sent. The default value is set to
parameter 60.01 ACDA / MAIN CONTROL WORD.
NOTE!
· writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.01 DSET 100&101 ENABLE

parameter 60.02 ACDA / Ref1.
NOTE!

parameter 60.03 ACDA / Ref2.
NOTE!
Unit: Type: NoType Min: 6003 Max: 6003 Def: 6003 Int. scaling:1 == 1
62.05 DS101 PARRD I1

Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 101 Index 1. The
default value is set to parameter 8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD.
NOTE!
Unit: conn Type: I Min: 801 Max: 801 Def: 801 Int. scaling:1 == 1

default value is set to parameter 8.02 AUX STATUS WORD1.
NOTE!

ABB
default value is set to parameter 8.03 AUX STATUS WORD2.
NOTE!
· writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.01 DSET 101 ENABLE
62.08 DS102103 Enable

This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 102 and DataSet 103.
NAME VALUE MEANING

DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1

parameter 60.04 ACDA / ACW1.
NOTE!

Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 102 Index 2 is sent.
NOTE!

NOTE!

Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 103 Index 1.
NOTE!

NOTE!
MSAI5150 ACS1000 261/389

NOTE!
62.15 DS104105 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1

NOTE!
• writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.15 DSET 104&105 ENABLE

NOTE!

NOTE!

Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set
105 Index 1.
NOTE!

105 Index 2.
NOTE!

ABB
105 Index 3.
NOTE!
62.22 DS106107 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0=
ENABLED 1=

NOTE!

NOTE!

NOTE!

107 Index 1.
NOTE!

107 Index 2.
NOTE!
MSAI5150 ACS1000 263/389

107 Index 3.
NOTE!
62.29 DS108109 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0=
ENABLED 1=

Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 108 Index 1 is sent. The
NOTE!

NOTE!

NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.29 DSET 108&109 ENABLE

109 Index 1.
NOTE!

109 Index 2. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.29 DSET 109&109
ENABLE

ENABLE

ABB
Group 63 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION
63 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION

This group defines the parameter group and index, to where the received values from the ACDA
controller (e.g. AC80, AC800, AMC3 – Aux.Controller), received via CH4, are sent and the
parameter group and index of the signals, which are transferred from AMC33 to the ACDA –
Controller via DDCS Channel 4 (e.g. AC80, AC800, AMC33 – Aux.Controller).
Note!
Please check also parameter settings in GROUP 18 – UTILITYS and GROUP 97 DIRECT
DATASET WRITE.
63.01 DS110111 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING

DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1

NOTE!
· contents of dataset field are written to parameter 61.11 ACT VALUE DSxxx I1 if parameter 61.10 DISP DATA SET NO
SEL is set to 110.

NOTE!

NOTE!

Example:
The setting 1901 broadcasts 19.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter Group19, Index01).
NOTE!
MSAI5150 ACS1000 265/389

NOTE!

NOTE!
63.08 DS112103 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1

NOTE!

NOTE!

NOTE!

Example:
The setting 1901 broadcasts 19.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter Group19, Index01).
NOTE!
· contents of dataset field are written to parameter 61.11 ACT VALUE DSxxx I1 if parameter 61.10 DISP DATA SET NO
SEL is set to 113

NOTE!
· writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE LE

ABB
NOTE!
63.15 DS114105 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING

DISABLED 0
ENABLED 1

Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 114 Index 1 is sent. NOTE! •
writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE



115 Index 1. Example: The setting 1901 broadcasts 19.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter
Group19, Index01). NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.15 DSET
114&115 ENABLE

ENABLE

ENABLE
63.22 DS116117 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0=
ENABLED 1=
MSAI5150 ACS1000 267/389




ENABLE

ENABLE

ENABLE
63.29 DS118119 Enable

NAME VALUE MEANING
DISABLED 0=
ENABLED 1=




ABB
119 Index 1. Example: The setting 1901 broadcasts 19.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter
Group19, Index01). NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.29 DSET
118&119 ENABLE

ENABLE

ENABLE
MSAI5150 ACS1000 269/389

64 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured or calculated values
64.01 DI1-7 StatusIO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Status of digital inputs DI1 ... DI7 of the optional IOEC 5 board. Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

64 ACT SIGNALS IO5
REM 01 DI1-7 STATUS IOEC5
0100001
DI 6 DI 1
Figure
64.02 DI8-14StatusIO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

LOC 1 0.0 rpm

64 ACT SIGNALS IO5
0100001
DI 13 DI 8
Figure

ABB

B14
B15 (Not Used)
64.04 DO1-6 StatusIO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Status of the optional IOEC 5 board relay outputs. Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

64 ACT SIGNALS IO5
REM 04 D01-6 Status IOEC5
0100010
DO6 DO2
Figure
64.05 DI1-7 StatusIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

LOC 1 0.0 rpm

64 ACT SIGNALS IO6
0100001
DI 6 DI 1
Figure
MSAI5150 ACS1000 271/389

64.06 DI8–14StatusIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Status of digital inputs DI8 ... DI14 of the optional IOEC6 board. Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

64 ACT SIGNALS IO6
0100001
DI 13 DI 8
Figure
64.07 DIStatusWordIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

B14
B15 (Not Used)
64.08 D01-6StatusIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

LOC 1 0.0 rpm

64 ACT SIGNALS IO6
0100010
DO6 DO2
Figure

ABB
Group 65 SYNCHRON BYPASS
65 SYNCHRON BYPASS
Synchronized Bypass function for starter. Group is activated by parameter 38.07
65.01 Sm1 AvailableSig

Condition to release the grounding isolator. If the motor breaker 1 has an available signal, the
supervision of the signal can be activated here. The available signal is for example not given if the
motor breaker 1 is in test position or drawn out.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO Feedback signal SM1 AVAILABLE is not used.
2 LOW Feedback signal SM1 AVAILABLE is available. It is active with a low signal
ACTIV “0” on IOEC5 – DI12
3 HIGH Feedback signal SM1 AVAILABLE is available. It is active with a high signal

VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 273/389

65.05 SynOnControlMode
Selection of one signal or two signals for starting and stopping the synchronizing sequence.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 ONE Steady state signal: IOEC5 – DI10 high = start synchronizing, low = stop
SIGNAL synchronizing
1 TWO Pulse signal: IOEC5 – DI09 = stop synchronising, IOEC5 – DI10 = start
SIGNAL synchronizing
65.06 Brk ClosingTimeLim

Maximum operating time for closing the motor breakers. If the motor breaker has not closed within this
time a trip will be initiated.
65.07 BrkOpenTimeLimit
Maximum operating time for opening the motor breakers. If the motor breaker has not opened within this
time a trip will be initiated.
65.08 MaxMtrCurForSwiSmx
DTC: Maximum (relative) motor current for opening motor breaker. After the line breaker (Sbpx) has
been closed the motor breaker still remains closed for a while until the load of the converter is
commutated smoothly to the line. If the rel. motor current is < this parameter the motor breaker is
opened. Scalar Control: The motor breaker is opened directly after receiving the line breaker (Sbpx)
closed signal. The setting of this parameter has no influence during scalar control.

ABB
65.09 DifferentMotorPar
Enable different motor parameters for synchronized bypass.
To set the new motor parameters, first select the motor by digital inputs 6-8 of IOEC5. Type in the
parameter in the usual groups (like if you had only one motor parameter set). Typing in new parameters
is only possible in state “Rdy MCB On”.
Conditions for using different motor parameter sets:

Parameter:
99.02 All motors have the same nom. voltage
99.04 All motors have the same nom. freq.
50.03 Speed Feedback Sel = INTERNAL
30.01 Motor Therm Prot = No
Stored / different parameters:

Parameter:
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
20.04 MAX MOTOR CURRENT
29.02 FREQUENCY MAX
29.03 FREQUENCY MIN
99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED
99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER
99.07 MOTOR NOM COS_FII
112.13 RS 112.14 LS
112.15 SIGMALS
112.16 ROTOR TIME
112.17 SPEED LIMIT REFERENCE (StartupControl ; internal signal)
112.19 MECH TIME CONSTANT
112.23 MOTOR TIME USE
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO Only one motor parameter set is used for all motors.
1 YES For each motor a different motor parameter set is used.
65.10 FluxChange / s
DTC: Parameter for adjusting how fast the flux reference (par 27.03) is changed per second.
After the line breaker (Sbpx) has been closed the motor breaker still remains closed for a while until the
load of the converter is commutated smoothly to the line:
For this the torque is ramped to zero and then the flux reference is changed to have a minimum motor
current. This parameter has to be adjusted to achieve a stable control of the flux because optimal flux
reference is depending on ACS1000-, motor- and line properties.
Hints:
0 %/s is used for tuning. Par 27.03 can be adjusted directly to find out optimal flux reference.
If motor current is smaller than 40% of rated current change of flux will be automatically reduced.
Scalar Control: The motor breaker is opened directly after receiving the line breaker (Sbpx) closed
signal. The setting of this parameter has no influence during scalar control.
Unit: % / s Type: R Min: 0 % / s Max: 5 % / s Def: 0.5 % / s Int. scaling:100 == 1 %

/s
MSAI5150 ACS1000 275/389

65.11 Freq. Change / s
Parameter for adjusting how fast the frequency reference is changed per second, when the Synchrotakt
gives the command to increase the frequency reference value (IOEC5, DI2) or to reduce the frequency
reference value (IOEC5, DI3).
Unit: Hz / s Type: R Min: 0.01 Hz / s Max: 1 Hz / Def: 0.1 Hz / s Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
s /s
65.12 Synchrot. Vers.

Selection of the Synchrotakt version. Note!
The wiring and mounting is different for Synchrotakt 4 and 5; please refer to the actual wiring diagrams
for details.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 Synchrot. 4 Synchrotakt 4
1 Synchrot. 5 Synchrotakt 5

ABB
Group 66 UTILITY
66 UTILITY
MULTIPLE - DATA – TRANSMIT FUNCTION
The multiple-data-transmit function can be used for cyclically transmitting a selected number
(array) of parameter values to an overriding system by using only two data sets.
The multiple-data-transmit function is active as soon a valid data set number is set to parameter
66.01 DSWRITE NO4 or 66.09 DSWRITE NO5. If the function is activated the data set
DSWRITE NO4:I1 resp. DSWRITE NO5:I1 transmits the actual selected parameter and the data
set DSWRITE NO4:I2 resp. DSWRITE NO5:I2 transmits the corresponding actual value of actual
selected parameter. In addition the actual value of the selected parameter in parameter 66.07
DS4 PARRD NO4:I3 resp. parameter 66.15 DS4 PARRD NO4:I3 is cyclically transmitted to
DSWRITE NO4:I3 resp. DSWRITE NO5:I3. The interval time of the multiple data transmit
function has to be set depending on the cycle time of the overriding system.
Note!
The update time in the overriding control system (PLC) must be shorter than the total
transmission time. The selected DataSet Number can be used only once in the drive system.
Therefore the selected data set number is disabled in Group 63, Group 91 or Group 94.
CycleTime =
66.02
DS4 TIME INTERVAL
Interval Time x
AMC3 PLC
e.g.: 50 Nr Of Indexes
SELECT
DS4 START ADDRESS
66.03 9 Selected Group COUNTER
Group
e.g.: 901
1 Start Index n1
In dex
1 COMP
SW (R)
I1
I1 = I2
DS4 NR OF INDEXES nx 901 I2
66.04
8 9.01 Comb Fault Word 1
e.g.: 8
Actual se lected
"Parame ter"
Parameter
Write COMPARE
ADD SW (R)
I1
+ DS4 TRANSM PAR I1 = I2
OUT IN Out 66.05 908 I2
+
9.08 Comb Alarm Word 4
Actual "Value of
se le cted P arameter"
Parameter
Read Parameter
Group
Write
Index
DS4 PAR ACT VAL
Va lue IN Out 66.06
Actual "Value of
selected DSx Val3"
Parameter
Read
DS4 PARRD NO4:I3

66.07 IN Out
e.g.: 108 DataSet DataSet

TRANSMIT RECEIVE
DS WRITE NO4
66.01 DS NO: 13 FBA DS NO: 13
e.g.: 13 DS4 TRANSM PAR (Par.66.05)
Index: 1 Index: 1
DS4 PAR ACT VAL (Par.66.06)
Index: 2 Index: 2
DS4 PARRD NO4 : I3 (Par.66.07)
Index: 3 Index: 3
Config Error
DS4 WRITE CONF ERR

66.08
Figure
66.01 DSWRITE NO4 [no.]

This parameter selects the DataSet number for the indexes DSWRITE NO4:I1, DSWRITE NO4:I2 and
DSWRITE NO4:I3.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 277/389

66.02 DS4 TIME INTERVAL [ms]
This parameter defines the interval time of the multiple data transmit function, where the indices are
incremented by 1 every selected interval time. NOTE! The greater the total numbers of indices the
longer the cycle time.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 20ms Max: Def: 50ms Int. scaling:1 == 10ms
60000ms
66.03 DS4 START ADDRESS [conn]

This parameter selects the start group number & index of the parameter group to be transfer to selected
dataset DS WRITE NO4:I1. The actual transmitted parameter is displayed in parameter 66.05 DS4
TRANSM PAR. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired
parameter.
66.04 DS4 NR OF INDEXES [conn]

This parameter specifies the number of indices to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO4:I1.
66.05 DS4 TRANSM PAR [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter cyclically displays the actual transmitted parameter to dataset DS WRITE NO4:I1.
Example: Parameter 66.03 is set to 901, with 9 representing the group no. and 01 representing the
start index of the transmitted (displayed) parameter. Parameter 66.05 set to 5, with 5 representing the
number of indices
--> Parameter 66.05 displays: 1st cycle 901, 902…….905, 2nd cycle 901, 902…….905 a.s.o.
66.06 DS4 PAR ACT VAL [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter simultaneously shows the value corresponding to the transmitted (displayed) group no.
and index in parameter 66.05 DS4 TRANSM PAR. Note! The integer scaling of each parameter has to
be taken into account in the overriding system (PLC).
66.07 DS4 PARRD NO4

This parameter selects the parameter to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO4:I3 cyclically.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired parameter.
66.08 DS4WRITE CONF ERR ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Displays the status of the FA dataset write function configuration
B00 check parameter 66.03 Bit value 0: Not configured or configuration OK
B01 check parameter 66.03 Bit value 1: Error in configuration
B02 check parameter 66.07
Possible errors:
- undefined group
- undefined index
- illegal format
- illegal group
- illegal index
B15 NOT USED - index write protected
Unit: Type: PB Int. scaling: 1 == 1
66.09 DSWRITE NO5 [no.]

This parameter selects the DataSet number for the indexes DSWRITE NO5:I1, DSWRITE NO5:I2 and
DSWRITE NO5:I3.

ABB
66.10 DS5 TIME INTERVAL [ms]
This parameter defines the interval time of the multiple data transmit function, where the indices are
incremented by 1 every selected interval time. NOTE! The greater the total numbers of indices the
longer the cycle time.
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 20ms Max: Def: 50ms Int. scaling:1 == 10ms
60000ms
66.11 DS5 START ADDRESS [conn]

This parameter selects the start group number & index of the parameter group to be transfer to selected
dataset DS WRITE NO5:I1. The actual transmitted parameter is displayed in parameter 66.13 DS5
TRANSM PAR. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired
parameter.
66.12 DS5 NR OF INDEXES [conn]

This parameter specifies the number of indices to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO5:I1.
66.13 DS5 TRANSM PAR [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter cyclically displays the actual transmitted parameter to dataset DS WRITE NO5:I1.
Example: Parameter 66.11 is set to 901, with 9 representing the group no. and 01 representing the
start index of the transmitted (displayed) parameter. Parameter 66.12 set to 5, with 5 representing the
number of indices
--> Parameter 66.13 displays: 1st cycle 901, 902…….905, 2nd cycle 901, 902…….905 a.s.o.
66.14 DS5 PAR ACT VAL [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter simultaneously shows the value corresponding to the transmitted (displayed) group no.
and index in parameter 66.13 DS5 TRANS PAR. Note! The integer scaling of each parameter has to be
taken into account in the overriding system (PLC).
66.15 DS5 PARRD NO5

This parameter selects the parameter to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO5:I3 cyclically.
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired parameter.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 279/389

66.16 DS5WRITE CONF ERR ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Displays the status of the FA dataset write function configuration
B00 check parameter 66.11 Bit value 0: Not configured or configuration OK
B01 check parameter 66.11 Bit value 1: Error in configuration
B02 check parameter 66.15
Possible errors:
- undefined group
- undefined index
- illegal format
- illegal group
- illegal index
B15 NOT USED - index write protected
Unit: Type: PB Int. scaling: 1 == 1
DataSet DSREAD
Table
DS1 DS READ DEBUG NO
18.17 DataSet No.
: Pointer DSVALUE DEBUG:I1
DS9 Value 1 18.18
DSVALUE DEBUG:I2
DS10 Value 2 18.19
: DSVALUE DEBUG:I3
DS51 Value 3 18.20
DS100
:
DS119
Figure DATA SET - RECEIVE / TRANSMIT VALUE DISPLAY
66.17 DSREAD DEBUG NO [no.]

This parameter selects the dataset to display on the panel. Please check parameter 96.29 DSREAD
CONF ERR if there are no values shown on parameter 66.xx … 66.xx.
Example:
If parameter is set to 100:
• the parameter 66.18 DSVALUE DEBUG:I1 shows the value of DataSet 100 Value1
66.18 DSVALUE DEBUG ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter cyclically displays the value corresponding to the selected DATA SET - VALUE I1.
Selection of dataset is done by parameter 66.17 DSREAD DEBUG NO.



ABB
Group 70 DDCS CONTROL
70 DDCS CONTROL
Parameter settings of the DDCS (Distributed Drives Communication System) communication
channels.
CAUTION!
Handle the fibre optic cable with care. Do not touch the ends with bare hands, as fibre optic
cables are extremely sensitive to dirt.
Figure 70-1 Structure of Fieldbus System (DDCS CH0)
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR

Node address for channel 0. When using the APC2 system, the address must be 1. If AC70, FCI-Module or
AC80 is used through the Module – Bus (adapter TB810), CH0 NODE ADDR and input POSITION in the data
base element DRIENG are set according to the following table:
AC70, AC80 & FCI Module - Bus The Position can be calculated as follow:
Position Par. 70.01 16 x hundred number in position
101 17 number + rest of position number
: :
112 28 For example:
201 33 DRIENG / Position = 711
: :
212 44 711 Þ 7 x 16 + 11 = 123
701 113
: : Þ 70.01 = 123
712 124
Figure
MSAI5150 ACS1000 281/389

70.02 CH0 LINK CONTROL
DDCS channel 0 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted through the link
including each device in the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the
communication performance in the link.
70.03 CH0 BAUD RATE

Channel 0 communication speed. This must be set to 4 Mbit/s, when FCI or FBA communication
modules are used. Otherwise, the overriding system automatically sets the communication speed.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 8 Mbit/s
1 4 Mbit/s
2 2 Mbit/s
3 1 Mbit/s
70.04 CH0 TIMEOUT [ms]

The delay time before communication break fault is announced. The time count starts, when the link
does not update the message. When the time has lapsed the alarm CH0 LINK ERR is activated and
Bit 7 is activated in 9.13 ALARM WORD 5. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the timeout
supervision function.
Note !
If there are no connections in channel 0, then the value has to be set to 0ms (Timeout monitoring is not
calculating).
Unit: ms Type: I Min: 0 Max: 60000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms
70.05 CH0 ComLossControl

This parameter defines the action in case of a communication fault in channel 0 (CH0) of the NAMC-
board.
In case of communication fault and parameter selection 1…5, alarm message CH0 LINK ERR is
activated and Bit 7 is set to 1 in 9.13 ALARM WORD 5. In case of communication fault and parameter
selection 6, fault message CH0 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 10 is set to 1 in 9.07 FAULT WORD 7.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP Drive will be stopped by ramping. Deceleration time is defined by
RAMPING parameter 22.02 DECEL TIME.
2 STOP TORQ The drive will be stopped by torque limit.
3 COAST STOP The drive will be stopped by coasting
4 LAST SPEED The drive is running continuously with the last actual speed.
5 CONST The drive is running continuously with the constant speed reference
SPEED15 (33.16 CONST SPEED 15).
6 FAULT Drive will be tripped according to “Trip 1b” reaction
70.06 CH1 LINK CONTROL ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

DDCS channel 1 intensity control for transmission LED’s. This value is adjusted through the link
including each device in the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the

ABB
MASTER / FOLLOWER MACRO
The Master/Follower Application Macro is designed for applications in which the system is run by several ACS1000
drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, chain, belt etc. Thanks to the Master/Follower macro
the load can be evenly distributed between the drives.
The external control signals are connected to the Master ACS1000 only. The Master controls the Followers via fibre
optic serial communication link.
The Master station is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow the torque or speed reference of the Master.
In general:
Torque control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower drives are coupled
fixedly to each other by gearing, a chain etc. No speed difference between the drives is possible (see Figure 70-2).
Speed control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and the Follower drives are coupled
flexibly to each other. A slight speed difference between the drives is possible (see Figure 70-2). When both the Master
and Followers are speed controlled, drooping is also typically used (Parameter 24.02 DROOP RATE).
In some applications both speed control and torque control of the Followers are required. In those cases a flying
change between speed and torque control can be performed via digital input of the follower (see Chapter 3 – Operation,
at the Master/Follower Application Macro Manual).
Please pay attention to the description of parameters 21.09 and 21.10: MCB closing and opening time limits for master
drive!
Speed-Controlled Master Speed-Controlled Master

Follower Follows the Torque Reference Follower Follows the Speed Reference
of the Master of the Master
ACS1000 ACS1000
Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3
External n External n
Control Signals Control Signals
MASTER MASTER
ACS1000 ACS1000
2 2 2 2
Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3
FOLLOWER FOLLOWER
Follower Fault Follower Fault
Master/Follower Link Master/Follower Link
Supervision Supervision
Figure 70-3 MasterFollower Applications, Schematic Representation
MSAI5150 ACS1000 283/389

MASTER / FOLLOWER LINK
Figure 70-4 Master/Follower Connections (DDCS CH2)
MASTER / FOLLOWER LINK CONFIGURATION

Channel 2 (CH2) on the AMC board is used for the Master/Follower link between the drives. The drive is programmable
to be either the master or a follower in the communication. Typically the speed controlled process master drive is
configured also to be the communication master.
Figure

ABB
FOLLOWER SUPERVISION
The Follower does not send any feedback data via the serial Master/Follower link. Therefore it is highly recommended
to separately wire the Follower fault information back to the Master. The connection stops both, the Master drive and
the Follower drives, upon a Follower fault.
Master Follower Follower
ACS1000 ACS1000 ACS1000
DO4 - Relay Output
DO4 - Relay Output
DO4 - Relay Output

DI8 - Run Enable
DI8 - Run Enable
DI8 - Run Enable

(Process Stop)
(Process Stop)
(Process Stop)
IOEC 2
IOEC 2
IOEC 2
Fault (-1)
Fault (-1)
Fault (-1)
X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1
Figure 70-6 Follower ‘Fault Information’ Wiring
MSAI5150 ACS1000 285/389

FOLLOWER SIGNAL SELECTION
The signals, which are sent as broadcast message to Data Set 63, are selected with Par. 70.09 , 70.10 and 70.11. If
one of the selected signals in the parameters has a wrong format, the alarm message WRONG MF-SIG will be
displayed on the Master drive panel and Bit 9 is activated in 9.13 ALARM WORD 5.
MASTER FOLLOW ER
Data Set 63 Data Set 63
(FIXED)
Value DDCS Link Value
7.07 CH2 M ASTE R SI GN AL1 DS FCW
Follower Control Word 70.09 1 CH 2 1 3.21
23.01 CH2 M ASTE R SI GN AL 2 DS SPEED REF
Speed Reference 70.10 2 2 3.22
3.13 CH2 M ASTE R SI GN AL 3 DS TORQ REF A
70.11 3 3 3.23
Torque Used Ref
P ar.70.17 - FO LL SPEED RE F
"MASTER"
nr
Data Set
1 or 10 122.19
DDCS Link Value

P ar.70.18 - FO LL TORQ REF
FBA CH 0 1 "MASTER"
*
2
torq_ref_a
3 122.21
Par .75.0 4 - COM M M OD ULE P ar.70.08 - C H2 M/F MODE

"FBA DS ET1 o r FBA DS ET 10" "FOLL OW ER"
Par .75.0 6 - DA TA SE T CO MM
OCW
"RE AD / WRIT E" Figure 11 - 1
& 7.06 &
Par .70.0 8 - CH2 M/F MO DE
"FO LL OWER" Figure 11 - 2
P ar.70.17 - FO LL SP EED REF &

"FOLL OWE R"
REF1 OVE RR SYST
3.24
Figure 12 - 1
&
Par .70.18 - FOLL TORQ REF & Figure 12 - 2
"FO LL OW ER"
REF2 OVE RR SYST
3.25
* NOTE!
If Par. 70.17 resp. 70.18 is selected to "MASTER" , the direct fast communication link is used to send
the SPEED REF resp. TORQ REF A directly to motor control (parameter 122.19 resp. 122.21), the
reference value from Application (Par. 23.01 SPEED REF resp. 25.01 TORQ REF A) will be ignored!
Figure 70-7 Follower Signal Selection - Overview
70.07 CH2 NODE ADDR

Node address for channel 2. This is used in an application, with one or several point to point
communication connections between the AMC boards.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 Master drive
2 ... 254 Node address for follower drives

ABB
70.08 CH2 M/F Mode
The master/follower feature is designed for applications with several ACS 1000 drives where motor
shafts are via gearing, chains, belts etc. Thanks to the master/follower feature the load can be distributed
evenly between the drives. The external control signals are connected to the master drive only. The
master controls the followers via fibre optic serial communication link. The master is typically in speed
control mode and the other drives follow the torque or speed reference of the master.
Torque control should be used for the followers if no speed difference between the drives is possible
(see figure 70-2), i.e.if the motor shafts of the master and follower drives are rigidly coupled by gearing,
chain etc.
Speed control should be used should be used for the followers if a slight speed difference between
the drives is possible (see figure 70-2), i.e. if the motor shafts of the master and the follower drives are
coupled flexibly. If both master and followers are speed controlled, typically a droop is applied (P24.02
DROOP RATE).
CAUTION! To avoid conflicts, all drives coupled to the same machinery should receive the external
control signals only via the master.
General rules:
• Connect all external control signals to the master drive only.
• Do not control the followers via the control panel or a fieldbus system.
• P11.01, P11.02, P12.03 and P12.06 must not be set to COMM.MODULE
• Do not change the control location of the follower drive to local.
DDCS channel 2 (see figure 70-3) is used to send the torque reference, speed reference and the follower
control word from the master drive to the follower drives via dataset 41. CH2 communication mode is
configured with P70.08.
If P70.08 is set to 2 “MASTER” or to 3 “FOLLOWER”, several other parameters are preset in order to
achieve a quick default configuration. The presets allow to operate the master in speed control and the
followers in torque control mode. In addition the torque reference and the control bits like start/stop are
sent from the master to the follower drives.
If P70.08 is set to 2 “MASTER” the following parameter settings are applied and stored:
P127.04 MF1 PARRD I1 = 707 (The master sends the follower control word P7.07 every 50 ms to the
followers via DS41.1)
P127.05 MF1 PARRD I2 = 11302 (The master sends the speed reference P113.02 every 1 ms to the
P127.06 MF1 PARRD I3 = 313 (The master sends the used torque reference P3.13 every 1 ms to the
If P70.08 is set to “FOLLOWER”, the following parameter settings are applied and stored:
P11.01 Ext1Strt/Stop/Dir = 10: COMM.MODULE; P11.02 Ext2Strt/Stop/Dir = 10: COMM.MODULE
P11.03 Direction = 3: REQUEST; P11.04 Ext1 MCB Control = 10: COMM.MODULE
P11.05 Ext2 MCB Control = 10: COMM.MODULE; P12.02 Ext1/Ext2 Select = 8: EXT2
P12.03 Ext Ref1 Select = 12: COMM:REF; P12.06 Ext Ref2 Select = 12: COMM:REF
P22.01 Acc/Dec 1/2Sel = 5: DI03-IO2; P33.01 ConstantSpeedSel = 5: DI4(SPEED4)
P99.14 ControlMode (DTC) = 2: Torque Ctrl
P70.09 MF1 PARWR I1 = 706 (writes the follower control word from the master every 50 ms into the
overriding control word P7.06)
P70.10 MF1 PARWR I2 = 11302 (writes the speed reference from the master every 1 ms into the speed
reference P113.02)
P70.11 MF1 PARWR I3 = 11306 (writes the torque reference from the master every 1 ms into the torque
reference P113.06)
Note! These parameter settings remain unchanged if P70.08 is set to 1 “NOT IN USE” or another value
is selected and they can be changed manually.
The Follower does not send any feedback data via the serial master/follower link. Therefore it is highly
recommended to provide a separate fault information from the follower back to the master. With such a
connection, both the master drive and the follower drives are stopped upon a follower fault (see figure
70-4).
The Follower does not send any feedback data via the serial master/follower link. Therefore it is highly
recommended to provide a separate fault information from the follower back to the master. With such a
connection, both the master drive and the follower drives are stopped upon a follower fault (see figure
70-4).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NOT IN The master / follower link is not active and CH2 is not used for
USE communication
2 MASTER The drive is the master in the M/F link and broadcasts via CH2 the contents
of data set 41
3 FOLLOWER The drive is the Follower in the M/F link. Torque reference is read from data
set DS41.3 into TORQ REF A and from DS41.3 into SPEED REF.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 287/389

Speed-Controlled Master Speed-Controlled Master
Follower Follows the Torque Reference Follower Follows the Speed Reference
of the Master of the Master
ACS1000 ACS1000
Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3
External n External n
Control Signals Control Signals
MASTER MASTER
ACS1000 ACS1000
2 2 2 2
Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3
FOLLOWER FOLLOWER
Follower Fault Master/Follower Follower Fault Master/Follower
Supervision Link Supervision Link
Figure
Figure
Master Follower Follower
ACS1000 ACS1000 ACS1000

DO4 - Relay Output
DO4 - Relay Output
DO4 - Relay Output

DI8 - Run Enable
DI8 - Run Enable
DI8 - Run Enable

(Process Stop)
(Process Stop)
(Process Stop)
IOEC 2
IOEC 2
IOEC 2
Fault (-1)
Fault (-1)
Fault (-1)
X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1
Figure

ABB
70.09 MF1 PARWR I1 [conn]
Group + Index of the signal to be sent as broadcast message to Data Set 63 Index 1 in the Follower
drives (control word).
Example:
The setting 707 broadcasts 7.07 FOLLOWER CONTROL WORD (the default value is 707, which
denotes Parameter Group 7, Index 07).
Note!
This parameter is not used, if 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER. The CH2 MASTER SIGNAL
1 is fixed to 707!

drives (speed reference).
Example:
The setting 2301 broadcasts 23.01 SPEED REF (the default value is 2301, who denotes Parameter
Group 23, Index 01).
Note!
This parameter is not used, if 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER.

drives (torque reference).
Example:
The setting 313 broadcasts 3.13 TORQ USED REF (the default value is 313, which denotes actual
signal group 3, Index 13).
Note!
This parameter is not used, if 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER.

DDCS CH2 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted through the link including
each device in the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication
performance in the link.
70.13 M/F COMM L DELAY [ms]

Time delay before a communication break fault is announced. The time count starts, when the link does
not update the message. When the time has elapsed the alarm CH2 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 8 is
set to 1 in 9.13 ALARM WORD 5.
Note!
If there are no connections in channel 2, then the value has to be set to 0ms (Timeout monitoring is not
calculating).
Unit: ms Type: I Min: 1 ms Max: 60000 Def: 100 ms Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms
ms
MSAI5150 ACS1000 289/389

This parameter defines the action in case of a communication fault in CH2 on the NAMC-03 board.
In case of communication fault and parameter selection 1…5, alarm message CH0 LINK ERR is
activated and Bit 7 is set to 1 in 9.13 ALARM WORD 5.
In case of communication fault and parameter selection 6, fault message CH0 LINK ERR is activated
and Bit 10 is set to 1 in 9.07 FAULT WORD 7.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP RAMP Drive will be stopped by ramping. Deceleration time is defined by
parameter 22.02 DECEL TIME.
2 STOP The drive will be stopped by torque limit.
TORQUE
3 COAST The drive will be stopped by coasting
STOP
5 CNST SPD15 The drive is running continuously with the constant speed reference
(33.16 CONST SPEED 15).
6 FAULT Drive will be tripped according to “Trip 1b” reaction
70.15 CH3 NODE ADDR

Node address for channel 3. The start-up and maintenance tools normally use this channel. If CH3
channels of several drives have been connected in a ring or star (using a branching Unit), each one
must be given a unique node address.
Note!
The new node address becomes valid only on the next AMC3 power-on.

including each device in the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the

ABB
PC CONNECTIONS TO CHANNEL 3
POINT TO POINT Connection

AMC3
CH3
NPCM - 01
PCMCIA
board
RING Connection
AMC3 AMC3 AMC3
CH3 CH3 CH3
STAR Connection AMC3

NDBU - 91, - 95 or - 85 CH3
Branching Unit Card
AMC3
CH3
AMC3
CH3
Figure 70 6 Connection AMC33-Board(s) <-> PC (DDCS CH3) - Examples
70.17 CH4 NODE ADDR

Node address for channel 4.
When using the APC2 system, the address must be 1.

including each device in the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the
MSAI5150 ACS1000 291/389

70.19 CH4 BAUD RATE
Channel 4 communication speed. This must be set to 4 Mbit/s, when FCI or FBA communication
modules are used. Otherwise, the overriding system automatically sets the communication speed.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 8 Mbit/s
1 4 Mbit/s
2 2 Mbit/s
3 1 Mbit/s
Unit: Type: Enum Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1=1
70.20 CH4 TIMEOUT [ms]

The delay time before communication break fault is announced. The time count starts, when the link
does not update the message. When the time has lapsed the alarm CH4 LINK ERR is activated and
Bit 7 is activated in 9.13 ALARM WORD 5. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the timeout
supervision function.
Note ! If there are no connections in channel 4, then the value has to be set to 0ms (Timeout
monitoring is not calculating).
Unit: ms Type: I Min: 0 Max: 60000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

This parameter defines the action in case of a communication fault in channel 4 (CH4) of the AMC-
board.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP Drive will be stopped by ramping. Deceleration time is defined by
RAMPING parameter 22.02 DECEL TIME.
2 STOP TORQ The drive will be stopped by torque limit.
3 COAST STOP The drive will be stopped by coasting
5 CONST The drive is running continuously with the constant speed reference
SPEED15 (33.16 CONST SPEED 15).
6 FAULT Drive will be tripped according to “Trip 1b” reaction.
Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1=1

ABB
Group 72 DI FUNCTION SEL
72.01 DI FuncSelStatus1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Parameter shows status of the function depending on selected digital input.
b00 DI SafeTorqueOff Signal is used in parameter 38.14 SafeTrqOffCtrl for the safe
torque off command
b01
b02 DI Not used/enabled at the moment
EmergencyStop
b03 DI Arc Detection Signal is used in parameter 38.17 ArcFaultDetection for the
arc protection function
b04
b05
b06
b07
b08
b09
b10
b11
b12
b13
b14
b15 NOT USED
72.02 STOCommandGrp+Indx
A binary signal (i.e. from digital input) is assigned to parameter 72.01 DI FUNCTION
SELECTION STATUS 1 – b00 by setting parameter 72.02 to the parameter group and
index from which the signal is to be taken from. Additionally, the bit number, which
identifies the signal within the status word, has to be selected with parameter 72.03. The
format is (x)xyy, where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
If Par. 72.02 is set to 422 and 72.03 is set to 1, the status of DI STO COMMAN (b00) of parameter
72.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 is set to 1 if digital input IOEC2 – DI02 is active.
72.03 STOCommandBitNum
This parameter specifies the bit number (0…15) of the previous selected signal 72.02.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 293/389

72.06 EmergeStopGrp+Indx
Example:
If Par. 72.06 is set to 422 and 72.07 is set to 2, the status of DI EMERGE STOP COMMAND (b02)
of parameter 72.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 is set to 1 if digital input IOEC2 –
DI03 is active.
72.07 EmergeStopBitNum
72.08 ArcFltDetGrp+Indx
Example:
If Par. 72.08 is set to 422 and 72.09 is set to 1, the status of DI ARC DETECT (b03) of parameter
72.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 is set to 1 if digital input IOEC2 – DI02 is active.
72.09 ArcFltDetBitNum

ABB
Group 75 OPTION MODULES
75 OPTION MODULES
All IOEC - boards are connected in a ring to the AMC3 - board by using DDCS channel 1 (CH1).
Each of these modules is given a unique address using by setting the rotating switch to the
appropriate value. The IOEC1 Standard I/O board has permanent address number 2 (node-
address-switch set to 2) and IOEC2 Standard I/O board has permanent address number 4 (node-
address-switch set to 4).
Fieldbus adapter modules are connected to the AMC3 - board by using DDCS channel 0 (CH0).
The encoder module NTAC-02 is connected to the AMC3 - board by using DDCS channel 5 (CH5).
The parameters marked with (O) can only be altered while the ACS1000 is stopped.
75.01 IOEC3 OptionBoard

IOEC3 option board selection. IOEC 3 option board increase the numbers of I/Os and release the
options where this board is needed. The board is connected in series with IOEC boards 1 & 2 (IOEC4)
on CH1. The board is given the address 6 by setting the Node-switch to 6 as shown below.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO extension IOEC 3 option board is not activated
1 YES extension IOEC 3 option board is activated
6
Node-
switch
Figure
75.02 IOEC4 OptionBoard

IOEC4 option board selection. IOEC 4 option board increase the numbers of I/Os and release the
options where this board is needed. The board is connected in series with IOEC boards 1 & 2 (IOEC3)
on CH1. The board is given the address 8 by setting the Node-switch to 8 as shown below.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO extension IOEC 4 option board is not activated
1 YES extension IOEC 4 option board is activated
Node-
switch
Figure
MSAI5150 ACS1000 295/389

75.03 ENCODERLESS DRIVE
NTAC-02 pulse encoder module selection. Module is connected the channel CH5. The module is given
the address 16 by setting the DIP switches as shown below.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO extension NTAC-02 module is not activated
1 YES extension NTAC-02 module is activated
ON
DIP -
switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Figure
75.04 FBA CommModule

This parameter is used, if a FBA module (Field Bus Adapter) or an ABB Advant controller (AF100-Bus)
is used to communicate with the drive. The module is connected channel 0 (CH0). See also Chapter 2 –
Fieldbus Control.
Note!
If parameter 75.04 COMM MODULE is set to ‘DSET1 xx’, only parameter groups 90 and 91 will be
visible.
If parameter 75.04 COMM MODULE is set to ‘DSET10 xx’, parameter groups 90…95 will be visible.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO Fieldbus module is not installed.
2 DSET1 The drive is controlled through the communication link (channel CH0) by
R/W using DataSets 1 to 8. This is a typical setting for the use of a fieldbus
adapter module.
3 DSET1 The drive is not controlled through the communication link. Only actual
READ signals/parameters can be read from drive.
4 DSET10 The drive is controlled through the communication link (channel CH0) by
R/W using DataSets 10 to 39. This is a typical setting for use with an ABB Advant
controlled AF100-Bus adapter module (for example APC2, AC70, AC80,
FCI, NPBA-02, NCSA-01).
5 DSET10 The drive is not controlled through the communication link. Only actual
READ signals/parameters can be read from drive.
75.05 ACDA CommModule

This parameter is used if a ACDA is used to communicate with the drive. The module is connected to
channel 4 (CH4).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 NO ACDA module is not installed.
2 DSET100 The drive is controlled through the communication link (CH4) by using
R/W DataSet 100 to 119.
3 DSET100 R The drive is not controlled through the communication link. Only actual
signals/parameters can be read from the drive.
75.06 Fan(s)TypeSel
Fan type selection.
NAME VALUE MEANING
AC FAN 0 AC fan type installed.
EC FAN 1 EC fan type installed.

ABB
Group 80 ACT SIGNALS IO3
80 ACT SIGNALS IO3

Measured or calculated values
80.01 TrafoTempExt/3 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Scaled physical value of analogue input 1, IOEC3 displayed in degrees centigrade, if par. 81.26 ‘AI1
Select IO3’ = ‘TrafoTemp ext/3’; otherwise see par. 80.15 or 80.17 ACS 1000: Temperature of the
external transformer oil or windings. ACS 1000i: Temperature 3 of the internal transformer windings.
80.02 BearingTempDE [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Temperature of the motor bearing driven end in degrees centigrade.
80.03 BearingTempNDE [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Temperature of the motor bearing non driven end in degrees centigrade.
80.04 OutsideAirTemp [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Temperature of the outside air temperature in degrees centigrade, if par. 81.27 ‘AI4 Select IO3’ =
‘OutsideAirTemp’; otherwise see par. 80.16 or 80.18 or 80.19 or 80.21.

Scaled value of analogue input 1. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value is set. See
parameter 81.02...81.03.

parameter 81.08...81.09

parameter 81.14...81.15.

parameter 81.20...81.21.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 297/389

80.09 DI1-7 StatusIOEC3 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Status of digital inputs DI1 ... DI7 of the optional IOEC 3 board.Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

80 ACT SIGNALS IO3
0100001
DI 6 DI 1
Figure

LOC 1 0.0 rpm

80 ACT SIGNALS IO3
0100001
DI 13 DI 8
Figure

B14
B15 (Not Used)

ABB
Value of analogue output 1 in milliampere.

Value of analogue output 2 in milliampere.

LOC 1 0.0 rpm

80 ACT SIGNALS IO3
0100010
DO6 DO2
Figure
80.15 LoadBearTemp1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Bearing temperature 1 of the load displayed in degrees centigrade, if par. 81.26 ‘AI1 Select IO3’ =
‘LoadBearTmp1’; otherwise see par. 80.01 or 80.17.
80.16 LoadBearTemp2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Bearing temperature 2 of the load displayed in degrees centigrade, if par. 81.27 ‘AI4 Select IO3’ =
‘LoadBearTmp2’; otherwise see par. 80.04 or 80.18 or 80.19 or 80.21.
80.17 VibraSens1 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Vibration signal 1 from vibration sensor in percent, if par. 81.26 ‘AI1 Select IO3’ = ‘VibraSens1’;
otherwise see par. 80.01 or 80.15.
80.18 VibraSens2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Vibration signal 2 from vibration sensor in percent, if par. 81.27 ‘AI4 Select IO3’ = ‘VibraSens2’;
otherwise see par. 80.04 or 80.16 or 80.19 or 80.21.
80.19 WtrCoolPress2 [bar] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled pressure 2 of the cooling water, if par. 81.27 ‘AI4 Select IO3’ = ‘CoolWtrPres2’;
otherwise see par. 80.04 or 80.16 or 80.18. It is needed for the closed water cooling circuit and
represents the input pressure.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 299/389

80.20 WtrCoolPressDiff [bar] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Difference of cooling water pressure 1 (4.03) and 2 (80.19). It is needed for the closed water cooling
circuit and represents the difference of the output and the input pressure.
80.21 OutputTrafoTemp [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Temperature of the output (e.g. step-up ) transformer, if par. 81.27 ‘AI4 Select IO3’ = ‘OutpTrafoTmp’;
otherwise see par. 80.04 or 80.16 or 80.18 or 80.19.
80.22 GndCurrent 1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Ground current 1 supervision signal if parameter 81.26 ‘AI1 Select IO3’ = ‘GndCurrent1’; otherwise see
par. 80.04 or 80.16 or 80.18 or 80.19.
80.23 GndCurrent 2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Ground current 2 supervision signal if parameter 81.27 ‘AI4 Select IO3’ = ‘GndCurrent2’.

ABB
Group 81 AN INPUT IOEC3
81 AN INPUT IOEC3
The analogue input value can be selected in milliamps or volts by means of a HW-switch.

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).
See parameter 80.05 AI1 IOEC3 [mA] and 80.01 ‘TrafoTemp ext/3’ / 80.15 ‘LoadBearTemp1’ / 80.17
‘VibraSens1’.

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V).
See parameter 80.05 AI1 IOEC3 [mA] and 80.01 ‘TrafoTemp ext/3’ / 80.15 ‘LoadBearTemp1’ / 80.17
‘VibraSens1’.

Minimum value of AI1. Value to correspond to minimum reference. NOTE!
This parameter will be fixed set to “4mA / 2V” to prevent overheating of the transformer, if “Integrated
Transformer Fan” option is used (Par.: 41.07 INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN INST) or if par. 81.26 ‘AI1
Select IO3’ = ‘TrafoTemp ext/3’.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0 mA / 0V 0...20 mA or 0...10V range
1 4 mA / 2V 4...20 mA or 2...10V range


VALUE NAME MEANING

Analogue input offset value. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par. 81.01 = ON) or
manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V). See
parameter 80.06 AI2 IOEC3 [mA] and 80.02 BearingTempDE [°C].

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V). See
parameter 80.06 AI2 IOEC3 [mA] and 80.02 BearingTempDE [°C].
MSAI5150 ACS1000 301/389

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA

parameter 80.07 AI3 IOEC3 [mA] and 80.03 BearingTempNDE [°C].

parameter 80.07 AI3 IOEC3 [mA] and 80.03 BearingTempNDE [°C].

Minimum value of AI3 Value to correspond to minimum reference.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA

ABB
This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).
See parameter 80.08 AI4 IOEC3 and
80.04 ‘OutsideAirTemp’ / 80.16 ‘LoadBearTemp2’ / 80.18 ‘VibraSens2’ / 80.19 ‘WtrCoolPress2’
Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 2000 / Int. scaling:1 == 1
100

This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V).
See parameter 80.08 AI4 IOEC3 and
80.04 ‘OutsideAirTemp’ / 80.16 ‘LoadBearTemp2’ / 80.18 ‘VibraSens2’ / 80.19 ‘WtrCoolPress2’.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA
81.26 AI1SelIO3
This parameter selects the AI1 signal of IOEC3. The parameter is write-protected; it is set by the loading
package via type code. actual value par.
NAME VALUE MEANING
NONE 0
TrafTmpExt/3 1
LoadBearTmp1 2
VibraSens1 3
GndCurrent1 4
MSAI5150 ACS1000 303/389

81.27 AI4SelIO3
This parameter selects the AI4 signal of IOEC3. The parameter is write-protected; it is set by the loading
package via type code. actual value par.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NONE
1 OutsAirTmp outside air temperature , 80.04
2 LoadBearTmp2 bearing temperature 2 of load (e.g. pump or fan) , 80.16
3 VibraSens2 vibration sensor 2 , 80.18
4 CoolWtrPres2 cooling water pressure 2 (only water cooled type) , 80.19
5 OutpTrafoTmp output trafo temp. , 80.21
6 GndCurrent2 ground current 2 protection
81.28 AI4 Scale IO3


ABB
Group 82 DIG INPUT IOEC3
82 DIG INPUT IOEC3

Control of the digital inputs. With this parameter it is possible to select if the digital input of an
alarm signal is high or low active.
82.01 DI1 Invert IO3

Inversion selection for digital input DI1, OIL LEVEL ALARM
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT DI1: high value = Alarm is active, low value = Alarm is not active
1 INVERTED DI1: high value = Alarm is not active, low value = Alarm is active

Inversion selection for digital input DI2, OIL TEMPERATURE ALARM or TRAFO WINDING
TEMPERATURE ALARM
VALUE NAME MEANING

Inversion selection for digital input DI4, BUCHHOLZ ALARM
VALUE NAME MEANING

Inversion selection for digital input DI6, MOTOR COOLING ALARM
VALUE NAME MEANING

Inversion selection for digital input DI8, VIBRATION SUPERVISION ALARM
VALUE NAME MEANING

Inversion selection for digital input signal DI11, EXTERNAL MOTOR PROTECTION ALARM.
VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 305/389

Group 83 AN OUTPUT IOEC3
83 AN OUTPUT IOEC3
Parameter group 83 provides the settings to assign any accessible real type numerical value of the
AMC – table (i.e. actual values like motor current, motor speed…) to an analogue output of IOEC3
and make the adjustment for scaling, filtering, inverting of the output signal.
Numerical values from a higher-level control system can also be transferred to the analogue
outputs.
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR FREQUENCY is to be read out at AO1 – IOEC3, parameter
The default setting of 83.01 is 2301, SpeedRef.
NOTE!
In case of EC fans this analog output cannot be used, since its used for redundant fan speed reference.

VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset

83.05 AO1 Scale IO3

Nominal value of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 83.01 AO1 GROUP+INDEX
IO3. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).

ABB
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR CURRENT is to be read out at AO2 – IOEC3, parameter 83.06 is
The default setting of 83.06 is 108, MotorTorqueFilt.


VALUE NAME MEANING

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset

83.10 AO2 Scale IO3

Nominal value of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 83.06 AO2 GROUP+INDEX
IO3. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 307/389

Group 84 DIG OUTPUT IOEC3
84 DIG OUTPUT IOEC3

Control of the digital outputs of IOEC3 board.
Note!
Depending on the selected APPLICATION MACRO, OPTION or INVERTER TYPE, the digital
outputs are fixed to used functions (see Figure 84-1 84-2).
A binary signal (i.e. from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO1 by setting parameter 84.01 to
the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. Additionally the bit number,
which identifies the signal within the status word, has to be selected with parameter 84.02. The format is
Example:
If Par. 84.01 is set to “807” and 84.02 is set to “0” , digital output DO1 is active when 8.07 LIMIT WORD
2 / BIT 0 is “1”. If Par. 84.01 is set to “702” and 84.02 is set to “12,13 or14”, digital output DO1 is
controlled from the overriding system by 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2.
By default, DO1 indicates Speed Ref Limit signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 0).
NOTE!
With the motor cooler option (par. 38.02 ‘MotorCooler’ = ‘SOFT STOP’ or ‘ALARM’) DO1 is fixed to the
‘Motor Cooler Order On’ command.


Inversion selection for digital output-signal DO1.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT high value = relay ON , low value = relay OFF
1 INVERTED high value = relay OFF , low value = relay ON
Example:
By default, DO2 indicates LOCAL operation signal (Par. 8.01 / Bit 9 – inverted ; parameter 84.06 is set
to INVERTED).
NOTE!
With the new aux. power concept and the redundant cooling fan / pump option (par. 41.03 = ‘TWO
(FAN1&2)’) DO2 is fixed to the following command:
ACS 1000: ‘Cooling Fan/Pump 2 Order On’,
ACS 1000i: ‘Cooling Fan Grp. 2 Order On’ (second inverter and transformer fan in parallel).

ABB

VALUE NAME MEANING
1 INVERTED value = relay OFF , low value = relay ON
which identifies the signal within the status word, has to be selected with parameter 84.08.The format is
Example:
If Par. 84.07 is set to “807” and 84.08 is set to “1”, digital output DO3 is active when 8.07 LIMIT WORD
By default, DO3 indicates SPEED ACT LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 1)
NOTE!
With water cooling DO3 is fixed to the following command:‘Order close raw water regulation valve’


VALUE NAME MEANING
Example:
By default, DO4 indicates CURRENT LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 2)
NOTE!
With water cooling DO4 is fixed to the following command: ‘Order open raw water regulation valve’

MSAI5150 ACS1000 309/389

VALUE NAME MEANING
Example:
Note!
If Par. 38.10 INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN set to an other value than “0”, the digital output D05 is fix
connected to TRAFO FAN1 ORD ON signal. Par. 84.13, 84.14 & 84.15 are not in function.
By default, DO5 indicates TORQUE LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 3)



VALUE NAME MEANING
Example:
Note!
If Par. 41.07 INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN set to an other value than “0”, the digital output D06 is fix
connected to TRAFO FAN2 ORD ON signal. Par. 84.16, 84.17 & 84.18 are not in function.
By default, DO6 indicates SUP SIG 1 LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 4)


ABB
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT value = relay ON , low value = relay OFF
SELECTION AND PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS OF IOEC 3
Figure 84-1 Digital Outputs D01…D03 on IOEC 3 - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 311/389

Figure 84-2 Digital Outputs D04…D06 on IOEC 3 - Overview

ABB
Group 85 ACT SIGNALS IO4
85 ACT SIGNALS IO4

Measured or calculated values.
85.01 PIDActualValue1 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Feedback signal for PID controller (feedback from analogue input AI1-IOEC4)
85.02 PIDActualValue2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Feedback signal for PID controller (feedback from analogue input AI2-IOEC4)
85.03 MotorWdgTmpPhU2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled second temperature of the motor winding phase U. Value of AI2-IOEC4 in °C.
85.04 MotorWdgTmpPhV2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled second temperature of the motor winding phase V. Value of AI3-IOEC4 in °C.
85.05 MotorWdgTmpPhW2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Measured and scaled second temperature of the motor winding phase W. Value of AI4-IOEC4 in °C.

86.02...86.03.

86.08...86.09.

86.14...86.15.

86.20...86.21.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 313/389

85.10 DI1-7 StatusIOEC4 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

85 ACT SIGNALS IO4
0100001
DI 6 DI 1
Figure

LOC 1 0.0 rpm

85 ACT SIGNALS IO4
0100001
DI 13 DI 8
Figure

ABB

B14
B15 (Not Used)

Value of analogue output 1 signal in milliampere.

Value of analogue output 2 signal in milliampere.

Status of the optional IOEC 4 board relay outputs.
LOC 1 0.0 rpm

85 ACT SIGNALS IO4
0100010
DO6 DO2
Figure
MSAI5150 ACS1000 315/389

Group 86 AN INPUT IOEC4
86 AN INPUT IOEC4
Scaling and selection of Analogue Input’s

parameter 85.06 AI1 IOEC4 and 85.01 PIDActualValue1.

parameter 85.06 AI1 IOEC4 and 85.01 PIDActualValue1.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
mA

parameter 85.07 AI2 IOEC4 and 85.02 PIDActualValue2 resp. 85.03 MotorWdgTmpPhU2.

parameter 85.07 AI2 IOEC4 and 85.02 PIDActualValue2 resp. 85.03 MotorWdgTmpPhU2.

ABB
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)


VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA

parameter 85.08 AI3 IOEC4 and 85.04 MotorWdgTmpPhV2.

parameter 85.08 AI3 IOEC4 and 85.04 MotorWdgTmpPhV2.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 30s Def: 0.1s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s

VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0mA Max: 0.5 mA Def: 0mA Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA
MSAI5150 ACS1000 317/389

parameter 85.09 AI4 IOEC4 and 85.05 MotorWdgTmpPhW2.

parameter 85.09 AI4 IOEC4 and 85.05 MotorWdgTmpPhW2.

VALUE NAME MEANING
0 0mA/0V (0...20 mA or 0...10V range)
1 4mA/2V (4...20 mA or 2...10V range)

Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 30 s Def: 0.1 s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s

VALUE NAME MEANING

manually.
Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0mA Max: 0.5mA Def: 0mA Int. scaling:1000 == 1
mA
86.26 AI2SelIO4 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

This parameter selects the AI2 signal of IOEC4. actual value par.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NONE
1 PIDActValue2 Feedback signal 2 for PID controller , 85.02
2 MotWgTmpPhU2 Second motor winding temp. phase U , 85.03

ABB
Group 87 DIG INPUT IOEC4
87 DIG INPUT IOEC4

Control of the digital inputs. With this parameter it is possible to select if the digital input of an
alarm signal is high or low active.

Inversion selection for digital input signal DI1, EXTERNAL WATER COOLING ALARM
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT high value = Alarm is active,low value = Alarm is not active
1 INVERTED high value = Alarm is not active,low value = Alarm is active

Inversion selection for digital input signal DI4, Liquid Leakage Alarm
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 DIRECT high value = Alarm is active,low value = Alarm is not active
1 INVERTED high value = Alarm is not active,low value = Alarm is active
MSAI5150 ACS1000 319/389

Group 88 AN OUTPUT IOEC4
88 AN OUTPUT IOEC4
Parameter group 88 provides the settings to assign any accessible real type numerical value of the
AMC – table (i.e. actual values like motor current, motor speed…) to an analogue output of IOEC4
and make the adjustment for scaling, filtering, inverting of the output signal.
Numerical values from a higher-level control system can also be transferred to the analogue
outputs.
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR SPEED is to be read out at AO1 – IOEC4, parameter 88.01 is set
to 102 with 1 representing the group and 02 representing the index.
The default setting of 88.01 is 102, MotorSpeed.


VALUE NAME MEANING

Analogue output signal 1 offset in milliampere. This parameter is not used, if the temperature
measurement function is activated by a parameter 30.01 (constant current supply for the temperature
sensor).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset

88.05 AO1 Scale IO4

Nominal value of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 88.01 AO1Group+IndexIO4.
This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).

ABB
Example:
When the actual value of the MOTOR TORQUE FILT is to be read out at AO2 – IOEC4, parameter
The default setting of 88.06 is 108, MotorTorqueFilt.


VALUE NAME MEANING

Analogue output signal 2 offset in milliampere.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 0mA no offset

88.10 AO2 Scale IO4

Nominal value of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 88.06 AO2Group+IndexIO4.
This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 321/389

Group 89 DIG OUTPUT IOEC4
89 DIG OUTPUT IOEC4

Control of the digital outputs of IOEC4board.
Note!
Depending on the selected APPLICATION MACRO, OPTION or INVERTER TYPE, the digital
outputs are fixed to used functions (see Figure 89-1 89-2).
Example:
By default, DO1 indicates SPEED REF LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 0)


VALUE NAME MEANING
Example:
By default, DO2 indicates SPEED ACT LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 1)


ABB
VALUE NAME MEANING
Example:
By default, DO3 indicates CURR LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 2)



VALUE NAME MEANING
1 INVERTDE high value = relay OFF , low value = relay ON
Example:
By default, DO4 indicates TORQ LIMIT signal (Par. 8.07 / Bit 3)



VALUE NAME MEANING
MSAI5150 ACS1000 323/389

Example:


VALUE NAME MEANING
Digital output 6 is controlled by a selectable bit (see Par. 89.17) of the signal selected with this
parameter. The format is (x)xyy, where (x) the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.
Example:
Note!
If Par. 38.05 BRAKE CHOPPER INSTALLED is set to “1”, the digital output D06 is fix connected to the
BRAKE CHOPPER ORDER ON signal. Par. 89.16 , 89.17 & 89.19 are not in function.


VALUE NAME MEANING

ABB
Figure 89 1 Digital Outputs D01…D03 on IOEC 4 - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 325/389

Figure 89 2 Digital Outputs D04…D06 on IOEC 4 - Overview

ABB
Group 90 D SET REC ADDR
90 D SET REC ADDR

Signal addresses for the data received from the overriding system.
The format is x(xyy), where (x)x = Group and yy = Index.
Overriding
AMC 3
System
DataSet Table
DS DataSet Selection Address

(Gr. 75.04)
Assignment of AMC
1 DataSet Table
3
Group
5
DDCS link
90.01... 90.12
7
CH0
DS
10
12
14
16
Figure 90-1 Receive Data from Fieldbus (Data Set 1…16) - Overview
90.01 D SET 1/10 VAL 1

DataSet 1 Value 1 or DataSet 10 Value 1 receive address (50ms interval). Fixed to Overriding Control
Word (7.06 - OCW).
90.02 D SET 1/10 VAL 2

DataSet 1 Value 2 or DataSet 10 Value 2 receive address (50ms interval). Fixed to Reference 1 (3.24 -
REF1 OVERR SYSTEM).
90.03 D SET 1/10 VAL 3

DataSet 1 Value 3 or DataSet 10 Value 3 receive address (50ms interval). Fixed to Reference 2 (REF2
OVERR SYSTEM).
MSAI5150 ACS1000 327/389

90.04 D SET 3/12 VAL 1
DataSet 3 Value 1 or DataSet 12 Value 1 receive address (50ms interval)
90.05 D SET 3/12 VAL 2

90.06 D SET 3/12 VAL 3

90.07 D SET 5/14 VAL 1

DataSet 5 Value 1 or DataSet 14 Value 1 receive address (100 ms interval)
90.08 D SET 5/14 VAL 2

90.09 D SET 5/14 VAL 3

90.10 D SET 7/16 VAL 1

90.11 D SET 7/16 VAL 2

90.12 D SET 7/16 VAL 3


ABB
Group 91 D SET TR ADDR
91 D SET TR ADDR
Signal addresses for the data transmitted to the overriding system.
Overriding
AMC 3
System
DataSet Table
DS DataSet Selection Address

(Gr. 75.04)
Assignment of AMC
2 DataSet Table
4
Group
6
DDCS link
91.01... 91.12
8
CH0
DS
11
13
15
17
Figure 91-1 Transmit Data to Fieldbus (Data Set 2…17) - Overview
91.01 D SET 2/11 VAL 1

DataSet 2 Value 1 or DataSet 11 Value 1 transmit address (50ms interval).Fixed to Main Status Word
(MSW).
91.02 D SET 2/11 VAL 2

Data set 2 Value 2 or DataSet 11 Value 2 transmit address (50ms interval)
91.03 D SET 2/11 VAL 3

DataSet 2 Value 3 or DataSet 11 Value 3 transmit address (50ms interval)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 329/389

91.04 D SET 4/13 VAL 1
DataSet 4 Value 1 or DataSet 13 Value 1 transmit address (100 ms interval)
91.05 D SET 4/13 VAL 2

91.06 D SET 4/13 VAL 3

91.07 D SET 6/15 VAL 1

91.08 D SET 6/15 VAL 2

91.09 D SET 6/15 VAL 3

91.10 D SET 8/17 VAL 1

91.11 D SET 8/17 VAL 2

91.12 D SET 8/17 VAL 3


ABB
92 D SET REC ADDR

The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Parameter Group and yy = Parameter Index.
Overriding
System AMC 3
Address
Assignment of AMC
DataSet Table DataSet Table
Group
DDCS link 18
92.01 ... 92.21
20 93.01 ... 93.12
:
CH0 :
38
Figure 92 1 Receive Data from Fieldbus (Data Set 18…50) - Overview
92.01 D SET 18 VAL 1

Data set 18 value 1 receive address (100 ms interval)
92.02 D SET 18 VAL 2

92.03 D SET 18 VAL 3

92.04 D SET 20 VAL 1

92.05 D SET 20 VAL 2

92.06 D SET 20 VAL 3

MSAI5150 ACS1000 331/389

92.07 D SET 22 VAL 1
92.08 D SET 22 VAL 2

92.09 D SET 22 VAL 3

92.10 D SET 24 VAL 1

92.11 D SET 24 VAL 2

92.12 D SET 24 VAL 3

92.13 D SET 26 VAL 1

92.14 D SET 26 VAL 2

92.15 D SET 26 VAL 3

92.16 D SET 28 VAL 1

92.17 D SET 28 VAL 2

92.18 D SET 28 VAL 3

92.19 D SET 30 VAL 1


ABB
92.20 D SET 30 VAL 2
92.21 D SET 30 VAL 3

MSAI5150 ACS1000 333/389

93 D SET REC ADDR

(see Figure 92-1 Overview received data from fieldbus)
NOTE !
This group 93 is visible only if the FBA Dset10 is selected (75.01).
93.01 D SET 32 VAL 1

93.02 D SET 32 VAL 2

93.03 D SET 32 VAL 3

93.04 D SET 34 VAL 1

93.05 D SET 34 VAL 2

93.06 D SET 34 VAL 3

93.07 D SET 36 VAL 1

93.08 D SET 36 VAL 2

93.09 D SET 36 VAL 3

93.10 D SET 38 VAL 1


ABB
93.11 D SET 38 VAL 2
93.12 D SET 38 VAL 3

Data set 38 value 3 transmit address (250 ms interval)
93.13 D SET 50 VAL 1

93.14 D SET 50 VAL 2

Data set 50 value 2 receive data (100 ms interval)
93.15 D SET 50 VAL 3

MSAI5150 ACS1000 335/389

94 D SET TR ADDR
The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Parameter Group and yy = Parameter Index.
Overriding
System AMC 3
Address
Assignment of AMC
DataSet Table DataSet Table
Group
DDCS link 19
94.01 ... 94.21
21 95.01 ... 95.12
:
CH0 :
39
Figure 94-1 Transmit Data to Fieldbus (Data Set 19…51) - Overview
94.01 D SET 19 VAL 1

94.02 D SET 19 VAL 2

94.03 D SET 19 VAL 3

94.04 D SET 21 VAL 1

94.05 D SET 21 VAL 2

94.06 D SET 21 VAL 3


ABB
94.07 D SET 23 VAL 1
94.08 D SET 23 VAL 2

94.09 D SET 23 VAL 3

94.10 D SET 25 VAL 1

94.11 D SET 25 VAL 2

94.12 D SET 25 VAL 3

94.13 D SET 27 VAL 1

94.14 D SET 27 VAL 2

94.15 D SET 27 VAL 3

94.16 D SET 29 VAL 1

94.17 D SET 29 VAL 2

94.18 D SET 29 VAL 3

94.19 D SET 31 VAL 1

MSAI5150 ACS1000 337/389

94.20 D SET 31 VAL 2
94.21 D SET 31 VAL 3


ABB
95 D SET TR ADDR
(see Figure 94-1 Overview transmit data to fieldbus)
NOTE !
This group 93 is visible only if the FBA Dset10 is selected (75.01).
95.01 D SET 33 VAL 1

95.02 D SET 33 VAL 2

95.03 D SET 33 VAL 3

95.04 D SET 35 VAL 1

95.05 D SET 35 VAL 2

95.06 D SET 35 VAL 3

95.07 D SET 37 VAL 1

95.08 D SET 37 VAL 2

95.09 D SET 37 VAL 3

95.10 D SET 39 VAL 1

MSAI5150 ACS1000 339/389

95.11 D SET 39 VAL 2
95.12 D SET 39 VAL 3

95.13 D SET 51 VAL 1

Data set 51 value 1, address feedback for D SET 50 VAL 1 (100 ms interval)
95.14 D SET 51 VAL 2

Data set 51 value 2 inquire data (100 ms interval)
95.15 D SET 51 VAL 3

Data set 51 value 3 inquire address feedback (100 ms interval)

ABB
Group 97 PSTD BUFFER
97 PSTD BUFFER
Access to diagnostic buffer.
97.01 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

First entry of the diagnostic buffer.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 341/389

Group 98 REAL TIME CLOCK
98 REAL TIME CLOCK

This group provides the setting for the actual date and time.
Note:
If the AC80 communication is established, the AC80 is able to send the time synchronisation signal
to AMC3 a result of this; it is not possible to set the time manually (using indexes below).
98.01 SetNewRealTime
Selects the source for setting of new clock time (Par. 98.02… 98.07).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 PANEL SET Set new real time clock by Panel command “PANEL SET ON”. After
OFF new time has been set, the parameter will be automatically set back
to “PANEL SET OFF”.
2 PANEL SET ON Set new real time clock by Panel command “PANEL SET ON”. After
new time has been set, the parameter will be automatically set back
to “PANEL SET OFF”.
3 DI1 – IO2 Set new real time clock by digital Input. The new time will always be
set after a 0 – 1 flag.
9 COMM.MODULE Set new real time clock by fieldbus command (ACW1 – Bit9). The
new time will always be set after a 0 – 1 flag.
98.02 SetValue Year

Set value of year
98.03 SetValue Month

Set value of month.
Month
98.04 SetValue Day

Set value of day.
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 31 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 day
98.05 SetValue Hour

Set value of hour.
Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 23 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 hour
98.06 SetValue Minutes

Set value of minute.
Minute

ABB
98.07 SetValue Seconds
Set value of second.
Second
98.08 ActValue Year ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Present year.
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 Year
98.09 ActValue Month ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Present month.
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 Month
98.10 ActValue Day ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Present day.
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 day
98.11 ActValue Hour ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Present hour.
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 hour
98.12 ActValue Minutes ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Present minute.
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 Minute
98.13 ActValue Seconds ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

Present second.
Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 Second
MSAI5150 ACS1000 343/389

ABB
Group 99 START-UP DATA
99 START-UP DATA
Parameters to set up the motor information.
Running the motor and the equipment being driven with incorrect start-up data can result in improper
operation, reduction in control accuracy and damage to the equipment.
99.01 LANGUAGE
(101.04) The ACS 1000 Drives Macro displays all information in the selected language. The CDP 312 Control
Panel or DrivesWindow show 13 alternative languages.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 ENGLISH English
1 ENGLISH AM English Am.
2 DEUTSCH Deutsch
3 ITALIANO Italiano
4 ESPANOL Espanol
5 PORTUGUES Portugese
6 NEDERLANDS Netherlands
7 FRANCAIS Francaise
8 DANSK Dansk
9 SUOMI Suomi
10 SVENSKA Svenska
11 CESKY Czech
12 POLSKI /LOC1
13 PO-RUS /LOC2
99.02 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE

(110.01) Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate. It is not possible to start the ACS 1000 Drive Macro without
setting this parameter.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 300 Max: 12000 Def: 300 Int. scaling:1 == 1 V
99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT

(110.02) Rated motor current.
Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:10 == 1 A
99.04 MOTOR NOM FREQ

(110.03) Nominal frequency from the motor rating plate.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 6.25 Max: 150 Def: 0 Int. scaling:10 == 1 Hz
99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED

(110.04) Nominal speed from the motor rating plate.
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm
99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER

(110.05) Nominal power from the motor rating plate.
Unit: kW Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 kW
99.07 MOTOR NOM COSFII

(110.06) Motor cos phi from the motor rating plate.
Unit: Type: R Min: 0.5 Max: 1.00 Def: 0.5 Int. scaling:100 == 1

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Chapter 1 − Fieldbus Control
Continue Group 99 START-UP DATA

99.10 DRIVE CTRL MODE
(111.01) Motor control mode selection.
VALUE NAME MEANING

0 DTC Direct Torque Control mode is selected.
1 SCALAR Scalar control mode is selected.
2 FACTORY TEST Factory test mode is selected.
3 SCLR STEP-UP Scalar on Step-Up control mode is selected.
99.11 ApplicationRestore
Restores either USER MACRO 1, USER MACRO 2 or FACTORY parameter values depending on the
selection in Parameter 99.13 ApplicationMacro (except “USER MACRO x” parameter group 75 and 99)
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 NO Not selected.
-1 YES Values are restored.
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: NO Int. scaling:1 == 1
99.12 Drive ID Number

This parameter can be used by the overriding system to check the correct connections of the optical
cables to the drive. This parameter requires support from the overriding system.
99.13 ApplicationMacro
Application macros are stored parameter sets. By using the user macros customized parameter sets
can be stored and loaded.
The current parameter settings can be saved as a User Macro: USER 1 SAVE or USER 2 SAVE. These
settings can be recalled using USER 1 LOAD or USER 2 LOAD. If USER MACRO 1 or 2 is in use, the
parameter values are stored to the last saved values. In addition, the last saved results of the motor
identification are restored.
Exception: Settings of Parameters 16.05. During APPLICATION MACRO changes, the alarm message
“MACRO CHANGE” will be shown on the panel (until the new macro is loaded completely). If the MCB
will try to close during the “macro change” – time the drive will change to trip state and a fault message
is coming up.
Note:
The backup function of Drive Window only saves the active User Macro if called: thus both User Macros
must be backed up separately.
The User Macro can be changed from digital inputs or from the overriding system by using AUX CTRL
WORD 1 (7.02) Bit 4 (see also Parameter 16.05). The status of the active macro can be seen in AUX
STATUS WORD 2 (8.03) Bits 8 and 9.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 FACTORY Factory parameters are recalled and stored to the FLASH.
2 USER 1 LOAD Parameter set1 (USER MACRO 1) is loaded to the RAM memory.
3 USER 1 SAVE Parameter set1 (USER MACRO 1) is saved to the FLASH.
4 USER 2 LOAD Parameter set2 (USER MACRO 2) is loaded to the RAM memory.
5 USER 2 SAVE Parameter set2 (USER MACRO 2) is saved to the FLASH.
6 NONE SEL None selected.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 345/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Group 99 START-UP DATA
99.14 ControlMode(DTC)
The DTC-control-modes are pre-programmed parameter settings for faster parametrizing. All settings
could be made also manually in the different parameter groups.
Every time the selection is changed, the corresponding parameter settings marked with magenta in
Table 99-1 are applied and stored.
Note!
The unmarked parameters are not overwritten when a different control mode is selected.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 Speed Ctrl
2 Torque Ctrl
3 PID Ctrl
4 Seq. Ctrl
99.15 Motor Number

This parameter allows to select different motor parameter sets. No. 1...4 are related to the parameter
sets in groups 55...58.
With the default setting 0 the original parameters in groups 20, 99 and 150 are not changed.
99.17 MAX MEAS VOLTAGE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(190.01) Maximum measurable voltage of DC voltage measuring chain.
Unit: V Type: R Int. scaling: 1==1V
99.18 MAX MEAS CURRENT ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

(190.02) Maximum measurable current of phase current measuring chain.
Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 1==1A
For missing information contact ABB support line.

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Fieldbus Communication

1.1 Fieldbus Communication
1.1.1 Fieldbus / DDCS Communication
Fieldbus / DDCS Communication

AF100 - Bus
Fieldbus (e.g. Profibus)
Fieldbus (Modbus)
Programming AF100 ABB Advant Controller

Fieldbus Adapter AC70 / AC80
Tool
Fieldbus Adapter Fieldbus Adapter F C I
AC70
e.g.: NPBA-80 e.g.: NPBA-12
AC80 S800 I/O
Tool Link (RS232)
MODBUS (RS485)
Service Tool
e.g. Drive Window
X3 X1
RS485 AC80
NMBC-01 Drive Bus
(Modbus-Interface)
CDP 80 CDP 80
X2 X4
I/O Interface
DDCS Protocol
External CH0 CH3 ACS1000

X1 X2 Control
RS485 CH5 AMC3 CH2 Master/Follower
NDPI-21
(Panel Interface) CH1 Link
CDP 80
X3
Motor
Supervision
Standard
IOEC1 & 2
Transformer
Supervision Option
IOEC3 ... 6
Additional Customer I/O

CDP80 - Panel
INVERTER
Encoder Module
NTAC-20
Motor
Figure 1.1-1 - Fieldbus / DDCS Communication - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 347/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
1.1.2 Fieldbus Adapter Configuration

Fieldbus Adapter Configuration
Fieldbus
Master · One fieldbus adapter per drive
· Fieldbus adapter acts as slave
· No direct communication between drives
Fieldbus
........ Fieldbus
Adapter
........ ABB Drive
Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave n
Figure 1.1-2 - Fieldbus Adapter Configuration - Overview
1.1.3 ABB AC400 – Advant Controller Configuration
ABB AC400 - Advant Controller Configuration
Drives Objects Advant Operator

Workplace
AC 400 Series
ACS 1000 with System Application:
AC 70 vers. 1.1/1
Drives Application sw
AC 400 Series vers. 1.3
AdvaCommand vers. 1.8
FCI
I I/O
FCI vers. 1.3
S800 I/O
= Optical ModuleBus
TB810*) = ACS 1000
AC70
Drives Application sw
AF 100
*) TB810 is an optical ModuleBus Modem
Figure 1.1-3 - ABB AC400 - Advant Controller Configuration - Overview

ACS1000 MSAI5150
ABB AC400 - Advant Controller, AMPL Configuration Example
Motor 12 Presentation in AdvaCommand

New DB elements Speed Interlocking:
DRIENG
Current
En abled
Status :
Communication OK
Driv e OK
Driv e Al arm
Driv e Warning
MMCX State: Reference Actual

Driv e Limit
L ocal /Remote:
Rem ot e (Central )
Local (Machi ne)
Local (Panel)
No t read y Speed 123
Faulted Speed 1 23
M od e:
Di sabl ed % to rqu e 123 Current 1 23
St op ped
Running
Start Drive
events
Stop
PC elements
MMC-ORD MMC-IND
New New New

Motor12 Motor12
Control Status DRI-CONV
DRI-S DRI-R
Setpoint 1 Speed
Setpoint 2 Current
Figure 1.1-4 - ABB AC400 - Advant Controller, AMPL Configuration - Example
1.1.4 Integer Scaling on the DDCS Link
Due to the effectiveness of the communication method, the data is transferred as

integer values through the link. Then the actual and reference values have to be
scaled to 16-bit integers for the DDCS link. The integer scaling factor is mentioned
in the AMC table parameter list in the column Int. scaling.
07 MOTOR CURRENT
Index Description Measured motor current absolute value (rms).
:
Unit: A Type: R Min: Max: Int. scaling: 10 == 1A
Each parameter has two different gateways to write the value: integer format or
decimal. Finally, the result is exactly same in the AMC program. This relation is
always shown in the signal and parameter table as shown above
MSAI5150 ACS1000 349/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Fieldbus Interface Data Set 1 … 17 Transmit and Receive
1.2 Fieldbus Interface Data Set 1 … 17 Transmit and Receive
1.2.1 Data Set – Definition

Fieldbus Interface Data Set 1…17 Definition
* Each data set consists of three 16-bit words (data words)
* Contents of each data word depend on drive application
FBA Gr.90 Data Set 1 or Data Set 10 DRIVE

Data Word 1 Data Word 2 Data Word 3
CW REF1 REF2
FBI Gr.91 Data Set 2 or Data Set 11 APPL

SW ACT1 ACT2
Figure 1.2-1 - Data Set 1…17 Definition - Overview
1.2.2 Data Set - Data Flow
Fieldbus Interface Data Flow
FIELDBUS OPTICAL LINK

BAUDRATE: 4 Mbit/s
INTERVAL: 2 ms
FBA DRIVE
DS1, DS3 … DS7
or
FBI DDCS DDCS APPL
DS10,DS12 … DS16
DS2, DS4 … DS8

or
DS11, DS13 … DS17
FBA= Fieldbus Adapter

FBI= Fieldbus Interface
DDCS= Distributed Drive Communication System
APPL= Drive Application
DSx= Data Set x
Figure 1.2-2 - Data Set 1…17 Data Flow - Overview

ACS1000 MSAI5150

1.2.3 Data Set - Control Structure
Data Set 1 … 16 - Receive
Parameter Setting
Par.: 90. 01 :
Read DataSet values
DSET1 or DSET10 Parameter from Fieldbus
Main Control Word Selection
DSREAD
Par.: 90. 01 : 706 PAR 10 DataSet
DataSet 1/10 Value 1
Value 1
Copy the received
90 Group 1 Value 2
value from Fieldbus to
1 Index DataSet 1/10 Value 3 Group 7.06
Value 3
(fixed) 706 InitValue
706 PARWR
DSET 1/10 VAL 1 Name 7 (Group) Group
DIV 6 (Index) Index
Speed Reference 1 100
Value
Par.: 90. 02 : 324 PAR
90 Group Copy the received
2 Index Group 3.24
324 PARWR
DSET 1/10 VAL 2 Name 3 (Group)
Group
DIV 24 (Index)
Speed Reference 2
100 Index
Value
Par.: 90. 03 : 325 PAR
3 Index Group 3.25
325 PARWR
Group
DIV 25 (Index)
Index
100
Read DataSet values Value
from Fieldbus
Aux Control Word 1 DSREAD
Par.: 90. 04 : 702 PAR 12 DataSet Value 1
Data Set 3 Value 1
Copy the received
90 Group 3 Data Set 3 Value 2
Value 2 value from Fieldbus to
4 Index Data Set 3 Value 3 Group 7.02
Value 3
(free pro- InitValue
702
grammable) 702 PARWR
D SET 3 VAL 1 Name 7 (Group)
Group
DIV
2 (Index) Index
100
Value
Figure 1.2-3 - Data Set 1…16 Receive - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 351/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Data Set 2 … 17 - Transmit

Parameter Setting Parameter
Selection
Par.: 75. 04 :
(DataSet 1 or DataSet 10)
Main Status Word
Par.: 91. 01 : 801 PAR
Read selected value
91 Group
(Group 8.01) and transmitt
11
1 Index it to DDCS - Link WriteDataSet values to
InitValue
2 DDCS - Link
(fixed) 801
801 PARRD
DIV Group DSWRITE
100 1 (Index) Index DataSet
Motor Speed
Par.: 91. 02 : 102 Value
PAR DataSet 2/11 Value 2
Value 1
91 Group Read selected value Value 2
(free pro- (Group 1.02) and transmitt
grammable) 2 Index Value 3
it to DDCS - Link
102 InitValue
D SET 2/11 VAL 2 Name

102 PARRD
1 (Group)
DIV Group
Motor Current
100 2 (Index)
Index
Value
Par.: 91. 03 : 107 PAR
91 Group Read selected value
(free pro- 3 Index
(Group 1.07) and transmitt
grammable) it to DDCS - Link
107 InitValue
Name
107 PARRD
D SET 2/11 VAL 3
1 (Group)
DIV Group
100 7 (Index)
Index
Value
Motor Torque
Par.: 91. 04 : 109 PAR

91 Group Read selected value 13
(Group 1.09) and transmitt WriteDataSet values to
(free pro- 4 Index 4
it to DDCS - Link
grammable) DDCS - Link
109 InitValue
DSET 4/13 VAL 1 Name
109 PARRD
1 (Group) DSWRITE
DIV Group
100 9 (Index) DataSet
Index
Value Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Figure 1.2-4 - Data Set 2…17 Transmit - Overview

ACS1000 MSAI5150

1.3 Fieldbus Interface Data Set 18 … 51 Transmit and Receive
1.3.1 Data Set – Definition
Fieldbus Interface Data Set 18…51 Definition
* Each data set consists of three 16-bit words (data words)
* Contents of each data word depend on drive application
FCI Gr.92 Data Set 18 DRIVE

Free Free Free
programmable programmable programmable
AF100 Gr.94 Data Set 19 APPL

Free Free Free
programmable programmable programmable
Figure 1.3-1 - Data Set 18…37 Definition - Overview
1.3.2 Data Set – Data Flow
Fieldbus Interface Data Flow
FIELDBUS OPTICAL LINK

BAUDRATE: 4 Mbit/s
INTERVAL: 2 m s
FBA DRIVE
FBI DDCS DS18,DS20 … DS38 DDCS APPL
DS19, DS21 … DS39
FBA= Fieldbus Adapter

FBI= Fieldbus Interface
DDCS= Distributed Drive Com m unication System
APPL= Drive Application
DSx= Data Set x
Figure 1.3-2 - Data Set 18…37 Data Flow - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 353/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
1.3.3 Data Set – Control Structure
Data Set 18 … 36 - Receive
Parameter Setting Read DataSet values

Parameter from Fieldbus
Selection
DSREAD
Par.: 92. 01 : PAR DataSet Value 1
DataSet 18 Value 1
92 Group
18 Copy the received
DataSet 18 Value 2 value from DDCS - Link
(free pro- Value 2
1 Index to Group x.xx
grammable) DataSet 18 Value 3
Value 3
0 InitValue
0 PARWR
D SET 10 VAL 1 Name x (Group) Group
DIV x (Index) Index
100
Value
Par.: 92. 02 : PAR
(free pro- value from DDCS - Link
grammable)
0 InitValue
0 PARWR
DIV x
100 (Index) Index
Value
Par.: 92. 03 : PAR
(free pro- value from DDCS - Link
grammable)
0 InitValue
0 PARWR
DIV
x (Index) Index
100
Read DataSet values Value
from Fieldbus
DSREAD
Par.: 92. 04 : PAR DataSet 20 Value 1
20 DataSet Value 1
92 Group DataSet 20 Value 2 Copy the received
Value 2 value from DDCS - Link
(free pro- 4 Index DataSet 20 Value 3 to Group x.xx
grammable) Value 3
0 InitValue
0 PARWR
DIV x (Index)
100 Index
Value
Figure 1.3-3 - Data Set 18…36 Receive - Overview

ACS1000 MSAI5150

Data Set 19 … 37 - Transmit
Parameter Setting
Parameter
Selection
Par.: 94. 01 : PAR Read selected value
94 Group (Group x.xx) and transmitt
(free pro-
1 Index
it to DDCS - Link WriteDataSet values
grammable)
InitValue
to DDCS - Link
xxx
xxx PARRD
DSET 19 VAL 1 Name x (Group)
DIV Group DSWRITE
100 xx (Index) Index 19 DataSet
DataSet 19 Value 1
Par.: 94. 02 : Value Value 1
PAR DataSet 19 Value 2
94 Group Read selected value Value 2
(free pro- (Group x.xx) and transmitt DataSet 19 Value 3
2 Index Value 3
xxx InitValue
DSET 19 VAL 2 Name

xxx PARRD
x (Group)
DIV Group
100 xx (Index)
Index
Value
Par.: 94. 03 : PAR
94 Group Read selected value
(free pro- (Group x.xx) and transmitt
3 Index
xxx InitValue
Name
x PARRD
DSET 19 VAL 3 x (Group)
DIV Group
100 xx (Index)
Index
Value
Par.: 94. 04 : PAR

Read selected value
94 Group
(free pro-
(Group x.xx) and transmitt WriteDataSet values
4 Index it to DDCS - Link
grammable) to DDCS - Link
xxx InitValue
Name
xxx PARRD
DSET 21 VAL 1 x (Group) DSWRITE
DIV Group
100 xx (Index) 21 DataSet
Index
DataSet 21 Value 1
Value Value 1
DataSet 21 Value 2
Value 2
DataSet 21 Value 3
Value 3
Figure 1.3-4 - Data Set 19…37 Transmit - Overview
1.3.4 Special Data Sets 50 & 51 Communication
Data Set 50 & 51
DataSet 50 DataSet 51
Value 1 Value 1
Value 2 Value 2
DS16READ DS16WRITE
Value 3 Value 3
ParWrite
DIV Group
100 Index
Input
ParRead
Group
DIV
100 Index
Output
Figure 1.3-5 - Data Sets 50 & 51 Communication - Overview
MSAI5150 ACS1000 355/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Statemachine for Fieldbus Control
1.4 Statemachine for Fieldbus Control
(from any state)
MSW_FAULT
MSW_NON_POW ER FAULT_WITH_
DEFECT FAULT WITH DEFECT
NON_POWER SWITCH-ON INHIBITED ASW 2 Bit7 = 1
MCB_OFF
POWER_ON
DISCHARGED
MSW_INIT_PPCS AUXILIARY_POWER_OFF
INIT_PPCS SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
ASW 2 Bit 0 = 0
PPCS_OK (from any state)
MSW_CALIBRATE MSW_INIT MSW_FAULT_STOPPING

CALIBRATE CALIBRATION INIT SWITCH-ON INHIBITED FAULT_STOPPING TRIPPED
ASW 2 Bit 0 = 1 MSW Bit 3 = 1
CALIBRATE_DONE & INIT_DONE & INIT_DONE &

GROUND_SWITCH_OPEN GROUND_SWITCH_CLOSED GROUND_SWITCH_OPEN FLUX_RAMP_END
ACW1 Bit 13 = 0 ACW1 Bit 13 = 1 ACW 1 Bit 13 = 0
MSW_FAULT_STOPPED
FAULT_STOPPED TRIPPED
MSW Bit 3 = 1
MSW_READY_TO_CHARGE
READY_TO_
CHARGE READY TO SWITCH ON
MSW Bit 0 = 1 TIME_TAU_ROTOR
MCB_ON MCB_OFF &

OCW Bit 0 = 1 UDC > 50V
MSW_FAULT_1A MSW_FAULT_1B
FAULT_1A FAULT 1 A FAULT_1B FAULT 1 B
MSW _CHARGING
CHARGING ACW2 Bit 1 = 1 ACW2 Bit 2 = 1
READY TO SWITCH ON
STOP_MOTOR
MCW Bit 3 = 0
RESET
MCB_OFF
OCW Bit 7 = 1
MCB_OFF
CHARGING_TIME
OCW Bit 0 = 0 (from any state)
MSW _READY_TO_RUN MSW_FAULT_ALL_OFF

READY_TO_ FAULT_ALL_
READY TO OPERATE TRIPPED
RUN OFF
MSW Bit 1 = 1 ASW Bit 3 = 1
START_MOTOR MCB_OFF RESET

OCW Bit 3 = 1 OCW Bit 0 = 0 OCW Bit 7 = 1
UDC < 50V UDC > 50V

MSW _MAGNETIZING
MAGNETIZING MODULATING
ASW2 Bit 3 = 1
(from any state) (from any state)

MAGNETIZE_END
STOP_MOTOR or
ASW1 Bit 3 = 1 MCB_OFF
MSW_FAULT_2A MSW_FAULT_2B
FAULT_2A FAULT 2 A FAULT_2B FAULT 2 B
MSW_RUNNING ACW2 Bit 3 = 1 ACW2 Bit 4 = 1
RUNNING OPERATION ENABLED
MSW Bit 2 = 1 OFF 2
RESET
OCW Bit 7 = 1
STOP_MOTOR MCB_OFF
STOP_MOTOR
OCW Bit 3 = 0
OCW Bit 3 = 0
(COAST STOP
(RAMP STOP n = 0) (from any state)
n = 0 / I = 0)
MSW _BREAKING
BREAKING OPERATION ENABLED
MSW_FAULT_3
FAULT_3 FAULT 3
ASW2 Bit 5 = 1
START_MOTOR MCB_OFF
N < CRIT SPEED
OCW Bit 3 = 1
MECH_TIME_CONST
RESET
MSW_STOPPING OCW Bit 7 = 1
STOPPING STOPPING
(from any state)

(from any state)
RAMP_END
PROCESS_STOP PROCESS_COAST_
OFF3 OFF3 STOP
MSW STOPPED OFF2
OCW Bit 2 = 0 OFF2
STOPPED STOPPED OCW Bit 1 = 0
ASW1 Bit 11 = 0 n(f) = 0 n(f) = 0 / I = 0
MCB_CLOSED MCB_OFF
ASW2 Bit 5 = 1 MSW Bit 0 = 0
01 MSW_DISCHARGING no Transitions due to:

DISCHARGING READY TO SWITCH ON
OCW = Overriding Control Word
ASW2 Bit 6 = 1
trips MCW = Main Control Word
changed motor data ACW = Aux. Control Word
ID run MSW = Main Status Word
MCB_ON
"SoftStop" ASW = Aux. Status Word
DISCHARGING_TIME Overvoltage during
OCW Bit 0 = 1 RFG = Ramp Function Generator
Ready_to_run n = Speed
I = Input Current
f = Frequency
Figure 1.4-1 Fieldbus Control – Statemachine

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Example of a Fieldbus Controlled Drive

1.5 Example of a Fieldbus Controlled Drive
1.5.1 Default Parameter Settings

Group 75 Group 51
75.04 CommModule FBA DSET 1 READ/WRITE Þ 51.xx Fieldbus Module
Par. depending
Group 11
11.01 Ext1 Strt/Stop/Dir COMM.MODULE
11.03 Direction REQUEST
11.04 Ext1 MCB Control COMM.MODULE
Group 12
12.02 Ext1/Ext2 Select COMM.MODULE
12.03 Ext Ref1 Select COMM.MODULE
12.04 Ext Ref1 Minimum 0 rpm
12.05 Ext Ref1 1100 rpm
Maximum
Data Transfer (Data Set):

DataSet 1/10 Val 1 Þ Par.: 7.06ÞOverriding Control Word (OCW)
DataSet 1/10 Val 2 Þ Par.: 3.24 Þ Reference 1 Overriding System (REF1 OS)
DataSet 2/11 Val 1 Þ Par.: 8.01 Þ Main Status Word (MSW)
Note!
If
75.04 CommModule FBA DSET 10 READ/WRITE
is set, the communication to the overriding system is done via DataSet 10…51. The control of the drive is working in the
same way.
Data Transfer (Data Set):

Transmit Over
DataSet 1/10 Val 1 Þ Par.: 7.06ÞOverriding Control Word (OCW)
DataSet 2/11 Val 1 Þ Par.: 8.01 Þ Main Status Word (MSW)
MSAI5150 ACS1000 357/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
1.5.2 Pre-Conditions
7.06 Overriding Control Word (pre-conditions)

Bit 00 Bit 01 Bit 02 Bit 03 Bit 04 Bit 05 Bit 06 Bit 07 Bit 08 Bit 09 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15
MCB Off2 Off3 Run Ramp Ramp Ramp Reset Inching Inching Remote Ext Ctrl Proces Not Not Not
On Out Hold in Zero 1 2 Coman Locatio s Stop Used Used Used
Zero d n
5238 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
5238
D
8.01 Main Status Word

RDY RDY RDY Tripped Off 2 Off 3 On Alarm At Remote Above Ext Ctrl Not Not Not Not
ON RUN REF Status Status Inhibit Setpoin Limit Locatio Used Used Used Used
MCB t n
561 D 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
231 H
drive is ready for “CHARGING” (switch on the MCB)
1.5.3 Fault Reset

7.06 Overriding Control Word
Zero d n
5366 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
14F6
H

MCB t n
569 D 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
239 H
sending of “RESET” - bit
Note!
If a fault is pending (Bit 03 of 8.01 MSW is set to “1”) check the reason for
it. After you have get rid of it, set Bit 07 of 7.06 OCW to “1” for at least 1s.

ACS1000 MSAI5150

1.5.4 Charging the DC Link (Switch on the MCB)
pre-conditions : 7.06 OCW - 5238D

8.01 MSW - 561D
Þ set Bit 00 in 7.06 OCW to “1” Þ MCB will be switched on and ACS1000
starts charging the DC – Link.
7.06 OVERRIDING CONTROL WORD

Zero d n
5239 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
1477
H
MAX CHARGING
Udc
7.06 - OCW
8.01 - MSW
MIN 7.06 - OCW 8.01 - MSW

Bit 00: 0 -> 1 Bit 01: 0 -> 1
Figure 1.5-1 - Charging the DC-Link - Diagram
Þ as soon as the ACS1000 has finished charging the DC - Link, Bit 01 in

8.01 MSW will be set to “1” Þ drive is ready to start
8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD

MCB t n
563 D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
233 H
drive is ready for “START”
MSAI5150 ACS1000 359/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
1.5.5 Start the Motor (Switch Dive to Running)
pre-conditions : 7.06 OCW - 5239D 3.24 REF1 OS - 20000D

8.01 MSW - 563D
Þ set Bit 03 in 7.06 OCW to “1” Þ drive starts magnetizing. After

magnetising is finished drive starts to run up to speed reference (according
acceleration time) given from overriding system.

Zero d n
5247 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
147F
H
MAX Magnetizing Accelaration Running

nmot
7.06 - OCW
Imot
8.01 - MSW
7.06 - OCW 8.01 - MSW

MIN
Bit 03: 0 -> 1 Bit 08: 0 -> 1
8.01 - MSW
Bit 02: 0 -> 1
Figure 1.5-2 - Start the Motor - Diagram
Þ As soon ACS1000 has finished to magnetizing the motor, Bit 02 in 8.01

MSW will be set to “1” Þ motor starts to accelerate to given speed
reference Þ as soon the actual motor speed reaches the given speed
reference Bit 08 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “1” Þ motor is running with
given speed reference


ACS1000 MSAI5150

MCB t n
823 D 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
337 H
drive is ready “RUNNING”
1.5.6 Change the Direction of Rotation (Motor is Running with Given Speed)
pre-conditions : 7.06 OCW - 5247D 3.24 REF1 OS - 20000D ( -20000D )

8.01 MSW - 823D
Þ speed reference change from overriding system; from +20000 to –20000
7.06 OVERRIDING CONTROL WORD

Zero d n
5247 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
147F
H
MAX Forward Reverse Forward

nmot
3.24 - Ref1 OS nref

(+ 20000)
0
t
3.24 - Ref1 OS
(- 20000)
MIN
Figure 1.5-3 - Change the Direction of Rotation - Diagram
Þ motor direction will be changed according to given speed reference Þ

+20000 maximum speed forward Þ -20000 maximum speed reverse

MSAI5150 ACS1000 361/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150

MCB t n
823 D 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
337 H
drive is “RUNNING”
1.5.7 Stop by “RAMP STOP” (Motor is Running with Given Speed)

8.01 MSW - 823D
Þ set Bit 03 & Bit 06 in 7.06 OCW to “0” Þ drive starts to decelerate to 0
rpm and will be switched off at zero speed

Zero d n
5175 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
1437
H
MAX
Stopping Stopped
7.06 - OCW
8.01 - MSW
Imot
t
nmot
MIN 7.06 - OCW 8.01 - MSW

Bit 03: 1 -> 0 Bit 02: 1 -> 0
Bit 06: 1 -> 0 8.01 - MSW
Bit 08: 1 -> 0
Figure 1.5-4 - Stop by “RAMP STOP” - Diagram
8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD

MCB t n
563 D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
233 H

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Þ drive starts to decelerate to 0 rpm Þ as soon the actual motor speed is below
the given speed reference Bit 08 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “0” Þ as soon the
actual motor speed reaches zero speed, drive will be switched off and Bit02 in 8.01
MSW will be set to “0” Þ drive is “READY FOR START”
1.5.8 Stop by “COAST STOP” (Motor is Running with Given Speed)

8.01 MSW - 823D
Þ set Bit 03 in 7.06 OCW to “0” Þ drive starts to ramp down (with zero torque), if
actual speed is below self excitation speed, drive will be switched off

Zero d n
5239 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
1477
H
MAX Ramp Stop with zero torque Coast Stop
7.06 - OCW
8.01 - MSW
nself
Imot
t
nmot
act speed <

MIN
7.06 - OCW self excit speed 8.01 - MSW
Bit 03: 1 -> 0 8.01 - MSW Bit 02: 1 -> 0
Bit 08: 1 -> 0
Figure 1.5-5 - Stop by “COAST STOP” - Diagram

MCB t n
MSAI5150 ACS1000 363/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
563 D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
233 H
Þ drive starts to decelerate with zero torque Þ as soon the actual motor speed is
below the given speed reference Bit 08 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “0” Þ as soon
the actual motor speed is below the self excitation speed the drive will be switched
off and Bit02 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “0” Þ drive is “READY FOR START”
1.5.9 Emergency Off (Motor is Running with Given Speed)

8.01 MSW - 823D
Þ set Bit 01 in 7.06 OCW to “0” Þ drive will be switched off immediately and
MCB will be opened

Zero d n
5245 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
147D
H
MAX Emergency Off /

Running
MCB Off
7.06 - OCW
8.01 - MSW
Imot
Udc
t
Imot
nmot
MIN
7.06 - OCW 8.01 - MSW
Bit 01: 1 -> 0 Bit 02: 1 -> 0
Bit 08: 1-> 0

ACS1000 MSAI5150

Figure 1.5-6 - Emergency Off - Diagram

MCB t n
616 D 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
268 H
Þ drive and MCB will be switched off immediately Þ Bit 03 & 06 in 8.01 MSW will
be set to “1” and Bit 00, 01, 02, 04 & 08 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “0” Þ drive is in
“TRIPPED” state
1.5.10 Emergency Stop (Motor is Running with Given Speed).

8.01 MSW - 823D
Þ set Bit 02 in 7.06 OCW to “0” Þ drive starts to decelerate to 0 rpm and MCB will
be switched off at zero speed

Zero d n
5243 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D
147B
H
MAX
Emergency Stop MCB Off
7.06 - OCW
Udc
8.01 - MSW
Imot
t
nmot
MIN 7.06 - OCW 8.01 - MSW

Bit 02: 1 -> 0 8.01 - MSW
Bit 08: 1 -> 0
Figure 1.5-7 - Emergency Stop - Diagram
MSAI5150 ACS1000 365/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Fieldbus Parameter Settings, Modbus & Profibus Addresses

MCB t n
600 D 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
258 H
Þ drive starts to decelerate to 0 rpm Þ as soon the actual motor speed is below
the given speed reference Bit 08 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “0” Þ as soon the
actual motor speed reaches zero speed, drive and MCB will be switched off Þ Bit
03 & 06 in 8.01 MSW will be set to “1” and Bit 00, 01, 02 & 05 in 8.01 MSW will be
set to “0” Þ drive is in “TRIPPED” state
1.6 Fieldbus Parameter Settings, Modbus & Profibus Addresses
1.6.1 MODBUS – Module
1.6.1.1 Modbus Module – Register Read and Write
The drive parameter and data set information is mapped into a 4xxxx
register area. This holding register area can be read from an external device,
and an external device can modify the register values by writing to them. There are
no setup parameters for mapping the data to the 4xxxx register. The mapping is
pre-defined and corresponds directly to the drive parameter grouping which is
being used by the local drive panel. All parameters are available for both reading
and writing.
The parameter writes are verified for correct value, and for valid register
addresses. Some parameters never allow writes (including actual values), some
parameters allow write only when the drive is stopped (including setup variables),
and some can be modified at any time (including actual reference values).
Register Mapping:
The drive parameters are mapped to the 4xxxx area so that:
• 40001 – 40096 are reserved for data sets.

• 40101 – 49999 are reserved for parameters.
In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the group number,
while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group.

ACS1000 MSAI5150

Register addresses 4GGPP are shown in table below. In this table GG is
the group number, and PP is the parameter number within the group.
Parameter Mapping
4GGPP GG PP
40001 – 40096 00 Data sets 01 Data word 1.1
02 Data word 1.2
03 Data word 1.3
04 Data word 2.1
05 Data word 2.2
06 Data word 2.3
Data Sets
07 Data word 3.1
...
94 Data word 32.1
95 Data word 32.2
96 Data word 32.3
40101 – 40199 01 Group 01 01 Parameter 01

02 Parameter 02
...
99 Parameter 99
40201 – 40299 02 Group 02 01 Parameter 01
Parameters 02 Parameter 02
...
99 Parameter 99
… … …
49901 – 49999 99 Group 99 01 Parameter 01
…
99 Parameter 99
CAUTION! The register addresses which are not allocated to any drive parameter or data set
are invalid. No reads or writes are allowed for these addresses. If there is an
attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface
will return an exception code to the controller. Refer to the drive manuals for its
data sets, group and parameter numbers supported.
Detailed instructions for the installation and programming are described in the
NMBA-01 Installation and Start-up Guide manual.
1.6.2 PROFIBUS – Module
CAUTION! The type definition (GSD) file required for configuration of the master station is
available from www.profibus.com or your local ABB representative. The filename
is ABB_6012.GSD. Please refer to the master station documentation for more
information.
GSD File:
ASCII-format device descriptions file in a specified form. Each device (active &
passive stations) on PROFIBUS has to have its own GSD File.
1.6.2.1 Profibus Module NPBA 12 SW Version 1.4
1.6.2.1.1 Profibus Module – Parameters in cyclic communication (DP)
With NPBA-12 SW version V1.4 Request Labels 1, 2 and 3 can be used to

access drive parameters and PROFIBUS parameters Examples of using
these Request Labels are presented at the end of Chapter 6 of the NPBA-
12 Installation and Start-up Guide. The following is a table of the
Request/Response functions updated for NPBA-12 SW Version V1.4.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 367/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Request Labels (from Master to Slave)
Request Function Response

Labels
Ackn. Ackn.
(+) (-)
0 No task 0 -
1 Request parameter value 1 7
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7
3 Change parameter value (double 2 7
word)
*4 Request description element 3 7
*5 Change description element 3 7
6 Request parameter value (array) 4 7
7 to 15 Reserved
*Not supported
Example 1: Reading a drive parameter
In this example, PROFIBUS Parameter No. 918 is used to read the station
number of the slave.
Parameter 918 Þ 918d Þ 396h
The slave returns its station number Þ 2

ACS1000 MSAI5150

Example 2: Writing a drive parameter
In this example, current parameter settings are saved to the FLASH

memory of the drive. This is done by setting the value of PROFIBUS
Parameter No. 971 to 1.
Parameter 971 Þ 971d Þ 3CBh
NOTE!
The drive always observes the Control Word (CW) and Reference (REF)
bytes. The values shown below are examples.
1.6.2.1.2 Profibus Module NPBA 12 – Profibus Parameters

CAUTION! The register addresses which are not allocated to any drive parameter or data set are invalid. No
reads or writes are allowed for these addresses. If there is an attempt to read or write outside the
parameter addresses, the Modbus interface will return an exception code to the controller. Refer to
the drive manuals for its data sets, group and parameter numbers supported.
Detailed instructions for the installation and programming are described in the NPBA-12
Installation and Start-up Guide manual.
NPBA-12 Profibus - Module NPBA-12 Profibus - Module NPBA-12 Profibus - Module

Profibus AMC - Table Profibus AMC - Table Profibus AMC - Table
Par. No Par.No Par. No Par.No Par. No Par.No
1 … 25 1.01 … 1.25 406 … 430 17.01 … 17.25 806 … 830 33.01 … 33.25
26 … 50 2.01 … 2.25 431 … 455 18.01 … 18.25 831 … 855 34.01 … 34.25
51 … 75 3.01 … 3.10 456 … 480 19.01 … 19.25 856 … 880 35.01 … 35.25
76 … 100 4.01 … 4.40 481 … 505 20.01 … 20.25 1001 … 1018 36.01 … 36.18
101 … 125 5.01 … 5.25 506 … 530 21.01 … 21.25 1019 … 1036 37.01 … 37.18
126 … 150 6.01 … 6.25 531 … 555 22.01 … 22.25 1037 … 1054 38.01 … 38.18
151 ... 175 7.01 … 7.10 556 … 580 23.01 … 23.25 1055 … 1072 39.01 … 39.18
176 … 200 8.01 … 8.25 581 … 605 24.01 … 24.25 1073 … 1090 40.01 … 40.18
201 … 225 9.01 … 9.40 606 … 630 25.01 … 25.25 1091 … 1108 41.01 … 41.18
226 … 250 10.01 … 10.25 631 … 655 26.01 … 26.25 --- 42
251 … 275 11.01 … 11.25 656 … 680 27.01 … 27.25 --- 43
276 … 300 12.01 … 12.25 681 … 705 28.01 … 28.25 --- 44
301 … 330 13.01 … 13.30 706 … 730 29.01 … 29.25 --- 45
331 … 355 14.01 … 14.25 731 … 755 30.01 … 30.25 --- 46
356 … 380 15.01 … 15.25 756 … 780 31.01 … 31.25 --- 47
381 … 405 16.01 … 16.25 781 … 805 32.01 … 32.25 --- 48
MSAI5150 ACS1000 369/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Profibus Module NPBA 12 – Profibus Parameters

NPBA-12 Profibus - Module NPBA-12 Profibus - Module NPBA-12 Profibus - Module
Profibus AMC - Table Profibus AMC - Table Profibus AMC - Table
Par. No Par.No Par. No Par.No Par. No Par.No
--- 49 1350 … 1367 66.01 … 66.18 1598 … 1615 83.01 … 83.18
1109 … 1126 50.01 … 50.18 1368 … 1385 67.01 … 67.18 1616 … 1640 84.01 … 84.25
1127 … 1151 51.01 … 51.25 1386 … 1403 68.01 … 68.18 1641 … 1658 85.01 … 85.18
--- 52 1404 … 1421 69.01 … 69.18 1659 … 1683 86.01 … 86.25
--- 53 1422 … 1439 70.01 … 70.18 1684 … 1701 87.01 … 87.18
--- 54 1440 … 1457 71.01 … 71.18 1702 … 1719 88.01 … 88.18
1152 … 1169 55.01 … 55.18 1458 … 1475 72.01 … 72.18 1720 … 1744 89.01 … 89.25
1170 … 1187 56.01 … 56.18 1476 … 1493 73.01 … 73.18 1745 … 1762 90.01 … 90.18
1188 … 1205 57.01 … 57.18 1494 … 1511 74.01 … 74.18 1763 … 1780 91.01 … 91.18
1206 … 1223 58.01 … 58.18 1512 … 1529 75.01 … 75.25 1781 … 1815 92.01 … 92.35
1224 … 1241 59.01 … 59.18 --- 76 1816 … 1833 93.01 … 93.18
1242 … 1259 60.01 … 60.18 --- 77 1834 … 1868 94.01 … 94.35
1260 … 1277 61.01 … 61.18 --- 78 1869 … 1886 95.01 … 95.18
1278 … 1295 62.01 … 62.18 --- 79 1887 … 1904 96.01 … 96.18
1296 … 1313 63.01 … 63.18 1530 … 1554 80.01 … 80.25 1905 … 1922 97.01 … 97.18
1314 … 1331 64.01 … 64.18 1555 … 1579 81.01 … 81.25 1923 … 1940 98.01 … 98.18
1332 … 1349 65.01 … 65.18 1580 … 1597 82.01 … 82.18 1941 … 1965 99.01 … 99.25
CAUTION! The register addresses which are not allocated to any drive parameter or data set
are invalid. No reads or writes are allowed for these addresses. If there is an
attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses, the Profibus interface
will return an exception code to the controller.
Detailed instructions for the installation and programming are described in the
NPBA-12 Installation and Start-up Guide manual.
1.6.2.2 Profibus Module NPBA 12 – SW Version 1.5 or later
1.6.2.2.1Profibus Module – Parameters in cyclic communication (DP)
With NPBA-12 SW version V1.5 (or later), Request Labels 1, 2 and 3 can
be used to access drive parameters and PROFIBUS parameters as with
older SW versions. Examples of using these Request Labels are presented
at the end of Chapter 6 of the NPBA-12 Installation and Start-up Guide.
The following is a table of the Request/Response functions updated for
NPBA-12 SW Version V1.5 (or later).
Request Labels (from Master to Slave)
Request Function Response Labels

Ackn. (+) Ackn. (-)
0 No task 0 -
1 Request parameter value 1, 2 7
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7, 8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7, 8
*4 Request description element 3 7
*5 Change description element 3 7, 8

ACS1000 MSAI5150

6 Request parameter value (array) 4, 5 7, 8
7 Change parameter value (array word) 4 7, 8
8 Change parameter value (array double 5 7, 8
word)
*9 Request number of array elements 6 7
With NPBA-12 SW version V1.5 (or later), drive parameters can also be
accessed using Request Labels 6, 7 and 8. The allocation of drive
parameters to the Parameter Identification part of the PPO type is shown
below:
DRIVE PARAMETERS
Sub-
Par. No. Index Sub-
Index Index Request Label Example
(Decimal (Decimal Index
(Decimal (Hex) Example No.
) ) (Hex)
)
101 1d 1d 1h 1h
102 1d 2d 1h 2h
199 1d 99d 1h 63h R/W 6/7 1, 2
: : : : :
9999 99d 99d 63h 63h
The Index column corresponds to the parameter number (PNU) in the ID

part of Parameter Identification. The Sub-index column corresponds to the
IND part of Parameter Identification. The Example No. column refers to the
examples below.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 371/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Example 1: Reading a drive parameter
To determine the parameter number and sub index for drive parameter
reading, convert the drive parameter group number and the parameter
index number to hexadecimal. The index number is the sub index (IND),
and the group number is the parameter number (PNU). For example, to
read parameter 84.11 from the drive:
Parameter 84.11 Þ Group 84d . Index 11d Þ Group 54h . Index 0Bh
84.11 = 54h.0Bh Þ Parameter Number = 54h, Sub index = 0Bh
Example 2: Writing a drive parameter
To determine the parameter number and sub index for drive parameter
writing, convert the drive parameter group number and the parameter index
number to hexadecimal. The index number is the sub index (IND), and the
group number is the parameter number (PNU). For example, to write
parameter 12.02 to the drive:
Parameter 12.02 Þ Group 12d . Index 02d Þ Group 0Ch . Index 02h
12.02 = 0Ch.02h Þ Parameter Number = 0Ch, Sub index = 02h

ACS1000 MSAI5150
MSAI5150 ACS1000 373/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Chapter 2 − Fault Tracing
Continue Description of Fault Trip Reactions
2.1 Description of Fault Trip Reactions
In the ACS 100 are different trip reactions possible.
2.1.1 Soft Stop (Trip Reaction)
· This is the normal stopping procedure, which is called “soft stop”

and if a stopping request is made I will be handled as follows:
· At first the rotation frequency of the drive will be reduced
(according to the deceleration time) below the critical frequency
for sine filter self excitation to a programmable level. If possible
braking energy will be provided to fasten this procedure, but if it
isn’t possible, the drive will be in the idle state until the frequency
is decreased to a spezified level.
· After that the torque will be reduced to zero with a ramp.
· At third the flux will also be reduced with a ramp in order to avoid
overcurrents.
· Then the zero voltage vector will be switched to short circuit the
machine. After a programmable period (5 times rotor time
constant or once the mechanical time constant) the inverter will be
switched off.
2.1.2 Trip with demagnetization
· This first tripping level will be used for slower protective actions
and it includes following actions:
· The torque will be reduced to zero with a ramp.
· The flux will also be reduced with a ramp in order to avoid
overcurrents.
· Then the zero voltage vector will be switched to short circuit the
machine. After a programmable period (5 times rotor time
constant or once the mechanical time constant) the inverter will be
switched off.
· Depending on the failure the MCB will be opened or stay closed.
Therefore we have two different kind of a Trip 1, in order to be
able to react the proper way according to the failure:
· FC2:In this case the MCB will stay closed. In case the MCB will
stay closed and the fault is reseted the drive is in the state „ready
to run“ again.
· FC1:In this case the MCB will be opened. In case the MCB is
opened, the drive is in the state „ready to charge“ after reseting
the fault.

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Description of Fault Trip Reactions

2.1.3 Trip without demagnetization (fast)
This trip will be used for fast protective actions and it consists of the
following action:
· All inverter IGCTs will be switched off directly; the protection
IGCTs will be opened directly in case of a GUSP fail.
With other faults the protection IGCTs will stay closed until the
DC-link voltage reaches the undervoltage alarm level.
Danger of “self excitation” if this trip happens above self excitation

speed !
Depending on the failure the MCB will be opened or stay closed. Therefore
we have two different kind of a Trip 2, in order to be able to react the proper
way according to the failure:
· FC2:In this case the MCB will stay closed. In case the MCB will
stay closed and the fault is reseted the drive is in the state „ready
to run“ again.
· FC1:In this case the MCB will be opened (the protection IGCTs
will be switched off with GUSP faults directly). In case the MCB is
opened, the drive is in the state „ready to charge“ after reseting
the fault.
2.1.4 Trip with zero vector
This trip is an enhanced tripping level of the trip 2 and it normally only will
occur, if the inverter is blocked. In this level following actions will be done:
· The machine will be short circuit with the zero voltage vector
directly.
· The protection IGCTs will be switched off in case of short circuit
faults.
With other faults the protection IGCTs will stay closed until the DC-
link voltage reaches the undervoltage alarm level.
· The MCB will be opened.
·
Self excitation could not happen, because the zero voltage will stay
switched. Only used if serious damage to the inverter has happened.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 375/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Chapter 3 − Stop Modes
Continue Ramp Stop Mode
Chapter 3 − Stop Modes
3.1 Ramp Stop Mode
When “STOP” command is given , the drive is stopping according following

steps:
· ramp motor below Parameter 20.3 “Stop drive tube” (according to

the deceleration time)
· set torque to zero
· ramp down flux to 20%
· short circuit machine with zero voltage vector for a programmable
time (5 times the rotor time constant or at least 1s)
.
3.2 Torque Stop Mode

steps
· deceleration time is set to zero value

· shaping is disabled
· motor is ramped down with maximal allowed braking current
respectively the maximal allowed DC voltage
3.3 Coast Stop Mode

steps
· set torque to zero

· drive stays running with zero torque until it is under the self
excitation frequency (deceleration time has no influence)
· ramp down flux to 10%
· short circuit machine with zero voltage vector for a programmable
time (5 times the rotor time constant or at least 1s)

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Chapter 4 − Input and Output Signals IOEC 1 … 6
Continue Basic I/O-Board IOEC 1

The following chapters give an overview of the I/O signals of all IOEC
boards according to the new aux. power concept.
The tables contain two columns with signal designations, one for ACS 1000
with EPS and one for ACS 1000 resp. ACS 1000i without EPS (new aux.
power concept, UPS). The new aux. power concept is part of the new I/O
concept which also supports ACS 1000i.
The UPS configuration is defined by type code and can be seen in
parameter 112.08 ‘UPSConfiguration’.
Meaning of the abbreviations and colors in the signal designations:
ACS 1000-A =ACS 1000 air cooled type; the signal designation is also valid
for ACS 1000i, if ACS 1000i is not extra listed,
ACS 1000-W =ACS 1000 water cooled type,
ACS 1000 =ACS 1000 air and water cooled type,
ACS 1000i =ACS 1000i (air cooled with integrated transformer).
blue =additional signal (compared to old I/O concept)

red =changed signal (compared to old I/O concept)
4.1 Basic I/O-Board IOEC 1
For the new aux. power concept, two new signals had to be placed on IOEC1:
‘UPS Alarm’ and ‘UPS in Battery Mode’. Therefore the ‘Tripping Loop
Supervision’ has been deleted and ‘Disable Local Operation’ has been
moved to IOEC2.
For the new signal ‘MCB Order Trip Supervision’ the signal ‘External Motor
Protection Tripped’ has been moved to IOEC3.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 377/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
INPUT Signal Designation ACS 1000 with EPS Signal Designation ACS 1000 / ACS 1000i Remarks
without EPS (default)
IOEC1 Digital Input

DI01 ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 1 Tripped ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 1 Tripped or Inverter Fan 1 low active
tripped for EC fans
resp. ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump 1 Tripped ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump 1 Tripped
ACS 1000i: Cooling Fan Grp. 1 Tripped
DI02 ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 2 Tripped ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 2 Tripped or Transformer low active
Fan 1 tripped for EC fans
resp. ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump 2 Tripped ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump 2 Tripped
ACS 1000i: Cooling Fan Grp. 2 Tripped
DI03 ACS 1000-A: Inv. differential press. trip of cooling air ACS 1000-A: Inv. differential press. trip of cooling air low active
supervision supervision or Inverter Fan 2 tripped for EC fans
resp. ACS 1000-W: Auxiliary Fan 1 Tripped ACS 1000-W: Auxiliary Fan 1 Tripped
ACS 1000i: Inv. & Trafo differential press. trip of
cooling air supervision
DI04 Tripping loop supervision Control Backup Supply Failure low active
DI05 Internal/external emerg. off signal Internal/external emerg. off signal low active
DI06 Pushbutton Main Circuit Breaker Order Open Pushbutton Main Circuit Breaker Order Open high active
DI07 Pushbutton Main Circuit Breaker Order Close Pushbutton Main Circuit Breaker Order Close high active
DI08 Disable Local Operation Control Supply Failure low active
DI09 ACS 1000-A: Air Filter Supervision Alarm ACS 1000-A: Air Filter Supervision Alarm or high active
Transformer Fan 2 tripped for EC fans
Resp ACS 1000-W: Level Expansion Vessel Low ACS 1000-W: Level Expansion Vessel Low low active
DI10 Grounding Switch Open Grounding Switch Open high active
DI11 Grounding Switch Closed Grounding Switch Closed high active
DI12 Motor or cabinet heater Tripped Motor or cabinet heater Tripped low active
DI13 (External) Trafo Protection Tripped (External) Trafo Protection Tripped low active
DI14 External Motor Protection Tripped MCB Order Trip Supervision low active
IOEC1 Digital Output

DO01 ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 1 Order On ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 1 Order On 1=on cmd
resp. ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump1 Order On ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump1 Order On
ACS 1000i: Cooling Fan Grp. 1 Order On
DO02 ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 2 Order On ACS 1000: prog. prog.
resp. ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump 2 Order On or ACS 1000i: Trafo Prot. Relay Reset 1=reset
DO03 Main Circuit Breaker Open Ind. Main Circuit Breaker Open Ind. 1=open
DO04 Gnd-isol. unlock, rel. for closing Gnd-isol. unlock, rel. for closing 1=release
DO05 Motor heater order on Motor heater order on 0=on cmd
DO06 Main Circuit Breaker Order Trip Main Circuit Breaker Order Trip 0=trip
IOEC1 Analog Input

AI01 Reference Value 2 (speed or torque reference, macro Reference Value 2 (speed or torque reference, macro prog.
depending) depending) or EC fan air pressure measurement
AI02 ACS 1000-A: Inv. Air Temp. 2 ACS 1000-A: Inv. Air Temp. 2 4...20mA
ACS 1000-W: Cooling Water Temp. ACS 1000-W: Cooling Water Temp.
AI03 ACS 1000-A: - ACS 1000-A: - 4...20mA
ACS 1000-W: Cooling Water Pressure 1 ACS 1000-W: Cooling Water Pressure 1
ACS 1000i: Trafo Wdg. Temp. 1
AI04 ACS 1000-A: - ACS 1000-A: - 4...20mA
ACS 1000-W: Cooling Water Conductivity ACS 1000-W: Cooling Water Conductivity
ACS 1000i: Trafo Air Temp. or Trafo Wdg. Temp. 2
IOEC1 Analog Output

AO01 Motor Current Actual Value Motor Current Actual Value or EC Fan Speed prog.
Reference 1
AO02 ACS 1000: Shaft Power Actual Value ACS 1000: Shaft Power Actual Value prog.
ACS 1000i: 4mA for Temp. Measurement

ACS1000 MSAI5150

4.2 Basic I/O-Board IOEC 2
New aux. power concept:

Because ‘Disable Local Operation’ has been moved to IOEC2, ‘Feedb. sig.
water valve pos. “closed”’ has been moved to IOEC3.
IOEC2 Digital Input

DI01 Standard Input 1, Depending on Application Macro Standard Input 1, Depending on Application Macro prog.
(Default: Start / Stop) (Default: Start / Stop)
(Default: Fwd. / Rev.) (Default: Fwd. / Rev.)
(Default: -) (Default: -)
(Default: Ramp 1 / Ramp 2) (Default: Ramp 1 / Ramp 2)
(Default: Const. Speed 1…3) (Default: Const. Speed 1…3)
(Default: Const. Speed 1…3) (Default: Const. Speed 1…3)
DI07 Remote Main Circuit Breaker Order Close Remote Main Circuit Breaker Order Close high
active
DI08 Process Stop Process Stop low
active
DI09 Main Circuit Breaker Open (with ext. MCB) Main Circuit Breaker Open (with ext. MCB) high
active
DI10 Main Circuit Breaker Closed Main Circuit Breaker Closed high
active
DI11 Main Circuit Breaker Avail. (with ext. MCB) Main Circuit Breaker Avail. (with ext. MCB) prog.
DI12 Remote Reset Remote Reset high
active
DI13 Remote Main Circuit Breaker Order Open Remote Main Circuit Breaker Order Open high
active
DI14 Feedb. sig. water valve pos. “closed” Disable Local Operation high
active

DO01 prog. (def. Drive Ready) prog. (def. Drive Ready) prog.
DO02 prog. (def. Drive Running) prog. (def. Drive Running) prog.
DO03 prog. (def. Drive Alarm) prog. (def. Drive Alarm) prog.
DO04 prog. (def. Drive Trip) prog. (def. Drive Trip) prog.
DO05 Main Circuit Breaker Order Open Main Circuit Breaker Order Open low
active
DO06 Main Circuit Breaker Order Close Main Circuit Breaker Order Close high
active
IOEC2 Analog Input

AI01 Reference Value 1 (speed reference) Reference Value 1 (speed reference) prog.
AI02 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase U1 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase U1 prog.
AI03 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase V1 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase V1 prog.
AI04 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase W1 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase W1 prog.
IOEC2 Analog Output

AO01 Motor Speed Actual Value Motor Speed Actual Value prog.
AO02 Motor Torque Filt. Actual Value Motor Torque Filt. Actual Value prog.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 379/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Optional I/O Board IOEC 3
4.3 Optional I/O Board IOEC 3
New aux. power concept:

Because ‘Feedb. sig. water valve pos. “closed”’ and ‘External Motor
Protection Tripped’ have been moved to IOEC3, ‘Supply Voltage Unbalance
Trip’ and ‘Motor Overspeed Trip’ have been removed.
IOEC3 Digital Input

DI01 ACS 1000: Trafo Oil Level Alarm ACS 1000: Trafo Oil Level Alarm prog.
ACS 1000i: -
DI02 ACS 1000: Trafo Temp. Alarm ACS 1000: Trafo Temp. Alarm prog.
ACS 1000i: -
DI03 ACS 1000: Trafo Temp. Trip ACS 1000: Trafo Temp. Trip low active
ACS 1000i: -
DI04 ACS 1000: TrafoBuchhlzAlm ACS 1000: TrafoBuchhlzAlm prog.
or ACS 1000: TrafoFan1tripped or ACS 1000: TrafoFan1tripped low active
ACS 1000i: -
DI05 ACS 1000: TrafoBuchhlzTrip ACS 1000: TrafoBuchhlzTrip low active
or ACS 1000: TrafoFan2tripped or ACS 1000: TrafoFan2tripped low active
ACS 1000i: -
DI06 (External) Motor Cooling Alarm (External) Motor Cooling Alarm prog.
DI07 (External) Motor Cooling Trip (External) Motor Cooling Trip low active
DI08 Motor Vibration Supervision Alarm Motor Vibration Supervision Alarm prog.
DI09 Motor Vibration Supervision Trip Motor Vibration Supervision Trip low active
DI10 Motor Overspeed Trip External Motor Protection Tripped low active

ACS1000 MSAI5150

DI11 External Motor Protection Alarm External Motor Protection Alarm prog.
DI12 Motor Cooler Trip Motor Cooler Trip low active
DI13 Supply Voltage Unbalance Trip ACS 1000-W: Feedb. sig. water valve pos. “closed” high active
ACS 1000-A: -
DI14 ACS 1000-A: - ACS 1000-A: -
ACS 1000-W: Feedb. sig. water. valve pos “open” ACS 1000-W: Feedb. sig. water. valve pos “open” high active

DO01 prog. (def. Speed Ref Limit) prog. (def. Speed Ref Limit) prog.
or Motor Cooler Order On or Motor Cooler Order On 1=on cmd
DO02 prog. (def. Local Mode operation) prog. (def. Local Mode operation) prog.
resp. - or ACS 1000-A: Cooling Fan 2 Order On 1=on cmd
- ACS 1000-W: Cooling Pump 2 Order On
- ACS 1000i: Cooling Fan Grp. 2 Order On
DO03 prog. (def. Speed Act Limit) prog. (def. Speed Act Limit) prog.
or ACS 1000-W: Order close raw water regulation or ACS 1000-W: Order close raw water regulation 1=close
valve 1 valve 1
DO04 prog. (def. Motor Current Limit) prog. (def. Motor Current Limit) prog.
or ACS 1000-W: Order open raw water regulation or ACS 1000-W: Order open raw water regulation 1=open
valve 1 valve 1
DO05 prog. (def. Motor Torque Limit) prog. (def. Motor Torque Limit) prog.
or ACS 1000i: Trafo Fan 1 Order on or ACS 1000i: Trafo Fan 1 Order on 1=on cmd
DO06 prog. (def. Sup Sig 1 Limit) prog. (def. Sup Sig 1 Limit) prog.
or ACS 1000i: Trafo Fan 2 Order on or ACS 1000i: Trafo Fan 2 Order on 1=on cmd
IOEC3 Analog Input

AI01 ACS 1000: Trafo Temp. Extern ACS 1000: Trafo Temp. Extern prog.
ACS 1000i: Trafo Wdg. Temp. 3 (intern)
or Load Bearing Temp. 1 or Load Bearing Temp. 1
or Vibration Sensor 1 or Vibration Sensor 1
AI02 Motor Bearing Temp. of Driven End Motor Bearing Temp. of Driven End prog.
AI03 Motor Bearing Temp. of Non-Driven End Motor Bearing Temp. of Non-Driven End prog.
AI04 Outside Air Temp. Outside Air Temp. prog.
or Load Bearing Temp. 2 or Load Bearing Temp. 2
or Vibration Sensor 2 or Vibration Sensor 2
or Cooling Water Pressure 2 or Cooling Water Pressure 2
or Output Trafo Temp. or Output Trafo Temp.
IOEC3 Analog Output

AO01 Speed Ref Speed Ref or EC fan speed reference 2 prog.
AO02 Motor Torque filt Motor Torque filt prog.
MSAI5150 ACS1000 381/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
4.4 Optional I/O Board IOEC 4
IOEC4 Digital Input

DI01 External Water Cooling Unit Alarm External Water Cooling Unit Alarm prog.
DI02 External Water Cooling Unit Trip External Water Cooling Unit Trip low active
DI03 Braking Chopper Fan/Pump Alarm Braking Chopper Fan/Pump Alarm low active
DI04 Liquid Leakage Alarm Liquid Leakage Alarm prog.
DI05 Output Isolator Status Open Output Isolator Status Open high active
DI06 Output Isolator Status Closed Output Isolator Status Closed high active
DI07 Input Isolator Status Open Input Isolator Status Open high active
DI08 Input Isolator Status Closed Input Isolator Status Closed high active
DI09 Auxiliary Fan 2 Tripped Auxiliary Fan 2 Tripped low active
DI10 IOEC4_DI10_USER IOEC4_DI10_USER

DO01 prog. (def. Speed Ref Limit) prog. (def. Speed Ref Limit) prog.
DO02 prog. (def. Speed Act Limit) prog. (def. Speed Act Limit) prog.
DO03 prog. (def. Mot Curr Limit) prog. (def. Mot Curr Limit) prog.
DO04 prog. (def. Mot Torque Limit) prog. (def. Mot Torque Limit) prog.
or External Water Cooling Unit Start or External Water Cooling Unit Start prog.
or Brake chopper Cool. Fan/Pump Order On or Brake chopper Cool. Fan/Pump Order On 1=on cmd
IOEC4 Analog Input

AI01 Analog Input 1, actual sig 1 for PID-Controller Analog Input 1, actual sig 1 for PID-Controller prog.
AI02 Analog Input 2, actual sig 2 for PID-Controller Analog Input 2, actual sig 2 for PID-Controller prog.
or Motor Winding Temp. of Phase U2 or Motor Winding Temp. of Phase U2 prog.
AI03 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase V2 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase V2 prog.
AI04 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase W2 Motor Winding Temp. of Phase W2 prog.
IOEC4 Analog Output

AO01 Motor Speed Actual Value, Depending on Application Motor Speed Actual Value, Depending on Application prog.
Macro Macro
AO02 Motor Torque filt, Depending on Application Macro Motor Torque filt, Depending on Application Macro prog.

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Optional I/O Board IOEC 5 – Synchronised Bypass

4.5 Optional I/O Board IOEC 5 – Synchronised Bypass
New with Synchrotakt 5:

Motor selection for motor 3 and 4 on IOEC6.
New selector for synchronization mode on DI08: 0 = ACS to line, 1 = line to
ACS.
DO02 not used.
IOEC5 Digital Input

DI01 Synchrotact 5 tripped Synchrotact 5 tripped low active
DI02 Order to increase frequency (speed) from Order to increase frequency (speed) from high active
synchrotact synchrotact
DI03 Order to decrease frequency (speed) from Order to decrease frequency (speed) from high active
synchrotact synchrotact
DI04 Order to increase voltage (speed) from synchrotact Order to increase voltage (speed) from synchrotact high active
DI05 Order to decrease voltage(speed) from synchrotact Order to decrease voltage(speed) from synchrotact high active
DI06 Select motor 1 Select motor 1 high active
DI08 Select synch. mode (0=ACS to Line, 1=Line to Select synch. mode (0=ACS to Line, 1=Line to high active
ACS) ACS)
DI09 Stop the synchronizing sequence Stop the synchronizing sequence high active
DI10 Start synchronizing sequence Start synchronizing sequence high active
DI11 Order for opening line breaker 1 (SBP1) Order for opening line breaker 1 (SBP1) high active
DI12 Motor Circuit Breaker 1 available Motor Circuit Breaker 1 available high active
DI13 Motor Circuit Breaker 1 closed Motor Circuit Breaker 1 closed high active
DI14 Line Circuit Breaker (SBP1) 1 closed Line Circuit Breaker (SBP1) 1 closed high active

DO01 On/off command for Synchrotact 5 On/off command for Synchrotact 5 1=on cmd
0=off cmd
DO02 - -
DO03 Synchronizing to / from line selection Synchronizing to / from line selection 1=ACS1000
->Line
0=Line
->ACS1000
DO04 Line Circuit Breaker 1 order open Line Circuit Breaker 1 order open 0=open
DO05 Motor Circuit Breaker 1…4 order open Motor Circuit Breaker 1…4 order open 0=open
DO06 Motor Circuit Breaker 1 order close Motor Circuit Breaker 1 order close 1=close
IOEC5 Analog Input

AI01 - -
AI02 - -
AI03 - -
AI04 - -
IOEC5 Analog Output

AO01 - -
AO02 - -
MSAI5150 ACS1000 383/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Optional I/O Board IOEC 6 – Synchronised Bypass (only for 2…4 Motors)
4.6 Optional I/O Board IOEC 6 – Synchronised Bypass (only for 2…4
Motors)
New with Synchrotakt 5:

Motor selection for motor 3 and 4 on DI13, DI14.
IOEC6 Digital Input

DI06 Line Circuit Breaker 2 closed Line Circuit Breaker 2 closed high active

DO01 Motor Circuit Breaker 2 order close Motor Circuit Breaker 2 order close 1=on cmd
DO02 Line Circuit Breaker 2 order open Line Circuit Breaker 2 order open 0=off cmd
IOEC6 Analog Input

AI01 - -
AI02 - -
AI03 - -
AI04 - -
IOEC6 Analog Output

AO01 - -
AO02 - -

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Chapter 5 − Service and Comissioning Parameters
Continue Service Data

5.1 Service Data
112 Group SERVICE DATA

name:
Description: Do not change without instructions !
01 INU NOM VOLTAGE

Index Description: Downloaded inverter nominal supply voltage. The correct value will be set by the loading
package.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: Int. scaling:
02 INU MAX CURRENT

Index Description: Downloaded inverter maximum current. The correct value will be set by the loading
package.
Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: Int. scaling:
03 INU MAX POWER

Index Description: Downloaded inverter nominal power. The correct value will be set by the loading package.
Unit: kVA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100000 Def: Int. scaling:
04 NOM DC VOLTAGE
Index Description: Downloaded inverter nominal DC-link voltage. The correct value will be set by the loading
package.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: Int. scaling:
05 INU CONFIGURATION
Index Description: Inverter Unit Type. The correct value will be set by the loading package.
Note:
Do not change!
0 = SINGLE INU single inverter unit
Unit: - Type: I Min: 0 Max: 0 Def: 0 Int. scaling: -
06 LSU SUPERVISION
Index Description: RESERVED
Note:
Do not change!
Unit: - Type: B Min: 0 Max: 0 Def: 0 Int. scaling:
07 PFF ENABLE
Note:
Do not change!
08 HARDPARALLEL ENA
Note:
Do not change!
MSAI5150 ACS1000 385/389

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Service Data
09 (Not Used)
Index Description:
10 DC LINK CAPACITY
Index Description: DC-link capacitance.
Unit: µF Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:
11 SERIES INDUCTANCE
Index Description: Cable inductance in case of cables longer than 1000 meter.
Unit: mH Type: R Min: 0 Max: 40 Def: 0 Int. scaling:
12 STRAY CAPACITANCE
Index Description: Cable capacitance in case of cables longer than 1000 meter.
Unit: µF Type: R Min: 0 Max: 50 Def: 0 Int. scaling:
13 UPS CONFIGURATION
Index Description: In this parameter the implemented ‘Uninterruptible Power Supply’ configuration is shown.
It is set automatically by the loading package according to the type code.
NOTE!
With the configurations 1 and 2 the following signals are connected and the new I/O concept
is used:
IOEC1DI04Control Backup Supply Failure,
IOEC1DI08Control Supply Failure
1 = UPS/Ext3Pinternal UPS (no external safeline) and external 3-phase voltage,
2 = Safel/Ext3Pexternal safeline and external 3-phase voltage.
3 = UPS/Int3Pinternal UPS (no external safeline) and internal 3-phase voltage,
4 = Safel/Int3Pexternal safeline and internal 3-phase voltage.
Unit: - Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. scaling: -
14 INTEGRATED MCB
Index Description: Only for ACS 1000i:
The correct value will be set by the loading package.
0 = FALSE
1 = TRUE
Unit: - Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling: -
15 INV TIME CONSTANT

Index Description: Inverter time constant for temporary overload.

ABB
5.2 Group 150 MOTOR PARAMETERS (Partly)
150.0 RS
1
Index Description: Stator resistance RS.
Unit: W Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: Int. scaling:
150.0 LS
2
Index Description: Stator inductance LS.
Unit: mH Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: Int. scaling:
150.0 SIGMALS
3
Index Description: sLS value.
Unit: mH Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: Int. scaling:
150.0 ROTOR TIMECONST

4
Index Description: Estimated time constant of the rotor
Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: Int. scaling:

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Group 152 SINE FILTER PARA (Partly)
5.3 Group 152 SINE FILTER PARA (Partly)
152.0 Filter Inductance

1
Index Description: Filter inductance L F. The correct value will be set by the loading package or during the filter
ID-Run.
Unit: mH Type: R Min: 0.4 Max: 14 Def: Int. scaling:
152.0 Filter Capacity

2
Index Description: Filter capacitance CF . The correct value will be set by the loading package or during the filter
ID-Run.
Unit: µF Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2000 Def: Int. scaling:
152.0 RLFi
3
Index Description: Filter resistance RLF. The correct value will be set by the loading package or during the filter
ID-Run.
Unit: W Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1000 Def: Int. scaling:
152.1 SelfExcitSpeed
0
Index Description: The self excitation speed of the motor is automatically calculated using the following
formula:
1 60
n selfex = 0 . 8 × ×
LS × C f 2 × p × p
Example:
Motor Data: n = 1200rpm ; f = 60Hz

par. 112.14 LS =113.8mH, par. 112.11 CF =135mF
Calculated Values: p= f * 60 / n = 60Hz * 60 / 1200rpm = 3
1 60
nselfex = 0.8 × × = 651rpm
113.8 × 10 H × 135 × 10 F 2 × p × 3
-3 -6
Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:

ACS1000 MSAI5150
Continue Group 191 Diagnostics

5.4 Group 191 Diagnostics
191 Group name: DIAGNOSTICS

Description: Diagnostics/tuning signals and parameters. Do not change without instructions !
01 R SWITCH POSITION
Index Description: This index includes switch positions of INU during time t-875ms…t+250ms with 25ms resolution
(t is time instant of latest stop/trip). Switch positions are visible with CDP312 panel and phase
order is A,B,C from left to right.
Unit: Type: txt Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
02 R/W DI/DT-MON ILIM

Index Description: Current limit above which monitoring of short circuit supervision circuitry is active.
Unit: A Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
03 R/W DATALOGGER AUTO

Index Description: Changes the behaviour of the dataloggers after a reset command.
TRUE Dataloggers are automatically restarted after reset, the old values will
be overwritten.
FALSE Dataloggers are not automatically restarted.
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
19 R SET RTC TO 12:00

Index Description: Set Real Time Clock (RTC) to 12:00:00 (from application) on raising edge.
ON Command is activated (raising edge).
OFF Command is not activated (falling edge).
Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:
21 R NR OF AUTORESTS
Index Description: Diagnostic counter of number of Auto Restarts
Unit: pc Type: I Min: 0 Max: Def: Int. scaling:
s
MSAI5150 ACS1000 389/389

Acs 1000 Abb

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acs 1000 Abb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB

Signal and Parameter Table

© ABB Switzerland Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

ABB reserves all rights to this document. Misuse, in particular duplication

2/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

Signal and Parameter Table ............................................................................................... 6

MSAI5150 ACS1000 3/389

Chapter 1 − Fieldbus Control ......................................................................................... 347

4/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

Chapter 2 − Fault Tracing ............................................................................................... 374

Chapter 3 − Stop Modes ................................................................................................. 376

Chapter 4 − Input and Output Signals IOEC 1 … 6 ....................................................... 377

Chapter 5 − Service and Comissioning Parameters..................................................... 385

MSAI5150 ACS1000 5/389

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Phone:+41 844 845 845

6/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

Group 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS

01.01 ProcessSpeed [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.02 MOTOR SPEED [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.03 FILT MOT SPEED [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.04 MOTOR SPEED TACHO [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.06 FREQUENCY [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.07 FILT MOT RMS CUR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.08 FILT MOT TORQUE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.09 MOTOR TORQUE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.10 FILTERED POWER % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

MSAI5150 ACS1000 7/389

01.12 MOTOR COSFII ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.13 RS [ohm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.14 LS [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.15 SIGMALS [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.16 ROTOR TIMECONST [ms] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.18 MotCurrPhaseU_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.19 MotCurrPhaseV_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.20 MotCurrPhaseW_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

01.21 MotCurrUnbalance [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

8/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

Group 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS

02.01 CONTROL MODE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.02 DC VOLTAGE UPPER [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.03 DC VOLTAGE UPP % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.04 DC VOLTAGE LOWER [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.05 DC VOLTAGE LOW % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.06 DC VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.07 DC VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.08 NP VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.09 NP VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.10 PHASE A INV CURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

MSAI5150 ACS1000 9/389

02.12 GROUND CURRENT [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.13 PHASE A FILTCURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.14 PHASE C FILTCURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.15 SWITCHING FREQ [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

02.16 INV AIR TEMP 1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

10/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

Group 3 ACTUAL SIGNALS

03.01 SPEED REF 2 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

03.02 SPEED REF 3 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

03.03 SPEED ERROR NEG [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

03.04 TORQUE PROP REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

03.05 TORQUE INTEG REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY

03.06 TORQUE DER REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY